Duane Reade Launches DR Walk-In Medical Care, the First in New York, Physician Present Retail Walk-In Service

NEW YORK, May 23 /PRNewswire/ — Duane Reade Holdings, Inc., the leading drug store chain in the New York metropolitan area, today announced its partnership with Consumer Health Services, Inc. (“CHS”) to launch DR Walk-in Medical Care. These sites provide New Yorkers with convenient access to high-quality, urgent and non-emergency medical services at affordable prices, with the unique option to see on-site physicians on a walk-in basis for immediate examination and treatment.

“From a public health perspective, this represents an important evolution in the retail care model,” said Columbia University Assistant Professor of Family Medicine, Dr. Susan Bowers-Johnson. “The fact is patients sometimes need immediate physician attention in non-emergency situations. Today, this often results in a trip to the ER when a patient’s doctor is not available to see them. New Yorkers need more access points to receive this form of care for acute conditions and injuries. By ensuring that this access model includes active physician participation in a patient’s care, I believe that these walk-in centers can effectively complement what physicians are providing within our health system.”

DR Walk-In Medical Care offers New Yorkers routine physical exams and basic treatment services for low-to-mildly acute illnesses and minor injuries, as well as health screenings, medical tests and vaccinations, where all commercial insurance is accepted.

In cases for which even further care is required, the physicians may then refer the patients directly to affiliated existing community healthcare systems. To ensure seamless and secure transfer of data for patients needing follow up care, each DR Walk-in Medical Care site will utilize an electronic medical record system, which is common in many physicians’ offices and large academic health systems.

Duane Reade and CHS have teamed to open three DR Walk-In Medical Care sites in the following Manhattan locations of Duane Reade:

   -- 1627 Broadway at 50th Street   -- 2589 Broadway at 97th Street   -- 125 East 86th Street at Lexington Avenue.   

A fourth DR Walk-in Medical Care site is expected to open at Duane Reade’s 1889 Broadway location at 63rd Street. Several additional locations are slated to open within the year based upon need and consumer demand.

“We are pleased to provide New Yorkers with affordable, top quality and convenient healthcare through this unique physician centric model” said Jerry Ray, Senior Vice President of Pharmacy with Duane Reade. “The launch of DR Walk-in Medical Care further honors our commitment to be a leading provider of health and wellness services in the New York metro market, and we thank the local community healthcare systems and physicians for their support.”

“Through DR Walk-In Medical Care we are able to extend our experience in the delivery of quality physician-based health services to consumers, to reach a broader patient audience, serve a wider range of ailments and take the retail-health concept to the next level,” said James A. D’Orta, M.D., founder of Consumer Health Services. “We are pleased to partner with Duane Reade in this exciting endeavor and believe that their commitment to health and wellness and unmatched footprint of convenient locations will certainly assist us in providing affordable and high quality service to New Yorkers and to visitors of this great city.”

About Duane Reade

Founded in 1960, Duane Reade is the largest drug store chain in the metropolitan New York City area, offering a wide variety of prescription and over-the-counter drugs, health and beauty care items, cosmetics, greeting cards, photo supplies and photofinishing. As of December 31, 2006, the Company operated 248 stores. For more information about Duane Reade, visit http://www.duanereade.com/.

About Consumer Health Services

Launched in 2006, Consumer Health Services, Inc. (CHS) has emerged as the nation’s premier manager of on-site consumer health centers. CHS implements its model through extensive collaboration and work with leading local health care delivery systems, doctors, nurses, physician assistants and insurers to offer quick, convenient, physician-directed care for individuals where they shop, where they work and where they travel. Today, more national retailers, hospitality companies and large employers are turning to CHS as a partner of choice to launch and manage successful consumer health centers that deliver an exceptional customer experience. To learn more about Consumer Health Services, visit us online at http://www.chscorp.com/.

   Contact:   For Duane Reade   Melissa Merrill   (212) 850-5600   FD    For Consumer Health Services   Sean O'Donnell   (202) 955-0000  

Duane Reade Holdings, Inc.

CONTACT: Melissa Merrill of FD, for Duane Reade, +1-212-850-5600; SeanO’Donnell, Consumer Health Services, +1-202-955-0000

Web site: http://www.duanereade.com/http://www.chscorp.com/

ACS, The Joint Commission Partner With AORN on National Time Out Day

DENVER, May 22 /PRNewswire/ — Wrong-site surgery and other preventable mistakes still occur too frequently in U.S. operating rooms. That’s why the American College of Surgeons (ACS) and The Joint Commission are partnering with AORN on its annual National Time Out Day observance on June 20. It will be the fourth consecutive year AORN has sponsored this event to highlight The Joint Commission’s mandated “time out” to verify the correct patient, correct procedure, and correct site before any surgery begins.

“Partnering on National Time Out Day from our surgical and accreditation partners symbolizes the collective effort required by every member of the surgical team to practice a time out and ensure correct patient, correct procedure, and correct site every time,” said AORN President Mary Jo Steiert, RN, BSN, CNOR.

“The American College of Surgeons views National Time Out Day as an important event for the entire surgical care team,” said ACS Executive Director Thomas R. Russell, MD, FACS. “This is an important patient safety initiative that reminds all members of the operating room team about the importance of maintaining clear communication as they review the case of the patient before them and during the actual surgical procedure,” he continued. “The day reinforces the good practice of overall clear communication, which should always be part of a surgical team’s routine. It is one of our best safety tools for preventing medical errors, and we encourage all surgeons to take the lead in serving as facilitators in this process.”

Speaking for The Joint Commission, Senior Vice President Paul Schyve, MD, said, “What happens in the perioperative environment is very complex, and complexity increases the risk of error. That’s why a time out that identifies a mistake in identifying the correct patient, the correct procedure, or the correct site before the error reaches the patient is so important for patient safety. National Time Out Day is a reminder that a time out should take place before every surgery.”

A time out is the last in a series of steps established in 2003 as part of The Joint Commission’s Universal Protocol for Preventing Wrong Site, Wrong Procedure, Wrong Person Surgery(TM).

Surgical teams across the United States are encouraged to participate in National Time Out Day. AORN, ACS, and The Joint Commission offer online resources for participation in this event to increase awareness that a time out must occur before every surgical procedure. For further details visit: http://www.aorn.org/.

About AORN

AORN, Inc., the Association of periOperative Registered Nurses, is the professional organization of perioperative registered nurses. AORN represents approximately 40,000 registered nurses in the United States and abroad who facilitate the management, teaching and practice of perioperative nursing, or who are enrolled in nursing education or engaged in perioperative research, as well as perioperative nurses who work in related business and industry sectors. AORN’s mission is to support registered nurses in achieving optimal outcomes for patients undergoing operative and other invasive procedures. AORN promotes quality patient care by providing its members with education, standards, services and representation. For more information, visit http://www.aorn.org/.

About American College of Surgeons

The American College of Surgeons is a scientific and educational organization of surgeons that was founded in 1913 to raise the standards of surgical practice and to improve the care of the surgical patient. The College is dedicated to the ethical and competent practice of surgery. Its achievements have significantly influenced the course of scientific surgery in America and have established it as an important advocate for all surgical patients. The College has more than 71,000 members and is the largest organization of surgeons in the world. For more information, visit http://www.facs.org/.

About The Joint Commission

Founded in 1951, The Joint Commission seeks to continuously improve the safety and quality of care provided to the public through the provision of health care accreditation and related services that support performance improvement in health care organizations. The Joint Commission evaluates and accredits nearly 15,000 health care organizations and programs in the United States, including more than 8,000 hospitals and home care organizations, and more than 6,300 other health care organizations that provide long term care, assisted living, behavioral health care, laboratory and ambulatory care services. The Joint Commission also accredits health plans, integrated delivery networks, and other managed care entities. In addition, The Joint Commission provides certification of disease-specific care programs, primary stroke centers, and health care staffing services. An independent, not-for-profit organization, The Joint Commission is the nation’s oldest and largest standards-setting and accrediting body in health care. Learn more about The Joint Commission at http://www.jointcommission.org/.

   Contact: Carina Stanton, AORN            303-755-6304 ext. 269    E-mail: [email protected]  

AORN

CONTACT: Carina Stanton of AORN, +1-303-755-6304, ext. 269,[email protected]

Web site: http://www.facs.org/

Web site: http://www.jointcommission.org/

Web site: http://www.aorn.org/

Secret Test Gave Patients a Substitute for Blood: In Detroit, One of 9 Died; U.S. Agency is Investigating

By Steve Neavling, Detroit Free Press

May 22–You’re in a car crash, unconscious and bleeding profusely.

Without your consent, you are injected with an experimental blood substitute being randomly tested on victims of car crashes, shootings and other trauma. That’s exactly what happened to nine trauma patients — one of whom died — at two Detroit hospitals last year.

Nine other patients randomly selected to receive the standard treatment — saline solution and real blood — survived.

The blood substitute, Polyheme, was tested in 20 cities.

The U.S. Food and Drug Administration is investigating 46 deaths nationwide among the 349 subjects who received Polyheme in the clinical trial. By contrast, 35 of the 363 patients given the standard treatment died.

In most clinical studies, patients must volunteer, usually doing so with the hope of being cured through the experimental treatment.

But the Polyheme trial was one of 15 no-consent studies permitted by the FDA since 1996, when it began allowing researchers to enroll patients in clinical tests without their permission if the treatment showed enough potential to save lives.

Some medical ethicists are outraged at the Polyheme trial.

“This is completely unethical,” said Dr. Sidney Wolfe, director of Public Citizen’s Health Research Group. “They withheld blood — the gold standard — for a product that has proven in previous clinical circumstances to raise the death rate.”

Inside the study

Northfield Laboratories of Evanston, Ill., Polyheme’s manufacturer, contends there was no other way to test the product. Trauma patients are generally unconscious and cannot give consent.

“If I were injured, would I want Polyheme? Absolutely. I would prefer it,” said Dr. Larry Diebel, who led the trials in Detroit and is a medical professor at Wayne State University. Detroit Receiving and Sinai Grace hospitals participated in the testing.Northfield maintains that there were violations of study protocols with nearly one-fifth of the participants. In some cases, it said, paramedics gave Polyheme to people who were going to die regardless of treatment.

The company plans to release a report as early as this month from a research organization it contracted with to review the data. In December, Northfield’s data showed that if 122 questionable cases were excluded, the increase in the mortality rate for those who received Polyheme over those who received blood was just 18.7%. Without those cases being excluded, the rate was 49%.

To fill a critical need

Another no-consent study involving Hemopure, a similar blood substitute manufactured by Biopure of Cambridge, Mass., was halted in December by the FDA.. The agency raised concerns that the Navy personnel on whom the product was being tested were dying and suffering heart attacks.

The FDA declined to comment on the Polyheme study while it is reviewing it.

Advocates say Polyheme, which is made by extracting oxygen-carrying hemoglobin from human red blood cells, comes along at a time when the United States is facing a critical blood shortage.

Nationally, about 100,000 people die of bleeding injuries every year. Medical professionals say some deaths could be prevented if not for blood shortages.

The shortage of O-negative blood, the universal-donor blood type that can be administered to any patient, is especially acute. At southeastern Michigan hospitals, the demand for O-negative is so high that none is stockpiled, said Martha Kurz, spokeswoman for the American Red Cross of Southeastern Michigan.

A blood substitute such as Polyheme could be especially useful in combat because the product has a long shelf life and doesn’t need to be refrigerated, researchers say.

Hemorrhaging remains a main cause of death on the battlefield, and the U.S. Army reports about 60% of those injured in Iraq suffered substantial blood loss.

Earlier problems

Northfield Laboratories was criticized in 2001 for a four-year Polyheme study on aneurysm-surgery patients.

Ten of 81 patients who were given the substitute suffered heart attacks, including two who died. None of the 71 patients on standard therapy had heart attacks.

The company blamed the heart attacks on an excess of total fluids given to Polyheme patients and halted the study.

The second trial was approved by the FDA, in part, because Northfield was testing Polyheme for a different purpose.

The Detroit Medical Center, which runs the two Detroit hospitals that participated in the second trial, said the lone fatality involved a man hit by an SUV. The DMC declined to comment further on the trial or give the names of the patients, citing privacy laws.

Diebel, the trials’ leader in Detroit, said all of the Detroit hospitals’ patients were victims of shootings or car crashes and were between the ages of 19 and 55.

He said he believes Polyheme is a breakthrough in emergency medicine. In addition to being compatible with all blood types and storing longer than blood, it is virtually free of viral transmission.

Northfield Laboratories saw its stock plummet 75% after the December disclosure of the death rate, prompting a class action by investors who claim they were never told about the number of heart attacks in the first study.

Contact STEVE NEAVLING at 586-469-4935 or [email protected].

—–

Copyright (c) 2007, Detroit Free Press

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

NASDAQ-NMS:BPUR, NASDAQ-NMS:NFLD,

Results of Study on Trisynex Reported at Two Scientific Conferences Demonstrate

SAN DIEGO, May 22 /PRNewswire-FirstCall/ — Imagenetix, Inc. (BULLETIN BOARD: IAGX) , announced today that results from the recently completed study at the University of Connecticut on its patented body fat reduction ingredient, Trisynex, were presented at two scientific conferences.

“We are extremely pleased with the results of this study validating the effectiveness of Trisynex in fat loss and body shaping,” stated William P. Spencer, President of Imagenetix. “We are most excited as Trisynex is just beginning to be made available to consumers, on a global basis.”

Dr. Robert Hesslink, Director, Research & Development at Imagenetix, presented data at the Slimming Ingredient 2007 conference in Berlin, Germany. Dr. Hesslink reviewed the improvements in body composition in subjects consuming Trisynex. Subjects consuming Trisynex experienced a 92% improvement over placebo in lowering body fat and a 62% improvement in reducing waist circumference.

Dr. William Kraemer and staff from the University of Connecticut presented significant clinical data on Trisynex at the Experimental Biology conference in Washington, DC. Experimental Biology is the premiere international scientific conference in the fields of physiology, nutrition, molecular biology and genetics.

The University of Connecticut presented the Trisynex results on the serum adipocytokines and body composition. Subjects consuming Trisynex capsules had a significant reduction in serum leptin and a significant increase in serum adiponectin. These adipocyte hormones are integral biomarkers for healthy body fat storage and utilization.

The reduced serum leptin reflects the lower body fat and waist circumference found in the female subjects. Leptin has been shown to regulate the storage of excess calories and its lowering is vital for reducing body fat, reduction of waist circumference, and the overall management of obesity.

The elevation in serum adiponectin elicited by the consumption of Trisynex is very exciting. Adiponectin has been shown to regulate glucose regulation and balance. In addition, adiponectin is thought to increase fat oxidation within skeletal muscle, which may serve to increase daily caloric expenditure.

About Imagenetix

Based in San Diego, California, Imagenetix, (BULLETIN BOARD: IAGX) is an innovator of scientifically tested, natural-based, proprietary bioceutical products developed to enhance human health on a global basis. Imagenetix develops, formulates and private-labels propriety over-the-counter topical creams, skincare products and nutritional supplements to be marketed globally through multiple channels of distribution. In addition, the company develops patentable compounds for entering into licensing agreements with pharmaceutical partners. Imagenetix is the creator of Inflame Away(TM)- Celadrin(R), which has been clinically tested to relieve osteoarthritis pain and significantly improve joint health. For more information, please visit, http://www.imagenetix.net/.

This document contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. Such statements are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to vary materially from those projected in the forward-looking statements. The company may experience significant fluctuations in future operating results due to a number of economic, competitive, and other factors, including, among other things, the size and timing of customer contracts, new or increased competition, changes in market demand, and seasonality of purchases of the company’s products and services. These factors and others could cause operating results to vary significantly from those in prior periods and those projected in forward-looking statements. Additional information with respect to these and other factors, which could materially affect the company and its operations, are included in certain forms the company has filed and will periodically file with the Securities Exchange Commission.

Imagenetix, Inc.

CONTACT: Donald Radcliffe of Radcliffe & Associates, +1-212-605-0201,for Imagenetix, Inc.; or William P. Spencer, Chief Executive Officer ofImagenetix, Inc., +1-858-674-8455

Web site: http://www.imagenetix.net/

Presentation of Long-Term Results for Treating Barrett’s Esophagus With HALO Ablation System

SUNNYVALE, Calif., May 20 /PRNewswire/ — BARRX Medical, Inc. today announced that 98.4% of patients with Barrett’s esophagus treated with the HALO Ablation System have no residual Barrett’s esophagus tissue after a follow up period of more than two and a half years. The presentation of these long-term clinical trial results was made at the Digestive Disease Week (DDW) meeting this week, an international meeting of more than 16,000 gastrointestinal physicians and researchers, held in Washington D.C. Barrett’s esophagus is a pre-malignant condition of the esophagus resulting from chronic gastroesophageal reflux disease or GERD.

One prominently featured scientific presentation was the long-term follow- up of the “Ablation of Intestinal Metaplasia” clinical trial. Patients with Barrett’s esophagus underwent treatment with the HALO360 device, a balloon- based ablation catheter which removes diseased cells with controlled heat. After one year, any residual disease was further treated with the HALO90 device, an endoscope-mounted device that removes diseased cells with focal application of heat. Multiple tissue samples, or biopsies, were performed to assess the response to treatment and, at two and one half years follow-up, 98.4% of patients had no remaining Barrett’s disease.

David E. Fleischer, M.D., Professor of Medicine, Mayo Clinic in Arizona, is the first author on this study. “That we can safely and completely remove all of the diseased Barrett’s tissue from a patient’s esophagus using this ablative technology is a very important advance for gastrointestinal medicine,” says Dr. Fleischer. “Our results suggest that we can proactively eliminate Barrett’s esophagus at the very earliest stage, rather than simply observing for progression over time. Physicians working with this exciting new technology will need to study how this treatment can best be applied and for what group of patients. The appeal of the HALO treatment is that we can simultaneously prevent cancer and reduce patient anxiety caused by their having to live with a premalignant condition.”

Barrett’s esophagus affects about 3 million U.S. adults and is related to the chronic injury to the esophagus from GERD. This disorder predisposes the patient to the development of esophagus cancer, which has demonstrated the fastest rise in new cases per year of all human cancers. Once Barrett’s progresses to more advanced stages of the disease or to cancer, the standard therapy has been to surgically remove the esophagus.

Several other important studies were presented this week at the DDW meeting, including the use of the HALO system to treat patients with advanced stages of Barrett’s esophagus such as dysplasia and early cancer. Investigators reported cure rates for dysplastic Barrett’s esophagus of 90% or more after at least one year of follow-up. One study showed that ablation using the HALO system eliminated the genetic abnormalities that predispose a patient to developing cancer in the future. Another study reported that ablating one form of dysplasia (low-grade dysplasia) was more cost-effective than an observational strategy (endoscopy with biopsy to watch for disease progression). Results from a U.S. Registry study of 508 patients showed that a newer ablation tool, HALO90 ablation catheter, is safe for treating patients with focal areas of Barrett’s esophagus.

“At this year’s Digestive Disease Week meeting, physician investigators presented results from 13 different clinical trials assessing the performance of the HALO ablation technology for Barrett’s esophagus,” said David S. Utley, M.D., Chief Medical Officer, BARRX Medical, Inc. “This growing body of evidence shows that Barrett’s esophagus and the associated genetic abnormalities can be safely and completely eliminated. If we could prevent just one patient from developing a devastating esophageal cancer, it is a great service for these patients.”

About BARRX Medical, Inc.

BARRX Medical, Inc. develops treatment solutions for Barrett’s esophagus. Its first product, the HALO360 Ablation System, uses a balloon-based electrode to ablate Barrett’s tissue circumferentially within the esophagus. A newer product from BARRX Medical, the HALO90 Ablation System, is an electrode system that is mounted on the end of an endoscope, allowing the physician to treat focal areas of diseased tissue. Both HALO Systems provides uniform and controlled therapy at a consistent depth, which can remove Barrett’s esophagus and allow the regrowth of normal cells. Both systems are cleared by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration and are commercially available. Based in Sunnyvale, Calif., BARRX Medical, Inc. is a privately held company. Additional information about BARRX Medical, Inc. and the HALO Ablation Systems is available at http://www.barrx.com/.

About Digestive Disease Week

Digestive Disease Week is considered the largest and most prestigious meeting in the world for the gastroenterology professional. Every year it attracts more than 16,000 physicians, researchers and academics from around the world who desire to stay up-to-date in their respective fields. The meeting is the year’s best opportunity to learn about the latest advances in gastroenterology, hepatology, endoscopy and gastrointestinal surgery; prevention, diagnosis and treatment of digestive disorders; and cutting-edge technological advances.

BARRX Medical, Inc.

CONTACT: Kevin Knight of Knight Marketing Communications, Ltd., +1-214-739-0353, or fax, +1-214-373-8445, or [email protected]; or Mark Colella of BARRXMedical, Inc., +1-408-328-7300, or fax, +1-408-328-7395, [email protected]

Web site: http://www.barrx.com/

Cancer Patients’ Pick-Me-Up

By P. Kim Bui, The Tribune, San Luis Obispo, Calif.

May 19–For seven years, Cindy Wittstrom fought breast cancer. These days, she’s still going to treatment, but she’s driving someone else.

Wittstrom of Paso Robles has been driving cancer patient Maria Garcia to her treatments for two years as part of the American Cancer Society’s Road to Recovery.

The program offers cancer patients a ride to clinic, hospital and doctor’s appointments when they do not have someone else. In Garcia’s case, her son is at school and her husband is at work. In the seven years Garcia has been a cancer patient, the cancer has traveled from her bones to her brain, she said.

Rita Curry, volunteer coordinator for Road to Recovery, said the simple act of a ride to the doctor’s can be a huge relief for the patient and for family and friends.

“It becomes very difficult for their family and friends to get them there every day,” she said.

Wittstrom said she remembers times when she drove herself to appointments and shouldn’t have. It was just too difficult to tell anyone she needed help.

“I think it’s just, for independent people, it’s hard for them to say (it),” she said, “but for the most part, people do need help.”

On a recent day, Garcia was quiet after her son helped her into Wittstrom’s SUV. The two chatted briefly about the day’s treatment and other simple things: how long the visit would be, how Garcia likes her doctor, nurses they both know.

Garcia speaks limited English, but talking about her illness comes more naturally. After the short drive from Paso Robles to Templeton, Wittstrom helped Garcia up to the office.

Usually, she’ll wait in the car during Garcia’s appointments, reading and listening to the radio, Wittstrom said.

Wittstrom said there’s a comfort level between herself and Garcia because of her own history. It was years ago, but she has not forgotten how she felt when she was a patient.

The drive back is usually silent, Wittstrom said. She understands. Chemotherapy is tiring.

“If they don’t want to talk, I won’t talk to them,” she said.

She remembers wanting to hide after treatments. She would feel horrible for a week.

“By the time you’re feeling pretty good, the treatment comes again,” she said. “There’s a dread.”

It’s just a ride, but Wittstrom said it means something. It’s a small piece of the puzzle that patients don’t have to worry about.

“I’ve been so lucky that I ought to pass it on,” she said.

—–

Copyright (c) 2007, The Tribune, San Luis Obispo, Calif.

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

Systemic Mastocytosis: A Concise Clinical and Laboratory Review

By Patnaik, Mrinal M; Rindos, Michelle; Kouides, Peter A; Tefferi, Ayalew; Pardanani, Animesh

Context.-Systemic mastocytosis is characterized by abnormal growth and accumulation of neoplastic mast cells in various organs. The clinical presentation is varied and may include skin rash, symptoms related to release of mast cell mediators, and/or organopathy from involvement of bone, liver, spleen, bowel, or bone marrow.

Objective.-To concisely review pathogenesis, disease classification, clinical features, diagnosis, and treatment of mast cell disorders.

Data Sources.-Pertinent literature emerging during the last 20 years in the field of mast cell disorders.

Conclusions.-The cornerstone of diagnosis is careful bone marrow histologic examination with appropriate immunohistochemical studies. Ancillary tests such as mast cell immunophenotyping, cytogenetic/ molecular studies, and serum tryptase levels assist in confirming the diagnosis. Patients with cutaneous disease or with low systemic mast cell burden are generally managed symptomatically. In the patients requiring mast cell cytoreductive therapy, treatment decisions are increasingly being guided by results of molecular studies. Most patients carry the kit D816V mutation and are predicted to be resistant to imatinib mesylate (Gleevec) therapy. In contrast, patients carrying the FIP1L1-PDGFRA mutation achieve complete responses with low-dose imatinib therapy. Other therapeutic options include use of interferon-α, chemotherapy (2- chlorodeoxyadenosine), or novel small molecule tyrosine kinase inhibitors currently in clinical trials.

(Arch Pathol Lab Med. 2007;131:784-791)

The discovery of mast cells (MCs) in 1878 is credited to Paul Ehrlich, who first described cells that stained with metachromatic dyes such as toluidine blue, which he termed MCs. Since then, extensive work has been done on the physiology, pathology, and genetics of normal MCs and their pathologic counterparts in mast cell disease (MCD). It is now known that MCs are myeloid lineage cells that arise from bone marrow (BM) precursors, more specifically from CD34^sup +^ and Kit^sup +^ hematopoietic progenitors and not from monocytes or basophils as previously thought.1-5 The cytokine stem cell factor (also known as Kit ligand) plays a key role in inducing differentiation of MCs from their progenitors, in concert with other cytokines including interleukin 3.6-8 Normal MCs are round or oval cells, with a round, centrally located, nonlobated nucleus, and have abundant, uniformly distributed cytoplasmic granules. Immunophenotypic characterization of normal MCs typically reveals the presence of 2 characteristic surface markers, the CD117 antigen (c-Kit; the receptor for stem cell factor) and the high affinity receptor for immunoglobulin (Ig) E (FcεRI), neither of which, however, are MC specific.9,10 The typical profile of MCs in normal BM has been described as CD117^sup ++^/CD34^sup -^/CD38^sup – ^/CD138^sup -^/CD45^sup +^/FcεRI^sup +^. Mast cells play an integral role in type I hypersensitivity reactions implicated in bronchial asthma, urticaria, anaphylaxis, and other allergic conditions. Here, engagement of FcεRI receptors promotes MC degranulation and release of histamine and other mediators including proteases, heparin, prostaglandins, leukotrienes, cytokines, and chemokines that mediate many of the clinical features of MCD (reviewed by Castells11).

MAST CELL DISORDERS

Mastocytosis is characterized by the abnormal growth and accumulation of morphologically and immunophenotypically abnormal MCs in 1 or more organs. Neoplastic MCs, in contrast to normal MCs, are more variable in appearance, ranging from round to fusiform variants with long, polar cytoplasmic processes, and may display cytoplasmic hypogranularity with uneven distribution of fine granules and atypical nuclei with monocytoid appearance. 12-14 Immunophenotypic interrogation of MCs has revealed aberrant expression of several markers in patients of virtually all adult systemic mastocytosis (SM) categories. 15-17 Of these, MC expression of CD25 and/or CD2, as determined by either flow cytometry or immunohistochemistry, are the most relevant from the clinical standpoint and serve as a minor criterion for making the diagnosis of SM per World Health Organization (WHO) guidelines.18-20

Mast cells retain surface Kit expression at high levels on maturation, and the interaction between Kit and stem cell factor has been shown to promote the proliferation, maturation, adhesion, chemotaxis, and survival of MCs.8 Consequently, gain-of-function mutations in kit, particularly the D816V mutation, have been found to occur frequently in SM patients.21 The issue as to whether additional genetic “hits” are necessary for neoplastic transformation of MCs and for full expression of aggressive SM subtypes remains unsettled based on currently available data (reviewed by Pardanani et al22).

Furitsu et al23 first demonstrated constitutive phosphorylation of Kit receptor expressed on HMC-1 cells, an immature MC line derived from a patient with mast cell leukemia (MCL), and described the presence of 2 mutations in the kit gene (V560G and D816V) in this cell line. Soon after this report, Nagata et al24 published the first report of the kit D816V mutation in human SM. Since then, other kit mutations, either replacement of D816 with a nonvaline residue (eg, D816Y,25 D816F,25 D816H,26 and D820G27) or mutations in other domains (extracellular,28 transmembrane, 29,30 or juxtamembrane31,32) have also been identified in MCD. The latter mutations include F522C, A533D, K509I, del419, and V559A, many of which are representative of rare alleles detected in germline DNA in several cohorts of familial mastocytosis (reviewed by Akin33). Interestingly, several kindreds with combined familial gastrointestinal stromal tumors and mastocytosis, both of which are associated with gain-of-function kit mutations, have also now been described.28

The classification of mast cell neoplasms has evolved with time. The current WHO classification classifies MCD into 7 variants (Table 1)20,34: cutaneous mastocytosis (CM), indolent SM, SM with an associated clonal hematologic non-mast cell disorder, aggressive SM, MCL, and MC sarcoma. In addition, 2 provisional and relatively rare variants of SM with characteristic clinical and/or pathologic features have also been described-well-differentiated systemic mastocytosis (WDSM)30 and systemic mastocytosis without skin involvement associated with recurrent anaphylaxis.21

The WHO classification of SM mandates a number of staging investigations to define the exact subtype of disease. 20 Identification of “B” findings alone such as more than 30% BM MC burden or serum tryptase more than 200 ng/mL are indicative of a high systemic MC burden (ie, smoldering SM), whereas the additional presence of “C” findings (Table 2) such as cytopenias, pathologic fractures, hypersplenism, and so forth indicate impaired organ function directly attributable to MC infiltration and are diagnostic for presence of “aggressive” disease (ie, aggressive SM).

Non-MCD-related conditions including benign disorders associated with MC activation such as allergic (bronchial asthma) and atopic disorders, chronic urticaria, anaphylaxis, and other systemic disorders mimicking MCD (eg, VIPoma, adrenal tumors, gastrointestinal inflammatory disorders) must be excluded by appropriate testing prior to reaching a diagnosis of MCD.

CLINICAL FEATURES OF MAST CELL DISORDERS

Mast cell disease presents with varied clinical features that can be broadly grouped as follows:

Cutaneous Disease

There are 3 major forms of CM recognized by the WHO.20 The most common is urticaria pigmentosa (also referred to as maculopapular cutaneous mastocytosis), the others being diffuse CM and solitary mastocytoma of the skin. The skin lesions are typically yellow tan to reddish brown macules and may less frequently present as nodules or plaques. The lesions generally involve the extremities, trunk, and abdomen but spare the palms, soles, and scalp. The lesions commonly exhibit an urticarial response to mechanical stimulation such as stroking or scratching (Darier sign or dermographic urticaria).35,36 Biopsies of urticaria pigmentosa/maculopapular cutaneous mastocytosis lesions demonstrate multifocal MC aggregates mainly around blood vessels and around skin appendages in the papillary dermis.36,37 Children account for nearly two thirds of all reported cases of CM, with nearly 80% of these arising in infancy.38- 40 In contrast, most adult MCD patients with urticaria pigmentosa/ maculopapular cutaneous mastocytosis have systemic disease (often indolent) at presentation, which is most commonly revealed by a BM biopsy done as part of the diagnostic workup.41

MC-Mediator Release Symptoms With or Without Cutaneous Manifestations

Most adult patients with MC-mediator release symptoms have a low systemic MC burden, commonly exhibit CM lesions, and generally have indolent disease. Presenting symptoms include pruritus, urticaria, angioedema, flushing, bronchoconstriction, neuropsychiatric manifestations, and hypotension.42 Gastrointestinal features such as nausea, vomiting, abdominal pain, diarrhea, and malabsorption may be prominent in some patients. Histamine receptor stimulation increases gastric acid production, which may cause peptic ulcer diseasewith potential morbidity from a bleeding peptic ulcer and/or perforation.43,44 Presyncope, episodic vascular collapse, and sudden death represent the more dramatic clinical presentations of MCmediator release.45

Musculoskeletal Symptoms

Patients may have indolent or aggressive disease and present with poorly localized bone pain, diffuse osteoporosis or osteopenia, myalgias, arthralgias, pathologic fractures, skeletal deformities, and/or compression radiculopathies. In the absence of typical cutaneous lesions (urticaria pigmentosa/maculopapular cutaneous mastocytosis) or MC-mediator release symptoms, the diagnosis of SM may prove challenging and diagnosis is frequently delayed in this setting. Systemic mastocytosis, in this setting, must be distinguished from other disorders including osteoporosis, metastatic cancer, Paget disease, and multiple myeloma.

Systemic Disease

Systemic mastocytosis patients with systemic disease are generally older, are without CM lesions, frequently exhibit organomegaly and MC atypia (ie, high-grade morphology), and commonly have aggressive disease.13,46,47 Organ infiltration by neoplastic MCs may present as hepatomegaly (with or without liver dysfunction and ascites), splenomegaly (with or without hypersplenism), lymphadenopathy, large osteolyses with or without pathologic fractures, and malabsorption with hypoalbuminemia and weight loss. Extensive marrow involvement may result in anemia and eventually pancytopenia.

DIAGNOSIS OF MAST CELL DISORDERS

The diagnosis of SM is based on identification of neoplastic MCs by morphologic, immunophenotypic, and/or genetic (molecular) criteria in various organs. Per the WHO criteria for MCD classification, the diagnosis of SM requires fulfillment of 1 major and 1 minor criterion or, alternatively, of 3 minor criteria (Table 3).20 The diagnosis of SM is most commonly established by thorough histologic and immunohistochemical examination of a BM specimen (aspirate and biopsy). This is because the BM is almost universally involved in adult MCD, and histologic diagnostic criteria for non- BM organ involvement in SM have not been established and/or widely accepted as of yet.

BM Examination

Bone marrow examination is almost always necessary for the diagnosis of adult SM and helps establish whether an associated clonal non-MC lineage hematologic disorder is present. The pathognomonic lesion, which satisfies the WHO major diagnostic criterion, is the presence of multifocal, dense MC aggregates, frequently in perivascular and/or paratrabecular locations (Figure, A). These aggregates may be relatively monomorphic, composed mainly of fusiform MC, or may be polymorphic withMC admixed with lymphocytes, eosinophils, neutrophils, histiocytes, endothelial cells, and fibroblasts.12 Eosinophils are most commonly found distributed at the periphery of MC aggregates (often focally), but increased eosinophils may also be seen in noninfiltrated areas.13 Although irregular trabecular thickening is commonly noted, particularly when MC aggregates abut the trabeculae, other cases may be characterized by a marked thinning of BM trabeculae and osteopenia. Mast cell infiltrates are commonly associated with a dense network of reticulin fibers. In cases with diffuse BM infiltration by monomorphous, spindled MCs resembling fibroblasts, a diagnosis of idiopathic myelofibrosis may be erroneously made, especially when accompanied with a decrease in normal hematopoietic elements.

Three distinct histologic patterns of BM involvement in SM have been described.12,13 The commonest, type I, is frequently associated with urticaria pigmentosa and exhibits focal MC infiltration with normal distribution of fat cells and hematopoietic elements in the uninvolved marrow space. In contrast, type II pattern reveals significantly increased granulopoiesis in the marrow space not involved by MCs, and type III pattern is characterized by a diffuse marrow infiltration with morphologically atypical MCs, commonly with circulating MCs. The histologic pattern of BM MC involvement appears to be prognostically important, and this feature is reflected in the list of “B” findings in the WHO classification, which helps distinguish between various SM subtypes.13,20 Although MC cytologic atypia (large, irregularly shaped nuclei, increased mitotic activity, decreased numbers of metachromatic granules, etc) has been historically proposed by some authors as a criterion for “aggressive” MCD,47-50 such proposals have not been either broadly accepted or implemented in routine practice.

In general, MCs may not be readily recognized by standard dyes such as Giemsa, toluidine blue, or naphthol ASD chloroacetate esterase (Leder stain), particularly when associated with significant hypogranulation or with abnormal nuclear morphology, and may be confused with a variety of other cells that include fibroblasts, histiocytes, hairy cells, and monocytes.12,51 Furthermore, the metachromatic staining properties of MCs may be significantly diminished or lost with conventional tissue processing, particularly decalcification with acidic solutions that is necessary for sectioning of paraffin-embedded BM tissue.51 Among the immunohistochemical markers, staining for tryptase is considered the most sensitive, being able to detect even small-sized MC infiltrates (Figure, B).52,53 Given that virtually all MCs, irrespective of their stage of maturation, activation status, or tissue of localization, express tryptase, staining for this marker detects even those infiltrates that are primarily comprised of immature, nongranulated MCs.19 Tryptase immunostaining is particularly useful for the diffuse pattern of MC infiltration, in which a loose MC distribution, in lieu of the discrete MC aggregates, may be seen.52 It must be emphasized that neither tryptase nor other immunohistochemical markers such as chymase, c- Kit/CD117 (Figure, C), or CD68 can distinguish between normal and neoplastic MCs.18 In addition, abnormal basophils seen in some cases of acute and chronic basophilic leukemia and in chronic myeloid leukemia and blasts in some acute myeloid leukemia cases may be tryptase positive and may prove difficult to distinguish from MCs.54 In contrast, immunohistochemical detection of aberrant CD25 expression on BM MCs appears to be a reliable diagnostic tool in SM, given its ability to detect abnormal MCs in all SM subtypes, including the rare cases with a loosely scattered, interstitial pattern of MC involvement. 19 Finally, it should be pointed out that the MC burden in normal BM is very low (

MC Immunophenotyping

As mentioned previously, the qualitative and semiquantitative profiling of cell surface antigens by multiparametric flow cytometry can be extremely useful in distinguishing normal BM MCs from their pathologic counterparts in SM (reviewed by Escribano et al56). Normal MCs typically express c-Kit/CD117 and FcεRI, and the typical profile of normal MCs is CD117^sup ++^/FcεRI^sup +^/ CD34-/CD38-/CD33^sup +^/CD45^sup +^/CD11c^sup +^/CD71^sup +^. These cells do not express certain myeloid markers (CD14 and CD15) or lymphoid lineage markers except CD22.57 Neoplastic MCs in most SM subtypes usually express CD25 and/or CD2, and the abnormal expression of at least 1 of these 2 antigens counts as a minor criterion toward the diagnosis of SM per the WHO system.20 In general, the detection of CD25 on MCs, by either flow cytometry or immunohistochemistry, appears to be the more reliable marker (relative to CD2), although some authors have noted significant variation in the percentage of CD2^sup +^ cases by flow cytometry depending on the specific antibody-fluorochrome conjugate used.56 Consistent with flow cytometry data,17 it has been reported that screening for CD2 expression by immunohistochemistry may have relatively low diagnostic value because a significant proportion of cases stain negative, and CD2 expression on BM MCs is generally weak in the cases that are positive.18,19,53 Interval monitoring of CD25 expression on BM MCs may represent one approach for assessing presence of residual disease in patients undergoing MC cytoreductive therapy, generally for aggressive SM disease subtypes.17,58,59 Other aberrant immunophenotypic features of neoplastic MCs include abnormally high expression of complement-related markers such as CD11c,60 CD35,61 CD59,61 and CD88,61 as well as increased expression of the CD69 early-activation antigen,62 and the CD63 lysosomal- associated protein.63

Serum Tryptase Measurement

Measurement of tryptase (an MC enzyme with trypsinlike enzymatic activity) levels in biologic fluids (serum) has proven to be a useful disease-related marker in SM and is included as a minor criterion for the diagnosis of SM per WHO guidelines, provided that certain conditions are satisfied.20,64 There are 2 major forms of MC tryptase-alpha (subtypes alpha 1 and 2) and beta (subtypes beta 1, 2, and 3) (reviewed by Schwartz65). Mature beta 2 tryptase is stored in MC secretory granules and released only during granule exocytosis, thereby reflecting MC activation. In contrast, the precursor forms of both alpha and beta tryptase are constitutively secreted by MCs,66 and the combined “total” serum levels (including precursor and mature tryptase forms) are thought to reflect the total systemic MC burden.67 The commercially available fluoroimmunoenzymatic assay (Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden) measures total tryptase levels. In healthy individuals, levels range from 1 to 15 ng/mL, whereas in most patients with SM, total serum tryptase levels exceed 20 ng/mL. In cases of suspected SM, it is important that serum tryptase levels be \interpreted in the appropriate context. Elevated levels of serum tryptase have been documented in patients with non-SM myeloid malignancies, including acute myeloid leukemia,68,69 myelodysplastic syndrome,70 and chronic myeloid leukemia,71 which mandates exclusion of such non-SM myeloid disorders before reaching a diagnosis of SM. Furthermore, levels of total serum tryptase may also be transiently elevated during anaphylaxis or a severe allergic reaction.64

Molecular Studies

In SM patients, molecular studies are important from the diagnostic standpoint and, increasingly, from the therapeutic standpoint as well.

Recent studies underscore the high prevalence of the kit D816V gain-of-function mutation in SM patients, with high correlation between mutation detection and the proportion of lesional cells in the sample, as well as the sensitivity of the screening method used (reviewed by Akin33). Accordingly, the likelihood of mutation detection in peripheral blood mononuclear cells in a case of indolent systemic mastocytosis (with low probability of circulating clonal cells), using a low-sensitivity screening test (eg, direct DNA sequencing), is exceedingly low. Sensitivity of detection may be enhanced by enriching lesional MCs or other clonal cell populations (eg, neutrophils or eosinophils) by laser capture microdissection or magnetic beador fluorescence-activated cell sorter (FACS)-based cell sorting, respectively.72-74 Furthermore, use of higher sensitivity methods including allele-specific polymerase chain reaction,75 or polymerase chain reaction with peptide nucleic acid probes to “clamp” the wild-type allele combined with mutant allele detection with hybridization probes, dramatically enhance the probability of mutation detection in bulk cells (sensitivity, 10-3).21,76 Using the latter method, the D816V mutation was detected in virtually all patients with indolent systemic mastocytosis or aggressive systemic mastocytosis (93%) but less frequently in patients with WDSM (29%) in a recent study.21 Here, kit mutations (I817V and VI815-816) other than D816V were rarely detected (

Well-differentiated systemic mastocytosis may represent a distinct, albeit genetically heterogenous, subtype of SM.21 A subset of WDSM cases carry the F522C germline mutation, which is located in the kit transmembrane domain. 30 In contrast to other SM subtypes, MCs in WDSM do not express either CD2 or CD25 antigens and are mature in appearance.

Eosinophilia (BM and/or peripheral blood) commonly accompanies SM (in 20%-40% of cases-termed SMeos) 77-80 and is demonstrably clonal in a proportion of such cases.73 Up to one half of SM-eos patients carry the FIP1L1-PDGFRA fusion oncogene,81 which results from an ~800-kb interstitial deletion of chromosome 4q12, thereby generating a constitutively active PDGFRA tyrosine kinase. 82 These patients have a multilineage disorder with demonstrable presence of the FIP1L1-PDGFRA gene within cells of multiple hematopoietic lineages including MCs.83 These patients also exhibit clinical and histologic features of myeloproliferation and generally have an elevated serum tryptase level but may lack pathognomonic clusters of atypical MCs in the BM on routine staining. 81,84-86 FIP1L1-PDGFRA^sup +^ cases have been variably classified as a unique subtype of SM81,87 or a “myeloproliferative variant” of hypereosinophilic syndrome84,85 or as chronic eosinophilic leukemia88 or a myelomastocytic overlap syndrome89 in the literature. Given the sensitivity of this lesion to imatinib therapy (discussed later), it is currently recommended that all suspected SM-eos cases be screened for the FIP1L1-PDGFRA fusion by either fluorescence in situ hybridization or reverse transcriptase polymerase chain reaction.90,91

TREATMENT OF MAST CELL DISORDERS

Treatment of MCD patients is highly individualized. The abbreviated treatment guidelines provided below are for general reference only, and readers are referred to specialized hematology texts and literature sources for details.

Cutaneous Mastocytosis

Spontaneous regression is observed in the majority of pediatric- onset CM.40,92 In contrast, most patients with adult-onset CM have persistent disease, with a proportion exhibiting progression to SM. Treatment is symptomatic, and treatment considerations include use of psoralen ultraviolet A therapy and corticosteroids for severe cases.

Treatment of MC-Mediator Release Symptoms

The cornerstone of therapy in indolent cases is avoidance of identifiable triggers for MC degranulation such as animal venoms, extremes of temperature, mechanical irritation, alcohol, certain dyes, or medications (eg, aspirin, radiocontrast agents, certain anesthetic agents). Therapy is supportive, with use of histamine 1 and histamine 2 receptor blockers (pruritus, peptic symptoms) and cromolyn sodium (gastrointestinal symptoms).93 Corticosteroids are reserved for patients with recurrent or refractory symptoms related to MC-mediator release. It is recommended that patients with a history of vascular collapse or anaphylaxis carry an Epi-Pen for epinephrine self-adminstration.94

Management of Aggressive Systemic Mastocytosis (Organopathy Present)

In general, patients with aggressive systemic mastocytosis require effective MC cytoreductive therapy. Potential therapeutic options are interferon-, 2-chlorodeoxyadenosine, polychemotherapy, and molecularly targeted therapy.

Interferon-α. Interferon-α is frequently combined with prednisone and is commonly used as first-line cytoreductive therapy for SM.95 It ameliorates SM-related organopathy in a proportion of cases but is associated with considerable toxicity (flulike symptoms, myelosuppression, depression, hypothyroidism, etc), which may limit its use in SM (reviewed by Butterfield).96

2-Chlorodeoxyadenosine. 2-Chlorodeoxyadenosine is generally reserved for treatment of patients with aggressive systemic mastocytosis, who are either refractory or intolerant to interferon- α.97-99 Potential toxicities of 2-chlorodeoxyadenosine include significant and potentially prolonged myelosuppression and lymphopenia with increased risk of opportunistic infections. Despite its efficacy in the SM treatment, the precise indications and the optimal dose and schedule for this group of patients remains to be ascertained.

Polychemotherapy.-Polychemotherapy including intensive induction regimens of the kind used in treating acute myeloid leukemia, as well as high-dose therapy with stem cell rescue, represent investigational approaches restricted to rare SM patients, such as select patients with MCL.

Molecularly Targeted Therapy.-Molecularly targeted therapy for SM has recently been reviewed by Gotlib.100

Imatinib Mesylate (Gleevec).-Imatinib is an orally bioavailable, small molecule inhibitor of Kit, ABL, ARG, and PDGFR tyrosine kinases. The identification of gain-offunction mutations involving kit and PDGFRA genes (known imatinib targets) in the pathogenesis of SM has obvious therapeutic implications in this regard. Consistent with predictions from in vitro data,101,102 the limited clinical experience to date suggests that the majority of SM patients (kit D816V+) are likely to be refractory to imatinib therapy.103,104 In contrast, clinically meaningful responses have been observed for the rare patients with kit juxtamembrane mutations (eg, F522C, K509I), suggesting that this subgroup of patients has imatinib-responsive disease. 30,32 For SM patients with eosinophilia (SM-eos) who carry the FIPILI-PDGFRA mutation, complete clinical responses are virtually uniformly obtained with low-dose imatinib therapy, in the absence of mutations that confer imatinib resistance (eg, PDGFRA T764I), which may be seen with clonal evolution (reviewed by Pardanani). 81,82,87,105 Lastly, imatinib is predicted to be effective in SM with specific mutations such as V560G106 and del419,28 but this has not yet been clinically demonstrated.

Dasatinib (BMS-354825).-Dasatinib is an orally available, dual SRC/ABL inhibitor that has been shown to have activity against the imatinib resistant kit D816V mutation in preclinical studies and is currently in clinical trials for treatment of SM.107,108

PKC412.-PKC412 is a multitargeted kinase inhibitor with activity against FLT3, Kit, VEGFR2, PDGFR, and FGFR kinases.109-111 Cools et al112 demonstrated that PKC412 effectively inhibits myeloproliferation induced by the imatinib-resistant FIP1L1-PDGFRA T674I mutation in a murine model. Subsequently, after PK412 was shown to inhibit kit D816V in vitro at nanomolar concentrations, Gotlib et al were able to show a significant clinical and histologic response to PKC412 in a single patient with D186V^sup +^ MCL.112,113 This agent is currently under study for SM treatment in phase II trials.

Other Agents.-Other agents such as the ATP-based inhibitors AP23464 and AP23848,114 the quinazoline-based inhibitor MLN518,115 the indolinone compounds SU11652, SU11654, and SU11655,116 the aminopyrimidine-based inhibitor AMN107 (Nilotinib),117 and the thiophene-based inhibitor OSI-930118,119 have activity against at least some of the SM-associated kit mutants and may have a future role in the treatment of this disease.

Accepted for publication October 24, 2006.

From the Department of Medicine, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis (Dr Patnaik); the Departments of Pathology, University of Rochester School of Medicine (Dr Rindos) and Hematology, Rochester General Hospital (Dr Kouides), Rochester, NY; and the Division of Hematology, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, Minn (Drs Tefferi and Pardanani).

The authors have no relevant financial interest in the products or companies described in this article.

Table 1. World Health Organization Variants of Mastocytosis*

Cutaneous mastocytosis (CM)

Maculopapular \CM

Diffuse CM

Mastocytoma of skin

Indolent systemic mastocytosis (SM)

Smoldering SM

Isolated bone marrow mastocytosis

Systemic mastocytosis with an associated clonal hematologic non- mast cell lineage disease (MCD-AHNMD)

Aggressive systemic mastocytosis

With eosinophilia

Mast cell leukemia (MCL)

Aleukemic MCL

Mast cell sarcoma

Extracutaneous mastocytoma

* From Valent et al.20

Table 2. “C” Findings*

Cytopenia(s): absolute neutrophil count

Hepatomegaly with ascites and impaired liver function

Palpable splenomegaly with hypersplenism

Malabsorption with hypoalbuminemia and weight loss

Skeletal lesions: large-sized osteolysis or severe osteoporosis causing pathologic fractures

Life-threatening organopathy in other organ systems that definitively is caused by an infiltration of the tissue by neoplastic mast cells

* “C” findings are an indication of impaired organ function resulting from mast cell infiltration. From Valent et al.20

Table 3. World Health Organization Criteria for Diagnosis of Systemic Mast Cell Disease*

Major

Multifocal dense infiltrates of mast cells in bone marrow or other extracutaneous organs (>15 mast cells aggregating)

Minor

Mast cells in bone marrow or other extracutaneous organs show an abnormal (spindling) morphology (>25%)

Codon 816 c-kit mutation D816V in extracutaneous organs

Mast cells in the bone marrow express CD2, CD25, or both

Serum tryptase > 20 ng/mL (does not count in patients who have an associated clonal hematologic non-mast cell disease [AHNMD])

* From Valent et al.20

References

1. Kirshenbaum AS, Goff JP, Dreskin SC, Irani AM, Schwartz LB, Metcalfe DD. IL-3-dependent growth of basophil-like cells and mastlike cells from human bone marrow. J Immunol. 1989;142:2424- 2429.

2. Kirshenbaum AS, Kessler SW, Goff JP, Metcalfe DD. Demonstration of the origin of human mast cells from CD34+ bone marrow progenitor cells. J Immunol. 1991;146:1410-1415.

3. Kirshenbaum AS, Goff JP, Semere T, Foster B, Scott LM, Metcalfe DD. Demonstration that human mast cells arise from a progenitor cell population that is CD34(+), c-kit(+), and expresses aminopeptidase N (CD13). Blood. 1999;94: 2333-2342.

4. Agis H, Willheim M, Sperr WR, et al. Monocytes do not make mast cells when cultured in the presence of SCF: characterization of the circulating mast cell progenitor as a c-kit+, CD34+, Ly-, CD14- , CD17-, colony-forming cell. J Immunol. 1993;151:4221-4227.

5. Rottem M, Kirshenbaum AS, Metcalfe DD. Early development of mast cells. Int Arch Allergy Appl Immunol. 1991;94:104-109.

6. Mitsui H, Furitsu T, Dvorak AM, et al. Development of human mast cells from umbilical cord blood cells by recombinant human and murine c-kit ligand. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. 1993;90:735-739.

7. Irani AM, Nilsson G, Miettinen U, et al. Recombinant human stem cell factor stimulates differentiation of mast cells from dispersed human fetal liver cells. Blood. 1992;80:3009-3021.

8. Valent P, Spanblochl E, Sperr WR, et al. Induction of differentiation of human mast cells from bone marrow and peripheral blood mononuclear cells by recombinant human stem cell factor/kit- ligand in long-term culture. Blood. 1992; 80:2237-2245.

9. Orfao A, Escribano L, Villarrubia J, et al. Flow cytometric analysis of mast cells from normal and pathological human bone marrow samples: identification and enumeration. Am J Pathol. 1996;149:1493-1499.

10. Escribano L, Orfao A, Villarrubia J, et al. Immunophenotypic characterization of human bone marrow mast cells: a flow cytometric study of normal and pathological bone marrow samples. Anal Cell Pathol. 1998;16:151-159.

11. Castells M. Mast cell mediators in allergic inflammation and mastocytosis. Immunol Allergy Clin North Am. 2006;26:465-485.

12. Brunning RD, McKenna RW, Rosai J, Parkin JL, Risdall R. Systemic mastocytosis: extracutaneous manifestations. Am J Surg Pathol. 1983;7:425-438.

13. Horny HP, Parwaresch MR, Lennert K. Bone marrow findings in systemic mastocytosis. Hum Pathol. 1985;16:808-814.

14. Stevens EC, Rosenthal NS. Bone marrow mast cell morphologic features and hematopoietic dyspoiesis in systemic mast cell disease. Am J Clin Pathol. 2001;116:177-182.

15. Escribano L, Orfao A, Diaz-Agustin B, et al. Indolent systemic mast cell disease in adults: immunophenotypic characterization of bone marrow mast cells and its diagnostic implications. Blood. 1998;91:2731-2736.

16. Schernthaner GH, Jordan JH, Ghannadan M, et al. Expression, epitope analysis, and functional role of the LFA-2 antigen detectable on neoplastic mast cells. Blood. 2001;98:3784-3792.

17. Pardanani A, Kimlinger T, Reeder T, Li CY, Tefferi A. Bone marrow mast cell immunophenotyping in adults with mast cell disease: a prospective study of 33 patients. Leuk Res. 2004;28:777-783.

18. Jordan JH, Walchshofer S, Jurecka W, et al. Immunohistochemical properties of bone marrow mast cells in systemic mastocytosis: evidence for expression of CD2, CD117/Kit, and bcl- x(L). Hum Pathol. 2001;32:545-552.

19. Sotlar K, Horny HP, Simonitsch I, et al. CD25 indicates the neoplastic phenotype of mast cells: a novel immunohistochemical marker for the diagnosis of systemic mastocytosis (SM) in routinely processed bone marrow biopsy specimens. Am J Surg Pathol. 2004;28:1319-1325.

20. Valent P, Horny HP, Escribano L, et al. Diagnostic criteria and classification of mastocytosis: a consensus proposal. Leuk Res. 2001;25:603-625.

21. Garcia-Montero AC, Jara-Acevedo M, Teodosio C, et al. KIT mutation in mast cells and other bone marrow haematopoietic cell lineages in systemic mast cell disorders: a prospective study of the Spanish Network on Mastocytosis (REMA) in a series of 113 patients. Blood. 2006;108:2366-2372.

22. Pardanani A, Akin C, Valent P. Pathogenesis, clinical features, and treatment advances in mastocytosis. Best Pract Res Clin Haematol. 2006;19:595-615.

23. Furitsu T, Tsujimura T, Tono T, et al. Identification of mutations in the coding sequence of the proto-oncogene c-kit in a human mast cell leukemia cell line causing ligand-independent activation of c-kit product. J Clin Invest. 1993;92: 1736-1744.

24. Nagata H, Worobec AS, Oh CK, et al. Identification of a point mutation in the catalytic domain of the protooncogene c-kit in peripheral blood mononuclear cells of patients who have mastocytosis with an associated hematologic disorder. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. 1995;92:10560-10564.

25. Longley BJ Jr, Metcalfe DD, Tharp M, et al. Activating and dominant inactivating c-KIT catalytic domain mutations in distinct clinical forms of human mastocytosis. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. 1999;96:1609-1614.

26. Pullarkat VA, Pullarkat ST, Calverley DC, Brynes RK. Mast cell disease associated with acute myeloid leukemia: detection of a new c-kit mutation Asp816His. Am J Hematol. 2000;65:30-7309.

27. Pignon JM, Giraudier S, Duquesnoy P, et al. A new c-kit mutation in a case of aggressive mast cell disease. Br J Haematol. 1997;96:374-376.

28. Hartmann K, Wardelmann E, Ma Y, et al. Novel germline mutation of KIT associated with familial gastrointestinal stromal tumors and mastocytosis. Gastroenterology. 2005;129:1042-1046.

29. Tang X, Boxer M, Drummond A, Ogston P, Hodgins M, Burden AD. A germline mutation in KIT in familial diffuse cutaneous mastocytosis. J Med Genet. 2004;41:e88.

30. Akin C, Fumo G, Yavuz AS, Lipsky PE, Neckers L, Metcalfe DD. A novel form of mastocytosis associated with a transmembrane c-kit mutation and response to imatinib. Blood. 2004;103:3222-3225.

31. Beghini A, Tibiletti MG, Roversi G, et al. Germline mutation in the juxtamembrane domain of the kit gene in a family with gastrointestinal stromal tumors and urticaria pigmentosa. Cancer. 2001;92:657-662.

32. Zhang LY, Smith ML, Schultheis B, et al. A novel K509I mutation of KIT identified in familial mastocytosis-in vitro and in vivo responsiveness to imatinib therapy. Leuk Res. 2006;30:373-378.

33. Akin C. Molecular diagnosis of mast cell disorders: a paper from the 2005 William Beaumont Hospital Symposium on Molecular Pathology. J Mol Diagn. 2006;8:412-419.

34. Valent PHH, Li CY, Longley JB, et al. Mastocytosis (mast cell disease). In: Pathology and Genetics of Tumours of the Haematopoietic and LymphoidTissues. Lyon, France: IARC Press; 2001:291-302. World Health Organization Classification of Tumours; vol 1.

35. Hartmann K, Henz BM. Cutaneous mastocytosis-clinical heterogeneity. Int Arch Allergy Immunol. 2002;127:143-146.

36. Hartmann K, Henz BM. Classification of cutaneous mastocytosis: a modified consensus proposal. Leuk Res. 2002;26:483- 484; author reply 485-486.

37. Soter NA. Mastocytosis and the skin. Hematol Oncol Clin North Am. 2000; 14:537-555, vi.

38. Kettelhut BV, Metcalfe DD. Pediatric mastocytosis. J Invest Dermatol. 1991; 96:15S-18S.

39. Azana JM, Torrelo A, Mediero IG, Zambrano A. Urticaria pigmentosa: a review of 67 pediatric cases. Pediatr Dermatol. 1994;11:102-106.

40. Middelkamp Hup MA, Heide R, Tank B, Mulder PG, Oranje AP. Comparison of mastocytosis with onset in children and adults. J Eur Acad Dermatol Venereol. 2002;16:115-120.

41. Czarnetzki BM, Kolde G, Schoemann A, Urbanitz S, Urbanitz D. Bone marrow findings in adult patients with urticaria pigmentosa. J AmAcad Dermatol. 1988;18:45-51.

42. Castells M, Austen KF. Mastocytosis: mediator-related signs and symptoms. Int Arch Allergy Immunol. 2002;127:147-152.

43. Cherner JA, Jensen RT, Dubois A, O’Dorisio TM, Gardner JD, Metcalfe DD. Gastrointestinal dysfunction in systemic mastocytosis: a prospective study. Gastroenterology. 1988;95:657-667.

44. Cherner JA. Gastric acid secretion in systemic mastocytosis. N Engl J Med. 1989;320:1562.

45. Horan RF, Austen KF. Systemic mastocytosis: retrospective review of a decade’s clinical experience at the Brigham and Women’s Hospital. J Invest Dermatol. 1991;96:5S-13S; discussion 13S-14S.

46. Lawrence JB, Friedman BS, Travis WD, Chinchilli VM, Metcalfe DD, Gralnick HR. Hematologic man\ifestations of systemic mast cell disease: a prospective study of laboratory and morphologic features and their relation to prognosis. Am J Med. 1991;91:612-624.

47. Travis WD, Li CY, Bergstralh EJ, Yam LT, Swee RG. Systemic mast cell disease: analysis of 58 cases and literature review. Medicine (Baltimore). 1988; 67:345-368.

48. Parwaresch MR, Horny HP, Lennert K. Tissue mast cells in health and disease. Pathol Res Pract. 1985;179:439-461.

49. Horny HP, Ruck P, Krober S, Kaiserling E. Systemic mast cell disease (mastocytosis). General aspects and histopathological diagnosis. Histol Histopathol. 1997;12:1081-1089.

50. Lennert K, Parwaresch MR. Mast cells and mast cell neoplasia: a review. Histopathology. 1979;3:349-365.

51. Li CY. Diagnosis of mastocytosis: value of cytochemistry and immunohistochemistry. Leuk Res. 2001;25:537-541.

52. Horny HP, Sillaber C, Menke D, et al. Diagnostic value of immunostaining for tryptase in patients with mastocytosis. Am J Surg Pathol. 1998;22:1132-1140.

53. Horny HP, Valent P. Histopathological and immunohistochemical aspects of mastocytosis. Int Arch Allergy Immunol. 2002;127:115- 117.

54. Horny HP, Sotlar K, Sperr WR, Valent P. Systemic mastocytosis with associated clonal haematological non-mast cell lineage diseases: a histopathological challenge. J Clin Pathol. 2004;57:604- 608.

55. Sperr WR, Escribano L, Jordan JH, et al. Morphologic properties of neoplastic mast cells: delineation of stages of maturation and implication for cytological grading of mastocytosis. Leuk Res. 2001;25:529-536.

56. Escribano L, Garcia Montero AC, Nunez R, Orfao A. Flow cytometric analysis of normal and neoplastic mast cells: role in diagnosis and follow-up of mast cell disease. Immunol Allergy Clin North Am. 2006;26:535-547.

57. Escribano L, Diaz-Agustin B, Nunez R, Prados A, Rodriguez R, Orfao A. Abnormal expression of CD antigens in mastocytosis. Int Arch Allergy Immunol. 2002;127:127-132.

58. Escribano L, Orfao A, Villarrubia J, et al. Sequential immunophenotypic analysis of mast cells in a case of systemic mast cell disease evolving to a mast cell leukemia. Cytometry. 1997;30:98- 102.

59. Elliott MA, Pardanani A, Li CY, Tefferi A. Immunophenotypic normalization of aberrant mast cells accompanies histological remission in imatinib-treated patients with eosinophilia-associated mastocytosis. Leukemia. 2004;18:1027-1029.

60. Escribano L, Diaz-Agustin B, Lopez A, et al. Immunophenotypic analysis of mast cells in mastocytosis: when and how to do it. Proposals of the Spanish Network on Mastocytosis (REMA). Cytometry B Clin Cytom. 2004;58:1-8.

61. Nunez-Lopez R, Escribano L, Schernthaner GH, et al. Overexpression of complement receptors and related antigens on the surface of bone marrow mast cells in patients with systemic mastocytosis. Br J Haematol. 2003;120:257-265.

62. Diaz-Agustin B, Escribano L, Bravo P, et al. The CD69 early activation molecule is overexpressed in human bone marrow mast cells from adults with indolent systemic mast cell disease. Br J Haematol. 1999;106:400-405.

63. Escribano L, Orfao A, Diaz Agustin B, et al. Human bone marrow mast cells from indolent systemic mast cell disease constitutively express increased amounts of the CD63 protein on their surface. Cytometry. 1998;34:223-228.

64. Schwartz LB, Metcalfe DD, Miller JS, Earl H, Sullivan T. Tryptase levels as an indicator of mast-cell activation in systemic anaphylaxis and mastocytosis. N Engl J Med. 1987;316:1622-1626.

65. Schwartz LB. Diagnostic value of tryptase in anaphylaxis and mastocytosis. Immunol Allergy Clin North Am. 2006;26:451-463.

66. Schwartz LB, Min HK, Ren S, et al. Tryptase precursors are preferentially and spontaneously released, whereas mature tryptase is retained by HMC-1 cells, Mono-Mac-6 cells, and human skin- derived mast cells. J Immunol. 2003;170: 5667-5673.

67. Schwartz LB, Sakai K, Bradford TR, et al. The alpha form of human tryptase is the predominant type present in blood at baseline in normal subjects and is elevated in those with systemic mastocytosis. J Clin Invest. 1995;96:2702-2710.

68. Sperr WR, Jordan JH, Baghestanian M, et al. Expression of mast cell tryptase by myeloblasts in a group of patients with acute myeloid leukemia. Blood. 2001;98:2200-2209.

69. Sperr WR, Hauswirth AW, Valent P. Tryptase a novel biochemical marker of acute myeloid leukemia. Leuk Lymphoma. 2002;43:2257-2261.

70. Sperr WR, Stehberger B, Wimazal F, et al. Serum tryptase measurements in patients with myelodysplastic syndromes. Leuk Lymphoma. 2002;43:1097-1105.

71. Samorapoompichit P, Kiener HP, Schernthaner GH, et al. Detection of tryptase in cytoplasmic granules of basophils in patients with chronic myeloid leukemia and other myeloid neoplasms. Blood. 2001;98:2580-2583.

72. Sotlar K, Fridrich C, Mall A, et al. Detection of c-kit point mutation Asp-816[arrow right]Val in microdissected pooled single mast cells and leukemic cells in a patient with systemic mastocytosis and concomitant chronic myelomonocytic leukemia. Leuk Res. 2002;26:979-984.

73. Pardanani A, Reeder T, Li CY, Tefferi A. Eosinophils are derived from the neoplastic clone in patients with systemic mastocytosis and eosinophilia. Leuk Res. 2003;27:883-885.

74. Yavuz AS, Lipsky PE, Yavuz S, Metcalfe DD, Akin C. Evidence for the involvement of a hematopoietic progenitor cell in systemic mastocytosis from single-cell analysis of mutations in the c-kit gene. Blood. 2002;100:661-665.

75. Lawley W, Hird H, Mallinder P, et al. Detection of an activating c-kit mutation by real-time PCR in patients with anaphylaxis. Mutat Res. 2005;572:1-13.

76. Sotlar K, Escribano L, Landt O, et al. One-step detection of c-kit point mutations using peptide nucleic acid-mediated polymerase chain reaction clamping and hybridization probes. Am J Pathol. 2003;162:737-746.

77. Mutter RD, Tannenbaum M, Ultmann JE. Systemic mast cell disease. Ann Intern Med. 1963;59:887-906.

78. Lawrence JB, Friedman BS, Travis WD, Chinchilli VM, Metcalfe DD, Gralnick HR. Hematologic manifestations of systemic mast cell disease: a prospective study of laboratory and morphologic features and their relation to prognosis. Am J Med. 1991;91:612-624.

79. Travis WD, Li CY, Bergstralh EJ, Yam LT, Swee RG. Systemic mast cell disease: analysis of 58 cases and literature review. Medicine (Baltimore). 1988; 67:345-368.

80. Pardanani A, Baek JY, Li CY, Butterfield JH, Tefferi A. Systemic mast cell disease without associated hematologic disorder: a combined retrospective and prospective study. Mayo Clin Proc. 2002;77:1169-1175.

81. Pardanani A, Brockman SR, Paternoster SF, et al. FIP1L1- PDGFRA fusion: prevalence and clinicopathologic correlates in 89 consecutive patients with moderate to severe eosinophilia. Blood. 2004;104:3038-3045.

82. Cools J, DeAngelo DJ, Gotlib J, et al. A tyrosine kinase created by fusion of the PDGFRA and FIP1L1 genes as a therapeutic target of imatinib in idiopathic hypereosinophilic syndrome. N Engl J Med. 2003;348:1201-1214.

83. Robyn J, Lemery S, McCoy JP, et al. Multilineage involvement of the fusion gene in patients with FIP1L1/PDGFRA-positive hypereosinophilic syndrome. Br J Haematol. 2006;132:286-292.

84. Klion AD, Noel P, Akin C, et al. Elevated serum tryptase levels identify a subset of patients with a myeloproliferative variant of idiopathic hypereosinophilic syndrome associated with tissue fibrosis, poor prognosis, and imatinib responsiveness. Blood. 2003;101:4660-4666.

85. Klion AD, Robyn J, Akin C, et al. Molecular remission and reversal of myelofibrosis in response to imatinib mesylate treatment in patients with the myeloproliferative variant of hypereosinophilic syndrome. Blood. 2004;103:473-478.

86. Pardanani A, Ketterling RP, Brockman SR, et al. CHIC2 deletion, a surrogate for FIP1L1-PDGFRA fusion, occurs in systemic mastocytosis associated with eosinophilia and predicts response to imatinib therapy. Blood. 2003;102:3093-3096.

87. Pardanani A, Ketterling RP, Brockman SR, et al. CHIC2 deletion, a surrogate for FIP1L1-PDGFRA fusion, occurs in systemic mastocytosis associated with eosinophilia and predicts response to imatinib mesylate therapy. Blood. 2003; 102:3093-3096.

88. Bain BJ. Relationship between idiopathic hypereosinophilic syndrome, eosinophilic leukemia, and systemic mastocytosis. Am J Hematol. 2004;77:82-85.

89. Valent P, Sperr WR, Samorapoompichit P, et al. Myelomastocytic overlap syndromes: biology, criteria, and relationship to mastocytosis. Leuk Res. 2001; 25:595-602.

90. Tefferi A, Pardanani A. Clinical, genetic, and therapeutic insights into systemic mast cell disease. Curr Opin Hematol. 2004;11:58-64.

91. Tefferi A, Pardanani A. Systemic mastocytosis: current concepts and treatment advances. Curr Hematol Rep. 2004;3:197-202.

92. Caplan RM. The natural course of urticaria pigmentosa: analysis and follow-up of 112 cases. Arch Dermatol. 1963;87:146- 157.

93. Horan RF, Sheffer AL, Austen KF. Cromolyn sodium in the management of systemic mastocytosis. J Allergy Clin Immunol. 1990;85:852-855.

94. Turk J, Oates JA, Roberts LJ II. Intervention with epinephrine in hypotension associated with mastocytosis. J Allergy Clin Immunol. 1983;71:189-192.

95. Casassus P, Caillat-Vigneron N, Martin A, et al. Treatment of adult systemic mastocytosis with interferon-alpha: results of a multicentre phase II trial on 20 patients. Br J Haematol. 2002;119:1090-1097.

96. Butterfield JH. Interferon treatment for hypereosinophilic syndromes and systemic mastocytosis. Acta Haematol. 2005;114:26-40.

97. Tefferi A, Li CY, Butterfield JH, Hoagland HC. Treatment of systemic mastcell disease with cladribine. N Engl J Med. 2001;344:307-309.

98. Pardanani A, Hoffbrand AV, Butterfield JH, Tefferi A. Treatment of systemic mast cell disease with 2- chlorodeoxyadenosine. Leuk Res. 2004;28:127-131.

99. Kluin-Nelemans HC, Oldhoff JM, Van Doormaal JJ, et al. Cladribine therapy for systemic mastocytosis. Blood. 2003;102:4270- 4276.

100. Gotlib J. KIT mutations in m\astocytosis and their potential as therapeutic targets. Immunol Allergy Clin North Am. 2006;26:575- 592.

101. Ma Y, Zeng S, Metcalfe DD, et al. The c-KIT mutation causing human mastocytosis is resistant to STI571 and other KIT kinase inhibitors; kinases with enzymatic site mutations show different inhibitor sensitivity profiles than wildtype kinases and those with regulatory-type mutations. Blood. 2002;99:1741-1744.

102. Akin C, Brockow K, D’Ambrosio C, et al. Effects of tyrosine kinase inhibitor STI571 on human mast cells bearing wild-type or mutated c-kit. Exp Hematol. 2003;31:686-692.

103. Pardanani A, Elliott M, Reeder T, et al. Imatinib for systemic mast-cell disease. Lancet. 2003;362:535-536.

104. Musto P, Falcone A, Sanpaolo G, Bodenizza C, Carella AM. Inefficacy of imatinib-mesylate in sporadic, aggressive systemic mastocytosis. Leuk Res. 2004; 28:421-422.

105. Pardanani A, Ketterling RP, Li CY, et al. FIP1L1-PDGFRA in eosinophilic disorders: prevalence in routine clinical practice, long-term experience with imatinib therapy, and a critical review of the literature. Leuk Res. 2006;30:965-970.

106. Frost MJ, Ferrao PT, Hughes TP, Ashman LK. Juxtamembrane mutant V560GKit is more sensitive to Imatinib (STI571) compared with wild-type c-kit whereas the kinase domain mutant D816VKit is resistant. Mol Cancer Ther. 2002; 1:1115-1124.

107. Shah NP, Lee FY, Luo R, Jiang Y, Donker M, Akin C. Dasatinib (BMS-354825) inhibits KITD816V, an imatinib-resistant activating mutation that triggers neoplastic growth in the majority of patients with systemic mastocytosis. Blood. 2006;108:286-291.

108. Schittenhelm MM, Shiraga S, Schroeder A, et al. Dasatinib (BMS-354825), a dual SRC/ABL kinase inhibitor, inhibits the kinase activity of wildtype, juxtamembrane, and activation loop mutant KIT isoforms associated with human malignancies. Cancer Res. 2006;66:473- 481.

109. Weisberg E, Boulton C, Kelly LM, et al. Inhibition of mutant FLT3 receptors in leukemia cells by the small molecule tyrosine kinase inhibitor PKC412. Cancer Cell. 2002;1:433-443.

110. Stone RM, DeAngelo DJ, Klimek V, et al. Patients with acute myeloid leukemia and an activating mutation in FLT3 respond to a small-molecule FLT3 tyrosine kinase inhibitor, PKC412. Blood. 2005;105:54-60.

111. Chen J, Deangelo DJ, Kutok JL, et al. PKC412 inhibits the zinc finger 198-fibroblast growth factor receptor 1 fusion tyrosine kinase and is active in treatment of stem cell myeloproliferative disorder. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. 2004;101: 14479-14484.

112. Cools J, Stover EH, Boulton CL, et al. PKC412 overcomes resistance to imatinib in a murine model of FIP1L1-PDGFRalpha- induced myeloproliferative disease. Cancer Cell. 2003;3:459-469.

113. Gotlib J, Berube C, Growney JD, et al. Activity of the tyrosine kinase inhibitor PKC412 in a patient with mast cell leukemia with the D816V KIT mutation. Blood. 2005;106:2865-2870.

114. Corbin AS, Demehri S, Griswold IJ, et al. In vitro and in vivo activity of ATP-based kinase inhibitors AP23464 and AP23848 against activation-loop mutants of Kit. Blood. 2005;106:227-234.

115. Corbin AS, Griswold IJ, La Rosee P, et al. Sensitivity of oncogenic KIT mutants to the kinase inhibitors MLN518 and PD180970. Blood. 2004;104:3754-3757.

116. Liao AT, Chien MB, Shenoy N, et al. Inhibition of constitutively active forms of mutant kit by multitargeted indolinone tyrosine kinase inhibitors. Blood. 2002;100:585-593.

117. von Bubnoff N, Gorantla SH, Kancha RK, Lordick F, Peschel C, Duyster J. The systemic mastocytosis-specific activating cKit mutation D816V can be inhibited by the tyrosine kinase inhibitor AMN107. Leukemia. 2005;19:1670-1671.

118. Petti F, Thelemann A, Kahler J, et al. Temporal quantitation of mutant Kit tyrosine kinase signaling attenuated by a novel thiophene kinase inhibitor OSI-930. Mol Cancer Ther. 2005;4:1186- 1197.

119. Garton AJ, Crew AP, Franklin M, et al. OSI-930: a novel selective inhibitor of Kit and kinase insert domain receptor tyrosine kinases with antitumor activity in mouse xenograft models. Cancer Res. 2006;66:1015-1024.

Mrinal M. Patnaik, MD; Michelle Rindos, MD; Peter A. Kouides, MD; Ayalew Tefferi, MD; Animesh Pardanani, MD, PhD

Reprints: Animesh Pardanani, MD, PhD, Mayo Clinic, Division of Hematology, 200 First St SW, Rochester, MN 55905 (e-mail: [email protected]).

Copyright College of American Pathologists May 2007

(c) 2007 Archives of Pathology & Laboratory Medicine. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

RediClinic Expands Austin Presence With Seven New Clinics in Area H-E-B

HOUSTON, May 17 /PRNewswire/ — RediClinic LLC announced today it has expanded its presence in the Austin market with five clinics now open in area H-E-B and two more planned to open by July 2007. RediClinics are in-store facilities that offer consumers easy access to high-quality, routine healthcare services at affordable prices. In addition to Austin, RediClinics are currently located in Atlanta, GA, Houston, TX, Fayetteville and Rogers, AR, Richmond, VA, San Antonio, TX, and Tulsa, OK.

“We are pleased to be able to expand our presence in Austin so that more residents will have easy access to high-quality, affordable health care,” said Web Golinkin, president and chief executive officer of RediClinic. “In order to encourage everyone to experience how convenient and inexpensive health care can be, we are offering $39 sports and camp physicals and our 7 Vital Tests for Women for just $15.”

RediClinics are staffed by certified nurse practitioners who work with local physicians to diagnose, treat and prescribe medications for common conditions, such as seasonal allergies, earaches, strep throat and upper respiratory infections. RediClinics are also the first convenient care clinics in Austin to offer a broad range of preventive services, including many health screening tests, flu shots and other vaccinations (including travel vaccinations), and basic physical exams.

“Family health and wellness are top priorities for H-E-B, and we are delighted to offer our customers the quality and convenience of RediClinic inside our stores,” said Craig Norman, vice president of pharmacy for H-E-B. RediClinics are open Monday through Friday 8 a.m. to 7 p.m., Saturday 9 a.m. to 5 p.m., and Sunday 10 a.m. to 5 p.m. Adults and children over age two are welcome, no appointments are necessary and a typical visit takes about 15 minutes.

RediClinics use a proprietary electronic medical record system to document and guide patient visits. This system ensures patient suitability to RediClinic’s limited scope of practice and facilitates continuity of care when other clinicians are involved. Patients who cannot be treated at a RediClinic, or who need ongoing treatment, are referred to their primary care provider, if they have one, or to another local healthcare provider.

RediClinic charges a flat rate of $59 for Get Well services, and preventive services start at $15. The company also accepts co-payments from members of a growing number of insurance plans, including Aetna, CIGNA, Humana, UnitedHealthcare, and Medicare. Customers with these insurance plans are charged the appropriate co-pay. Those who are covered by health plans that do not currently have agreements with RediClinic receive specially-formatted receipts that can be filed for possible reimbursement. In addition, as a new initiative, RediClinic will contract directly with select Austin employers to help them increase healthcare access and affordability for their employees.

   RediClinics are now located at the following Austin-area H-E-B:    -- Leander :       651 N. U. S. Highway at Country Road 259   -- Cedar Park:     170 E. Whitestone at Hwy 183   -- Round Rock:     1700 E. Palm Valley Blvd. at FM 1460   -- Round Rock:     16900 North RR 620 at O'Conner Drive   -- Austin:         11521 North FM 620 at Anderson Mill Road     Additional May 2007 opening in Austin-area H-E-B:    -- Pflugerville:   1434 Wells Branch Parkway at FM 1825     Additional June 2007 opening in Austin-area H-E-B:    -- Kyle:           5401 South FM 1626 at New Country Road   

For a complete list of locations, services, prices and additional information on RediClinic, visit http://www.rediclinic.com/.

Revolution Clinics, a company created by AOL co-founder Steve Case, is RediClinic LLC’s largest investor, and is providing the capital to support the national rollout of RediClinic.

RediClinic LLC

Since 1989, RediClinic (formerly known as InterFit Health) has provided people with easy access to high-quality, affordable health care. Today the company is a leader in retail-based convenient care and is one of the nation’s largest providers of health screening tests, flu shots and other health- related services to retailers and employers. For more information, visit http://www.rediclinic.com/.

Revolution Health Group

Revolution Clinics is an affiliate of Revolution Health Group, a leading consumer-centric health company. Revolution Health strives to empower consumers by putting them at the center of the health system, building innovative health-related companies through investments, acquisitions and partnerships. The company’s strategy is to create businesses and products that provide greater consumer choice, control and convenience in three key healthcare sectors affected by the rapid growth of the Internet and defined- contribution health plans: content, coverage and care.

RediClinic LLC

CONTACT: Katie Brazel of Fleishman-Hillard, +1-404-739-0150,[email protected], for RediClinic LLC

Web site: http://www.rediclinic.com/

Aetna to Enable Faster Payments Between Members and Health Care Providers

Aetna (NYSE:AET) is building on its transparency initiatives and existing payment solutions with new programs to facilitate members’ payments for out-of-pocket costs to health care providers. The company is working with Medical Funding Services (MFS) to introduce expanded electronic options to simplify billing and reimbursement.

MFS will offer its financial services and related electronic payment solutions to network health care providers in select markets. These include an online solution that combines the health plan and patient portions of a medical bill into a single payment to health care providers. Members may see reduced paperwork; health care providers also can benefit from reduced paperwork and faster reimbursement. MFS also offers programs and services to health care providers including patient volume guarantees, prepayments to health care providers of projected claims, and electronic solutions to improve the timeliness of payments.

Over the next year, Aetna will work with employers to give members the choice to participate in its Easy Pay program, in which members can automatically pay health care providers though a credit or debit card. The program offers members an electronic option to make it easier to pay for out-of-pocket health care costs.

“Aetna recognizes that as consumer responsibility for health care costs increases, so do health care professionals’ concerns about payment from members. We believe there are solutions that benefit everyone,” said Allen Karp, Aetna vice president for Health Care Delivery. “We are developing programs that make it easier for health care professionals to receive payment, while helping consumers stretch their health care dollars and simplify how they pay their out-of-pocket costs to hospitals and physicians.”

In the Easy Pay program, members can register their credit or debit card information with MFS, which will handle the transaction on behalf of the member. Aetna members who participate in the Easy Pay automatic payment program may see reduced medical charges.

“We are pleased to be working with Aetna toward improving cash flow for health care providers and modernizing the claims payment process for the benefit of health care providers, health plans, and their members,” said MFS’s Chief Operating Officer Tom Morey. “Our goal is to deliver measurable value across all of Aetna’s relationships through each MFS program.”

The more informed members are about the true cost of health care and their responsibilities, the better they can anticipate and be prepared to reimburse health care providers for their portion of out-of-pocket costs. Aetna has one of the strongest suites of consumer tools and information in the industry to help its members understand and anticipate the true cost of health care. The company was the first health plan to make physician-specific rates transparent and available to members before they receive care.

About Aetna

Aetna is one of the nation’s leading diversified health care benefits companies, serving approximately 34.9 million people with information and resources to help them make better informed decisions about their health care. Aetna offers a broad range of traditional and consumer-directed health insurance products and related services, including medical, pharmacy, dental, behavioral health, group life, long-term care and disability plans, and medical management capabilities. Our customers include employer groups, individuals, college students, part-time and hourly workers, health plans and government-sponsored plans. www.aetna.com

About Medical Funding Services, Inc.

Medical Funding Services, Inc. (“MFS”) provides financial services and related electronic payment solutions to the health care community. MFS services and programs are designed to provide measurable value to the provider community through cash flow enhancement and reduction in provider administrative costs. MFS clients include major health care payors as well as hospitals and physicians. MFS has contracted with Aetna to offer its services and programs, including the automatic payment program, to Aetna participating providers. MFS is privately held and based outside Washington, DC. www.medicalfundingservices.com

Follica Developing Breakthrough Discovery to Treat Hair Loss, Wounds and Other Degenerative Skin Disorders

BOSTON, May 16 /PRNewswire/ — Technology licensed by Follica Inc. from the University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine has been used to generate completely new hair follicles for the first time in normal adult mammals. The paper describing the experiment was published in the May 17th issue of the scientific journal Nature.

   (Photo: http://www.newscom.com/cgi-bin/prnh/20070516/NEW086-a)   (Logo: http://www.newscom.com/cgi-bin/prnh/20070516/NEW086LOGO-b)  

By studying wound healing on a molecular level, Dr. George Cotsarelis and colleagues discovered that the skin has the ability to revert to a more primitive or “embryonic” state as stem cells migrate to the affected area, thereby achieving a regenerative capacity not previously appreciated to occur in adults.

The researchers were able to control the regenerative response, including the extent of new hair follicle formation, by manipulating genetic pathways during this “embryonic window” when new follicles formed. The new hair follicles functioned normally, cycled through the normal stages of hair growth and exhibited normal architecture, including a full complement of stem cells. Cotsarelis and colleagues showed that the induction of this primitive state triggered corresponding embryonic molecular pathways distinct from those active in corresponding cells in adult skin, opening up new treatment options not previously thought to have therapeutic benefit in normal adult skin.

“The ’embryonic window’ gives us the opportunity to develop disease treatments that act in entirely novel ways,” said Daphne Zohar, PureTech Ventures founding managing partner and Follica CEO. “The clinical translation of this technique involves straightforward, safe dermatological procedures, and we are studying the impact of multiple drugs and drug-like compounds on this regenerative response as we advance in preclinical testing.”

“This is an extremely exciting discovery and shows promise for treatment of follicular disorders such as hair loss and unwanted excess hair,” noted Dr. Vera Price, co-founder of the National Alopecia Areata Foundation, director of the University of California, San Francisco (UCSF) Hair Research Center and a founding scientific advisory board member of Follica Inc.

“The hair follicle is an elegant structure that plays many different roles for human skin, aside from growing hair,” said Dr. Rox Anderson, Professor of Dermatology at Harvard Medical School, Director of the Wellman Center for Photomedicine at Massachusetts General Hospital, and founding chairman of Follica’s scientific advisory board. “George Cotsarelis’ insights into the biology of hair follicles provide new strategies for preventing and treating a variety of skin and hair disorders.”

Follica exclusively licensed the technology from The University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine where it is the basis of an ongoing development program. The paper’s lead author, Dr. Cotsarelis, is also a co- founder and scientific advisory board member of Follica

About Follica

Follica Inc., a privately held medical device company, was co-founded by PureTech Ventures and a group of world renowned experts in hair follicle biology and medicine. In addition to hair loss, Follica has intellectual property and development programs in various skin and follicle related indications. Additional Follica contributors include Dr. Kurt Stenn (Aderans Research, formerly of J & J, Yale) member of Follica’s scientific advisory board; Dr. Ron Cape (PureTech partner, founder Cetus, former board member Neutrogena) Follica board member; and Dr. Steve Prouty (former J&J skin biology) Follica director of research. http://www.follicabio.com/

About PureTech Ventures

PureTech Ventures is a Boston-based venture firm specializing in translating breakthrough research from top tier academic institutions into therapies that will impact human health and quality of life. PureTech’s partners include entrepreneurs and leaders from the top echelon of pharma, biotech, medtech and academia. http://www.puretechventures.com/

Photo: NewsCom: http://www.newscom.com/cgi-bin/prnh/20070516/NEW086-ahttp://www.newscom.com/cgi-bin/prnh/20070516/NEW086LOGO-bAP Archive: http://photoarchive.ap.org/AP PhotoExpress Network: PRN12PRN Photo Desk, [email protected]

Follica Inc.

CONTACT: Daphne Zohar, Follica CEO, PureTech Ventures Managing Partner,[email protected], or David Steinberg, Follica CBO,[email protected], +1-617-482-2333

Web site: http://www.follicabio.com/http://www.puretechventures.com/

The Commercial Appeal, Memphis, Tenn., Business Calendar Column

By The Commercial Appeal, Memphis, Tenn.

May 16–TODAY:

–The Sales and Marketing Society of the Mid-South monthly luncheon: 11:45 a.m.-1 p.m., The Racquet Club, 5111 Sanderlin. Speaker: Dr. Edward Champagne, president of Command Consulting, LLC and senior consultant for Russell Montgomery and Associates. Topic: “Meetings, Meetings, Meetings.” Free for members, $25 for nonmembers, includes lunch. Reservations: Call 937-5532 or e-mail [email protected]. Information: Call Darrell Uselton, 761-5585.

–Alliance for Nonprofit Excellence Foundation Center Workshop: 9:30 a.m.-12:30 p.m., Memphis Public Library, 3030 Poplar. Free. Registration: Call 415-2734.

–Memphis Chapter of APICS Seminar: 8 a.m.-5 p.m., Appling Manor, 1755 Appling. Speaker: Michael Demere. Topic: TOC Distribution Solution. Registration: Visit apics-memphis.org or call Mike Dusseault at 215-1526.

–GMAQ Lunch & Learn Series: 11:30 a.m.-1 p.m., The University of Memphis Alumni Center, 635 Normal. Speaker: Derrick Pratt, a project manager for Strategic Services, with International Paper. Topic: “Can Project Management Help You Improve Quality and Win with Customers?” Free for members, $10 for nonmembers. Reservations required: E-mail Harriet Browning at [email protected] or [email protected] or call 678-4268 or 831-0230.

THURSDAY:

–Pre-Business Planning Workshop: 7-8:30 p.m., Bartlett Library, 6382 Stage Road. Speaker: SCORE management counselor Susan Lane. Free. Reservations: Call 544-3588 or visit scorememphis.org.

–Executive Women International-Memphis Chapter, Monthly Meeting: 7 a.m., Clark Tower, Tower Room, 5100 Poplar. Speaker: Shelby County Mayor A C Wharton. For reservations: Contact Rose Ann Bradley at 224-2977 or e-mail [email protected].

–The Institute of Management Accountants — Memphis Chapter monthly Technical Session: 11:45 a.m., Medallion Restaurant, Holiday Inn, The University of Memphis, 3700 Central. Speaker: Jim Lowitzer. Topic: “A Moving Experience.” Cost: $20. Reservations: Visit imamemphis.org.

–Small Business Workshop: 6:30 p.m., Benjamin L. Hooks Central Library, 3030 Poplar. Speaker: Mark Taylor of the Tennessee Small Business Development Center. Topic: Nuts and Bolts of Starting a Small Business.

–Researching Grant Funding workshop: 12:30-4:30 p.m., Alliance for Nonprofit Excellence office, 606 S. Mendenhall, Suite 108. Speaker: Melissa Hanson. Cost: $65 for members, $99 for nonmembers. Information: Call 684-6605 or visit npexcellence.org.

FRIDAY:

–Memphis Regional Chamber’s May Leadership Luncheon series: 11:30 a.m.-1 p.m., Holiday Inn, University of Memphis, 3700 Central. Speaker: Patrick Spainhour, chairman and CEO of ServiceMaster. Cost: $25 for members, $35 for nonmembers. Information: Visit memphischamber.com, call 543-3571 or e-mail [email protected]

–MSQPC workshop: 8 a.m.-5 p.m., Memphis Regional Chamber offices, 22 N. Front Street. Topic: “Franklin Covey’s Four Disciplines of Execution.” Information: Visit msqpc.com or contact Alexis Burgman at 543-3530 or [email protected].

–Nonprofit Accounting for the Non-Accountant workshop: 9 a.m.-noon, the Assisi Foundation of Memphis, 515 Erin Drive. Speaker: Michele Wilson. Cost: $65 for members, $99 for nonmembers. Information: Call 684-6605 or visit npexcellence.org.

—–

To see more of The Commercial Appeal, or to subscribe to the newspaper, go to http://www.commercialappeal.com.

Copyright (c) 2007, The Commercial Appeal, Memphis, Tenn.

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

Korea’s First Proton Therapy Center Opens to Cancer Patients

Doctors at the National Cancer Center (NCC) of Korea are now employing proton beams in their war against cancer using a newly installed $38 million proton therapy system from IBA.

The first patient at the $51 million NCC Proton Therapy Center was treated for prostate cancer. More than 900 patients a year are expected to be treated at the proton therapy center for breast cancer, pediatric cancer, liver cancer, lung cancer, brain cancer and prostate cancer. The only facility of its kind in Korea, NCC Proton Therapy Center is located in Ilsan, north of Seoul.

IBA’s three-treatment-room proton therapy system was installed and operational in about 20 months. It includes two gantry-housed proton therapy units and one fixed-beam unit. A gantry is a massive 90-ton rotational frame that delivers a prescribed dose of protons at precise angles in the body to maximize tumor destruction and minimize radiation-related side effects for the patient.

“IBA has been an extraordinary partner to NCC Korea,” said Kwan Ho Cho, M.D., director of the proton therapy center. “IBA installed a first-rate system and provided design and construction expertise to ensure proper alignment and operation.”

Up until now, cancer patients in need of proton therapy had to travel to Japan for treatment. In 2002, the Health and Welfare Ministry committed to constructing a proton therapy center. It is a key component in Korea’s 10-year plan to improve cancer outcomes.

“NCC Korea is playing essential roles as the national center in the fight against cancer through research, medical care, support for national cancer control programs, education and training,” Dr. Cho added. “It is now able to provide state-of-the art radiotherapy for cancer patients including proton beam therapy, image-guided radiotherapy (tomotherapy), intensity modulated radiotherapy and three-dimensional conformal brachytherapy.”

Construction of the 14-story, 323,000-square-foot facility began in July 2003. The building also houses the Center for Cancer Prevention and Detection.

The Korea installation occurred at the same time IBA was helping construct a proton therapy facility in Jacksonville, Fla. The 98,000-square-foot University of Florida Proton Therapy Institute opened in August 2006. The $125 million facility is part of the University of Florida Shands Cancer Center and includes three of IBA’s gantry-housed proton therapy units and one fixed-beam unit.

“This stands as the first time that a single manufacturer has developed two proton therapy facilities in parallel,” said Pierre Mottet, chief executive officer of IBA, “readying them for clinical use in record time. As the undisputed world market leader in particle therapy with more than 50 percent market share, IBA is doubling the current annual production rate for particle therapy systems to meet growing demand, and we have already improved installation cycle times so we can help develop centers simultaneously — and faster.”

Proton therapy is the most precise form of radiation therapy available. It delivers nearly all its destructive energy to a malignant tumor with pinpoint accuracy, leaving surrounding tissue unharmed and reducing treatment-related adverse events.

It is a favored approach for treating certain kinds of tumors where conventional X-ray and radiation oncology would damage surrounding tissues at an unacceptable level. Prevention of collateral damage of healthy tissue is especially critical when treating optic nerves, the spinal cord and central nervous system, head and neck areas, and the prostate. Proton therapy’s precision and sharp distal fall-off also averts the long-term side effects experienced by many pediatric patients following conventional radiotherapy.

IBA is currently overseeing construction of the 75,000-square-foot Roberts Proton Therapy Center at the Abramson Cancer Center of the University of Pennsylvania in Philadelphia. The $144 million project is the largest proton therapy center ever developed. It will include IBA’s proton-generating cyclotron and proton beam equipment for four gantry-based patient treatment rooms, one fixed-beam patient room and a separate research room. The most advanced nozzle technologies and patient positioning options also will be installed.

The company will build a $50 million proton therapy system at the Oklahoma ProCure Treatment Center in Oklahoma City. Construction of the 55,000-square-foot facility began in April 2007. It will house four patient treatment rooms, including two inclined-beam rooms, one fixed-horizontal-beam room and a gantry room. The first cancer patient is expected to be treated at the ProCure proton therapy center in the summer of 2009.

Twelve institutions in the United States, Asia and Europe have already selected a proton therapy system from IBA. The IBA particle therapy product line ranges from small, one-room compact systems to top-of-the-line carbon configurations. IBA is the only company that has regulatory clearances, including FDA clearance to market cyclotron-based particle therapy systems.

ABOUT IBA

IBA delivers solutions of a unique precision in the fields of cancer diagnosis and therapy. The company also offers sterilization and ionization solutions to improve the hygiene and safety of everyday life. IBA (Ion Beam Applications S.A.: Reuters IOBAt.BR and Bloomberg IBAB.BB) is listed on the pan-European stock exchange EURONEXT, is integrated into the NextEconomy market segment and belongs to the BelMid index. IBA world headquarters is located in Brussels. The Americas’ headquarters for IBA Particle Therapy is in Jacksonville, Fla.

Website: http://www.iba-worldwide.com.

Cleveland Clinic Study Demonstrates TASER X26 Does Not Affect Short-Term Function of Implantable Pacemakers and Defibrillators

SCOTTSDALE, Ariz., May 16, 2007 (PRIME NEWSWIRE) — TASER International, Inc. (Nasdaq:TASR), a market leader in advanced electronic control devices announced today the publication of a study by Cleveland Clinic. According to the peer reviewed study published in Europace, by the European Society of Cardiology(r), a standard electrical discharge from a TASER(r) X26 electronic control device (ECD) does not affect the integrity of implantable pacemakers and defibrillators and did not trigger an implantable cardioverter defibrillator (ICD) shock in devices programmed to the standard non-committed shock delivery mode.

As is well known, implantable cardiac devices are sometimes susceptible to malfunction as a result of electromagnetic interference (EMI). EMI can result in many undesirable consequences, including damage to internal circuitry, oversensing, undersensing, failure to pace, failure to capture, power on reset, triggering of elective replacement indicators or inappropriate defibrillation shocks.

This study evaluated the immediate effects of TASER X26 discharges on the function of various models of pacemakers and ICDs from the three major manufacturers. A small 50 lb (28 kg.) anesthetized adult pig served as an animal model. It concluded that the TASER X26 discharges do not affect the short-term functional integrity of implantable pacemakers and defibrillators even when the darts are placed in a manner to surround the implanted device. Also, the standard ECD application duration of five seconds should not trigger an ICD shock in devices programmed to the standard non-committed shock delivery mode.

“A standard five-second TASER X26 application does not affect the functional integrity of pacemakers and defibrillators,” said Dr. Lakkireddy, who was the primary investigator for this study. Dr. Lakkireddy was an electrophysiology fellow at the Cleveland Clinic at the time of the study and is now a clinical assistant professor of medicine at the University of Kansas Hospital and a practicing cardiac electrophysiologist at the Bloch Heart Rhythm Center in Kansas City, KS.

This study was presented as an abstract at the Heart Rhythm Society (HRS) 2007 28th Annual Sessions in Denver, CO on May 12, 2007. The full manuscript was electronically published in Europace and is available at: http://europace.oxfordjournals.org/cgi/reprint/eum058?ijkey=v5zONNAwEzrMZP5&keytype=ref.

This study was funded by an educational grant from TASER International. The funding source had no input on the study design, organization, results and manuscript preparation. None of the contributing authors have any kind of financial or any other conflict of interest with the funding source.

About TASER International, Inc.

TASER International provides advanced electronic control devices for use in the law enforcement, military, private security and personal defense markets. TASER(r) devices use proprietary technology to incapacitate dangerous, combative or high-risk subjects who pose a risk to law enforcement officers, innocent citizens or themselves in a manner that is generally recognized as a safer alternative to other uses of force. TASER technology saves lives every day, and the use of TASER devices dramatically reduces injury rates for police officers and suspects. For more information on TASER life-saving technology, please call TASER International at (800) 978-2737 or visit our website at www.TASER.com.

Note to Investors

This press release contains forward-looking information within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of the 1933 and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, and is subject to the safe harbor created by those sections. The forward-looking information is based upon current information and expectations regarding TASER International. These estimates and statements speak only as of the date on which they are made, are not guarantees of future performance, and involve certain risks, uncertainties and assumptions that are difficult to predict. Therefore, actual outcomes and results could materially differ from what is expressed, implied, or forecasted in such forward-looking statements.

TASER International assumes no obligation to update the information contained in this press release. TASER International’s forward looking statements in this press release and future results may be impacted by the completion of the restatement of the Company’s financial results for the first quarter of 2005 and the second quarter of 2005, risks associated with rapid technological change, new product introductions, new technological developments and implementations, execution issues associated with new technology, ramping manufacturing production to meet demand, litigation results from Company filed lawsuits and other litigation including lawsuits resulting from alleged product related injuries, media publicity concerning allegations of deaths occurring after use of the TASER device and the negative impact this could have on sales, product quality, implementation of manufacturing automation, potential fluctuations in quarterly operating results, adjustments to these amounts which may be reflected in our 10Q filing, competition, financial and budgetary constraints of prospects and customers, international order delays, dependence upon sole and limited source suppliers, negative reports concerning TASER device uses, governmental inquiries and investigations, medical and safety studies, fluctuations in component pricing, government regulations, variation among law enforcement agencies with their TASER product experience, TASER device tests and reports, dependence upon key employees, and our ability to retain employees. TASER International’s future results may also be impacted by other risk factors listed from time to time in its SEC filings, including, but not limited to, the Company’s Form 10-Qs and its Annual Report on Form 10-K.

The statements made herein are independent statements of TASER International. The inclusion of any third parties does not represent an endorsement of any TASER International products or services by any such third parties.

This news release was distributed by PrimeNewswire, www.primenewswire.com

 CONTACT: TASER International, Inc.          Steve Tuttle, Vice President of Communications          Media ONLY Hotline:  (480) 444-4000 

Evidence-Based Practice for Evaluation and Management of Female Urinary Tract Infection

By Jackson, Misti A

Treatment and management of uncomplicated, lower urinary tract infections in adult females is unique in comparison to other patient populations. In this article, best practices and evidence-based research for treating a urinary tract infection in this group of patients are examined. A typical case of a female client in an outpatient urology setting is compared to recommendations in the literature. Interventions in the scenario are examined against available guidelines, revealing that some practices are supported, others are contraindicated, and gaps are identified.

An inflammation of the bladder mucosa may be the result of a variety of bladder conditions including chronic cystitis, radiation, chemotherapy, or a urinary tract infection (UTI). UTIs are common in adult females, as a result of the anatomy of the urinary system of this population (Delzell & Fitzsimmons, 2005). Compared to the male urethra, the female urethra is shorter and in closer proximity to the rectum, thus allowing easier colonization of bacteria, and in turn, leading to a higher prevalence of UTIs. The management approach for adult females is distinctly different than the regimen for the same presenting signs and symptoms in males, children, or pregnant women. The treatment regimen is also different for complicated UTIs (for example, upper-tract infections). UTIs are the leading cause of morbidity and health care expenditures in persons of all ages (Orenstein & Wong, 1999). Thirty percent of females have at least one UTI in their lifetime and this diagnosis accounts for 7 million physician visits per year (Epocrates, 2004).

To maximize quality, evidence- based practice (EBP) should be the core of patient care. Health care providers must have the ability to analyze, critique, and apply evidence-based guidelines in a clinical setting. One of the first steps includes reviewing reputable EBP guidelines and resources, and applying them to selected patient populations. This involves weighing risks versus benefits for each particular patient as well as the health care system (Klardie, Johnson, McNaughton, & Meyers, 2004).

There are several different levels of and types of EBP; each varies slightly based on the author or sponsor. Generally, the highest, most reliable levels are systematic reviews (often found in the Cochrane Libraries) and randomized controlled trials (RCTs). Practice guidelines are based on various interventions, from sensitivity and specificity of diagnostic tests to relative and absolute risk of prescribing medications (Klardie et al., 2004). The levels then gradually decrease to the “expert opinion” category, which is the lowest level of EBP frameworks. For example, the United States Preventive Task Force lists three levels, with Level I based on the RCT, and Level III based on descriptive studies or opinions. Alternately, the National Guideline Clearinghouse (NGC, 2000) lists grades of recommendations for practice (A, B, C, and good practice points). Grade A must be based on RCTs, B on non-RCTs, and C on expert opinion. Good practice points are based on recommendations by NGC group members.

Readers of Urologic Nursing may encounter UTIs in adult females often. New guidelines are established to ensure providers give the most current and best supported care to their patients. EBP is also crucial as nurses justify “why we do what we do.” Evidence-based guidelines may or may not mimic the variety of practice settings where adult female UTIs are evaluated and treated; therefore, nurses may bring this new information to their practice settings.

UTIs are one of the most common problems encountered in urology. Continued research and publications are necessary to refine and acquire current skills that are necessary in managing this common problem. EBP surrounding uncomplicated, nonrecurring, lower-tract UTIs, including management regimens for adult female clients (defined as ages 18 to 64) in an outpatient, urology setting is examined.

Background

Gram-negative bacteria, particularly Escherichia coli, are the most common culprits found in female UTIs, followed by Staphylococcus saprophyticus and Proteus (Katchman, Christiaens, Baerheim, Soares-Weiser, & Leibovici, 2004). Bacteria enter through the periurethral vaginal introitus and ascend into the bladder via the urethra (Howes, 2005). Complicated UTIs occur when lower-tract mechanisms fail, thus allowing bacteria to colonize the upper- urinary tract. The focus of this article is limited to a discussion of uncomplicated, nonrecurring, lower UTIs.

Risk factors for UTI include a previous diagnosis, diabetes mellitus, pregnancy, more frequent or vigorous sexual activity, use of spermicides or diaphragm, or an underlying anomaly of the genitourinary tract such as tumors, calculi, strictures, or incomplete bladder emptying (Epocrates, 2004; Hooten, 2000). Although 3% to 8% of women have bacteriuria at any given time (Epocrates, 2004), treatment is based on symptomatology. Clinical presentation of a symptomatic UTI may include dysuria, urinary frequency, urgency, and pelvic pressure or pain. Patients often relate these findings to an inciting event such as recent sexual intercourse. Patients may treat initial symptoms with over-the- counter analgesics. Physical examination findings are often within normal limits. Positive nitrite (byproduct of bacterial colonization) dipsticks are 94% specific for UTI (Howes, 2005). Nitrite dipsticks may be negative in those who do not eat meat, may fail to detect bacteriuria in 30% to 50% of cases, and can be confounded by consumption of ascorbic acid (Epocrates, 2004; University of Michigan Health System [UMHS], 1999). A positive leukocyte esterase dipstick is 75% to 97% sensitive (Delzell & Fitzsimmons, 2005; UMHS, 1999).

The urinalysis typically is remarkable for pyuria, bacteriuria, and perhaps hematuria and nitrates. A positive urinalysis (midstream- voided technique) reveals greater than 105 leukocytes per high power field on microscopic examination which is indicative of significant pyuria (Tierney, McPhee & Papadakis, 2004). While urine culture is the most definitive diagnostic test, it is rarely necessary or cost effective in premenopausal women presenting with an uncomplicated, nonrecurring UTI (Butler, Reed, & Bosker, 2001). Asymptomatic bacteriuria should not be treated with antibiotics in non-pregnant adult females (NGC, 2000).

Case Example

Consider the following case of a 27-year-old female presenting to an outpatient urology practice. Evaluation and management approaches included in the case example are then compared with EBP guidelines and similarities, differences, and gaps are discussed.

Subjective (S) information. A 27-year-old nulliparous female presents with chief complaints of burning with urination, urinary frequency (more than two times per hour), and a slightly foul odor to her urine. Symptom onset was 3 days ago and is progressively worsening. The patient reports no pain in her abdomen or back. She describes the pain as intermittent with urination and as a “burning” pain. The pain is more intense when initiating the urine stream and immediately upon urinating. Signs and symptoms are worse in the evenings, as the patient notices an increased sense of urinary urgency at that time. She denies any “accidents” or leakage of urine.

The patient denies fever, chills, anorexia, fatigue, weakness, flank pain, or back pain. She also denies abdominal pain, nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, or constipation. She complains of burning with urination; her pain is improved with rest and with the absence of urination. She denies hematuria. In addition to daytime urinary frequency, she also describes nocturia of three to four times per night. Her sexual history is remarkable for regular sexual activity, no new partners, and no vaginal discharge. Her last menstrual period occurred 2 weeks prior to this visit. Her menstrual periods are regular.

The only medication she takes is Mircette (desogestrel/ethinyl estradiol-oral contraceptive). She has no known drug allergies. Her past health history reveals up to date immunizations. She was treated with Paxil (paroxetine) for depression several years ago and has had no reoccurrence. Her family history is significant for paternal hypertension and congestive heart failure. She has a five pack year history (one cigarette per day for 5 years) of cigarette smoking.

Objective (O) findings. The patient is well nourished, has an appropriate affect, and is in no acute distress. Her vital signs are within normal limits. Her lungs are clear to auscultation, regular sinus rhythm, no murmur. Bowel sounds are normal and her abdomen is soft, non-tender, and non-distended. There is no organomegaly, no costovertebral angle tenderness, and no flank pain.

Dipstick urinalysis reveals the following: color dark yellow, pH 6.5, specific gravity 1.025, nitrite positive, leukocyte positive, glucose negative, protein negative, and trace red blood cells (RBC). Microscopic urinalysis shows white blood cells: 20- 30/high powered field (HPF), RBC: 0-2/HPF, epithelial cells: 0- 2/HPF, and moderate bacteria.

Assessment (A)

1. The patient is diagnosed with an uncomplicated, lower UTI.

Plan (P)

1. The provider instructs the patient in the UTI disease process and emphasizes the need to report worsening signs/symptoms to the emergency room. Examples of emergent findin\gs include fever, chills, and/or flank pain, which may be indicative of pyelonephritis. The patient should avoid sexual intercourse until symptoms have resolved and return to the clinic if she has noticed no improvement within 48 hours.

2. A prescription was written for Bactrim DS (trimethoprim/ sulfamethoxazole) with instruction to take one tablet twice per day with food for 3 days.

3. The patient was cautioned regarding the potential interaction between new and preexisting medications. Antibiotics may decrease the effectiveness of Mircette, thus requiring a back-up method of contraception. The patient was also made aware of the potential side effect profile of Bactrim DS and adverse reactions to report.

4. Measures to prevent future UTIs were given to the patient that included the need to maintain an adequate hydration status by increasing her fluid intake (particularly acidic fruit juices). Establishing voiding habits that prevent UTIs were discussed; these included voiding at first desire rather than “waiting;” urinating before and after intercourse; and maintaining a regular bowel movement pattern (avoiding constipation). She was also instructed that sanitary napkins should be changed frequently. Wearing cotton underwear, avoiding feminine hygiene sprays and scented douches, and wiping from front to back were also recommended.

5. Smoking cessation was discussed. Smoking greatly increases the risk of adverse effects associated with taking oral contraceptives. Risks associated with oral contraceptive pills can be explained utilizing the ACHES acronym: A – abdominal pain (severe), C – chest pain, H – headache (severe), E – eye problems, and S – severe localized leg pain. Providers should take the opportunity to recognize the danger of increased cardiac events for women who smoke while on oral contraceptives and use the ACHES acronym to screen for potential problems that the patient may be experiencing (Family Health International, 2006).

6. Schedule followup appointment in 2 weeks and repeat urinalysis at that time.

Analysis and EBP Research

Recommended EBP guidelines for treatment of UTI in this sex and age population were partially followed in the case example. Bactrim DS one tablet, twice daily for 3 days, is the most frequently recommended antibiotic regime for treating uncomplicated, lower UTI (Guidelines Advisory Committee [GAC], 2003; Katchman et al., 2004; NGC, 2000; Uphold & Graham, 2003). Antibiotic regimes of just 1 day have been associated with high failure rates and those greater than 3 days have been deemed unnecessary in this population (Delzell & Fitzsimmons, 2005; NGC, 2000). When Bactrim DS is contraindicated, as with an allergy or resistance, the recommended second-line treatment is with a quinolone drug for 3 days (GAC, 2003; NGC, 2000). Examples of quinolones include Cipro (ciprofloxacin) 250 mg twice daily for 3 days, or Levaquin (levofloxacin) 250 mg, once daily for 3 days. Finally, if the above recommendations are contraindicated, another option is for 7 days of Macrobid (nitrofurantoin), Amoxil (amoxicillin), or a first-generation cephalosporin such as Keflex (cephalexin) (GAC, 2003; NGC, 2000).

Signs and symptoms usually resolve within 2 to 3 days of antibiotic treatment. Bladder analgesics such as Pyridium (phenazopyridine) are ill advised due to the possibility of masking signs or symptoms of complications such as pyelonephritis, renal abscess, or urinary outlet obstruction (Delzell & Fitzsimmons, 2005). One discrepancy in the case example and the published GAC and UMHS guidelines is with the followup appointment. Published guidelines suggest that no followup visit is necessary if symptoms resolve in 3 days and that a urine culture is only indicated when symptoms persists or do not subside within 3 days (GAC, 2003; UMHS, 1999).

Women ages 18 to 64, and particularly those on the younger end of that spectrum, have a unique risk of experiencing decreased oral contraceptive efficacy (if applicable) when simultaneously taking an antibiotic. Caution is advised as the antibiotic competes for sites with the oral contraceptive, thereby decreasing its efficacy. In the case example, a potential interaction between Mircette and Bactrim DS may occur. EBP guidelines suggest use of an alternative antibiotic such as a tetracycline drug or ampicillin (enterohepatic recirculation altered) (Epocrates, 2004). Thus, for the patient in this case study, an alternate antibiotic regime may have been warranted.

Interventions and EBP Research

Use of a SOAP (subjective, objective, assessment, plan) format for documentation aids in making an accurate diagnosis. In adult females, the diagnosis of UTI is made primarily by history; in combination with dysuria and urinary frequency (and in the absence of vaginitis), the diagnosis is accurate 80% of the time (UMHS, 1999). Some research supports over the phone management to diagnose and treat UTIs in this population (NGC, 2000). If over the phone management is employed, it is vital that the nurse elicit subjective data (dysuria, urgency, frequency, nocturia) as well as personal habits (scented products, hygiene, fluid intake), sexual history (frequency, number of partners, use of latex or spermicides), obstetric and gynecologic history (last menstrual period, symptoms of atrophic changes), and medication history (anticholinergics, psychotropics, immunosuppressives) (Delzell & Fitzsimmons, 2005). The objective examination in the case example is within normal limits, which is also a consistent finding typical of a UTI diagnosis, and supported by EBP literature (Epocrates, 2004; Uphold & Graham, 2003).

Adjunct measures to antibiotic treatment regimens have the lowest level of EBP to support usage and represent the largest gap in the research. No RCTs have examined treatment outcomes for increasing hydration, urination after intercourse, cotton underwear, condom use, douching, or delayed voiding (Hooten, 2000; UMHS, 1999). Maintaining an adequate fluid intake (average daily intake) is effective in preventing recurrent UTIs only (Gray & Krissovich, 2003). Particular controversy exists with Vaccinium macrocarpon (cranberry juice) for treatment or prevention of UTIs. Lower-level evidence suggests that cranberry juice may inhibit bacterial adherence to the bladder epithelium, thereby reducing the new incidence of UTIs (Gray, 2002; Griffiths, 2003; Lavender, 2000). However, there is insufficient evidence to recommend advising cranberry juice for treatment of UTIs (Griffiths, 2003; Jepson, Mihaljevic, & Craig 2003). While this information points to lacking evidence sufficient to support higher levels of evidence, the benefits and risks by the provider must be weighed. If the adjunct treatment measures are not harmful to the patient, do not pose an imposition or high cost, and could be beneficial, then they may be included in the education provided to the patient with a UTI. Adjunct interventions should continue to be offered to the patient, in addition to the antibiotic regimen, and may prove more pertinent in recurrent cases.

Conclusion

The provider must make the final decision and be able to rationalize and support his or her actions with research. Perhaps an explanation for the lack of EBP application is a lack of knowledge and application to the practice setting. The rate of nonadherence to recommended protocols is relatively high; for example, the recommended Bactrim DS 3-day regimen has a 91.33% nonadherence rate, thus suggesting a need for remediation and education (Kahan, Chinitz, & Kahan, 2004). To continue to validate and refine practice, documentation and participation in research is essential. Participation, whether in the form of direct research, or simply keeping abreast with new and developing EBP guidelines remains the responsibility of all health care providers.

Use of a SOAP (subjective, objective, assessment, plan) format for documentation aids in making an accurate diagnosis.

References

Butler, K.H., Reed, K.C., & Bosker, G. (2001). New diagnostic modalities, alterations in drug resistance patterns, and current antimicrobial treatment guidelines in the hospital and outpatient setting. Retrieved January 2, 2006, from http://www.ahcpub.com

Delzell, J.E., & Fitzsimmons, A. (2005). Urinary tract infection, female. Retrieved January 3, 2006, from http://www.abfp.com

Epocrates. (2004). Epocrates essentials & drug reference guide. [Computer database]. Retrieved November 10, 2005, from http:// www.epocrates.com

Family Health International. (2006). Network: oral contraceptives. Retrieved September 11, 2006, from http:// www.fhi.org/en/RH/Pubs/Net work.htm

Gray, M. (2002). Are cranberry juice or cranberry products effective in the prevention or management of urinary tract infection? Journal of Wound, Ostomy & Continence Nursing, 29, 122- 126.

Gray, M., & Krissovich, M. (2003). Does fluid intake influence the risk for urinary incontinence, urinary tract infection, and bladder cancer? Journal of Wound, Ostomy & Continence Nursing, 30, 126-131.

Griffiths, P. (2003). The role of cranberry juice in the treatment of urinary tract infections. British Journal of Community Nursing, 8(12), 557-561.

Guidelines Advisory Committee (GAC). (2003). Urinary tract infection in women: Treatment and follow-up. Retrieved October 24, 2005, from

Hooten, T.M. (2000). Pathogenesis of urinary tract infections: An update. Journal of Antimicrobial Chemotherapy, 46, 1-7.

Howes, D.S. (2005). Urinary tract infection, female. Retrieved October 1, 2005, from http://www.emedicine. com/emerg/topic626.htm

Jepson, R.G., & Mihaljevic, L., & Craig, J.C. (2003). Cranberries for treating urinary tract infections. The Cochrane Library, 1.

Kahan, N.R., Chinitz, D.P. & Kahan, E. (2004). Physician adherence to recommendations for duration of empiric treatment of uncomplicated urinary tract infection in women: A national drug utilization analysis. Pharmacoepidemi\ology and Drug Safety, 13, 239- 242.

Katchman, M.G., Christiaens, T., Baerheim, A., Soares-Weiser, K., & Leibovici, L. (2004). Duration of antibacterial treatment for uncomplicated urinary tract infection in women. The Cochrane Library, 1.

Klardie, K.A., Johnson, J., McNaughton, M.A. & Meyers, W. (2004). Integrating the principles of evidence- based practice into clinical practice. Journal of the American Academy of Nurse Practitioners, 16(3), 98-105.

Lavender, R. (2000). Cranberry juice: The facts. NT Plus, 96(40), 11-12.

National Guideline Clearinghouse (NGC). (2000). Urinary tract infection in women. Retrieved November 8, 2005, from http:// www.guideline.gov/sum mary.doc

Orenstein, R., & Wong, E.S. (1999). Urinary tract infections in adults. Retrieved January 10, 2005, from http:// www.aafp.org.afp.html

Tierney, L.M., Jr., McPhee, S.J., & Papadakis, M.A. (Eds.). (2004). Current medical diagnosis and treatment. New York: McGraw- Hill.

University of Michigan Health System (UMHS). (1999). Urinary Tract Infection Guideline Team. Retrieved September 24, 2005, from http://www.umhs.com

Uphold, C.R., & Graham, M.V. (2003). Clinical guidelines in family practice. Gainesville, FL: Barmarrae Books

Misti A. Jackson, MS, APRN, FNPBC, is an Advanced Practice Nurse, The Urology Center of Spartanburg, Spartanburg, SC.

Copyright Anthony J. Jannetti, Inc. Apr 2007

(c) 2007 Urologic Nursing. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Dietary and Holistic Treatment of Recurrent Calcium Oxalate Kidney Stones: Review of Literature to Guide Patient Education

By Flagg, Laura R

Urolithiasis is a condition that can cause significant morbidity among patients. Dietary manipulations traditionally advised include fluid, protein, oxalate, calcium, citrate, and sodium changes in the diet. Evidence-based practice guidelines suggest that there is not ample evidence to confidently recommend dietary changes, since inadequate studies have been done to quantify the risks of diet in stone formation. While fluid intake patterns have the weightiest evidence in the literature, not even fluid intake meets the guidelines for evidencebased practice. Health care providers should recognize that current patient education is largely based on intuition. It behooves us as clinicians to look critically at all our practices, review the available literature, and question what we believe we know. A summary of available literature is provided to guide the clinician in educating patients in reducing their risk of recurrent calcium oxalate stone disease.

Delivering care to patients with recurrent kidney stones presents unique challenges for nurses and health care providers. Patients who develop symptomatic urolithiasis may present with characteristic flank or groin pain, nausea and vomiting, dysuria, and hematuria, regardless of the presence of hydronephrosis or hydroureter. Those who have developed one stone are at approximately 50% risk for developing another within 5 to 7 years (Parmar, 2004). For patients who are unfortunate enough to have recurrent stones, quality of life may be affected significantly. Members of this population often become distressed in their search for relief of symptoms and will look to health care providers for assistance. This article is designed to guide health care providers in educating patients to reduce their risk of recurrent calcium oxalate stones.

Evidence-Based Practice

Nurses and other health care providers are increasingly turning to evidence-based practice (EBP) to critically evaluate the health information that may have been previously accepted as true. Our current practice may be based in fact, simple tradition, or intuition. EBP allows for critical evaluation of scientific studies. Available studies are critically appraised for validity, relevance, and applicability. This guides assimilation of the most accurate information, based on the best available evidence, and gives the clinician concrete evidence to guide practice, rather than relying on mere custom, intuition, or tradition.

Cochrane Database. Evidencebased practice relies heavily upon the randomized controlled trial (RCT) as the gold standard by which to judge information for validity, relevance, and applicability. Unfortunately, scant information collected regarding kidney stone formation and recurrence meets the RCT gold standard. The Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews is one database that compiles information based on the best available data. Only one study is currently published in the Cochrane Database for kidney stone risk reduction, but it does not rise to the level of best recommendation as defined by the Cochrane Database. This study, on fluid intake, is the only recommendation listed in the Cochrane Database for the treatment of kidney stones. This further highlights the scarcity of available strong evidence upon which we base our practices.

The National Guideline Clearinghouse. In addition to the Cochrane Database, The National Guideline Clearinghouse also compiles recommendations for practice. Until earlier this year, the National Guideline Clearinghouse published guidelines recommending increased fluid intake for patients with stones. This guideline, however, was rescinded since it had not been updated from 1997. Until rescinded, increased fluids for treatment of kidney stones was the only recommendation suggested by the National Guideline Clearinghouse (2006).

The dearth of information available for use in development of recommendations for kidney stone management has not gone unnoticed (Gambaro, Reis- Santos, & Rao, 2004; Straub & Hautmann, 2005). Gambaro et al. (2004) note a stagnancy of research on the risks of stone formation, in part due to the popularity of extracorporeal shock wave lithotripsy (ESWL), which has grabbed the attention of researchers since its introduction in the 1980s. ESWL is a highly popular treatment for urolithiasis. Pak (1999) has been critical of the change in emphasis away from metabolic factors causing stones, now that ESWL has become a relatively easy treatment recommendation.

While having EBP recommendations for dietary kidney stone management is still optimal, clinicians must continue to provide care with the best knowledge at hand. In the meantime, there are individual studies to guide us in tentative recommendations to patients. Most studies are not as rigorously controlled, and therefore difficult to interpret for validity. Patients should be advised of the knowledge we have, but cautioned that our understanding is incomplete at best.

Dietary Patterns

Dietary patterns have been identified as possibly increasing stone risk. These patterns include fluid intake, ingestion of many minerals, such as calcium, oxalate, ascorbic acid, sodium, and magnesium, as well as protein and specific types of fluids. A discussion of the measurable evidence in individual studies follows.

Fluid intake. Scientists have suggested for decades that increased fluid intake could reduce the rate of stone formation, though the recommendation was based solely in intuition and tradition. Pak, Sakhaee, Crowther, and Brinkley (1980) were perhaps the first to scientifically measure the effect of fluid intake on the risk of stone formation. Their results indicate that if urine volume could be increased to 2.5 liters per day, the risk of stone formation was reduced.

Curhan, Willett, Rimm, and Stampfer (1993) also found that among 45,000 men studied, increased fluid intake was inversely proportional to the risk of symptomatic stone formation. Men with the highest fluid intake, over 2,530 ml per day, had a 0.71 relative risk of symptomatic stone formation compared with men who drank the lowest volume of fluids, less than 1,275 ml per day. Similar results were found for women. Among more than 91,000 women aged 34 to 59 years who were studied over 12 years, the relative risk for women who drank more than 2,592 ml per day was 0.61 compared with women who drank less than 1,412 ml per day (Curhan, Willett, Speizer, Spiegelman, & Stampfer, 1997).

Qiang and Ke (2004) reviewed available studies in a meta- analysis regarding fluid intake as one method to reduce stone formation. While many individual studies proposed that a reduced risk of stone formation occurred with increased fluids, only one study of 199 patients by Borghi et al. (1996) met the standard RCT criteria for inclusion as strong evidence upon which to base practice. Qiang and Ke (2004) concluded, in their opinion for Cochrane Database for Systematic Reviews, that this one study alone did not provide enough evidence to recommend increased fluid intake to reduce the incidence of primary or recurrent kidney stones. These researchers strongly emphasized the need for more RCTs to improve the information upon which to base recommendations.

Calcium intake. Calcium is present in more stones than any other element, with calcium oxalate the most common compound (Hall, 2002; Holmes, Goodman, & Assimos, 2001; Moyad, 2003). Tradition once held that a reduced calcium diet would benefit those with a history of urolithiasis by reducing the rate of calcium absorption and filtration into the urine. A large prospective study of the risk of symptomatic stone formation in more than 45,000 men ages 40 to 75 years of age was conducted by Curhan et al. (1993). They administered dietary pattern questionnaires and then tracked the incidence of symptomatic stones over the following 4 years. Contrary to expectations, there was a relative risk of only 0.66 for stone formation among men with the highest dietary calcium intake (1,050 mg per day or more), compared with men with the lowest dietary calcium intake (605 mg or less per day). Curhan and associates (1997) followed up this large study of men’s dietary patterns with a similar study of women. In the Nurses’ Health Study I of over 90,000 female nurses, ages 34 to 59 years, calcium intake was assessed via questionnaires, and cases of symptomatic stones were tracked for 12 years. The relative risk for women with the highest dietary calcium intake (more than 1,098 mg per day) was 0.65, compared with women with the lowest dietary calcium intake of less than 488 mg per day (Curhan et al., 1997).

Borghi et al. (2002) noted twice the rate of stone formation among the 60 stone-forming men who followed a low-calcium diet compared with an equal number who followed a low-protein and low- sodium diet in this prospective randomized study. These studies have largely discredited the previous practice of reducing calcium intake among stone formers.

Calcium ingested in supplement form, however, may increase stone risk. Curhan et al. (1997) found that women may have a greater risk of stone formation (relative risk of 1.20) compared with those who do not use supplemental calcium. Of note, this risk was not found in men in two other studies. Curhan et al. (1993) studied men who took 500 mg calcium supplements daily andcompared them to those who did not take calcium supplements. No added risk was found among the 45,000 men studied. In another study by Stitchantrakul, Sopassathit, Prapaipanich, and Domrongkitchaiporn (2004), 32 young healthy males with low dietary oxalate intake were studied. Researchers gave calcium supplements (amount not specified) to the men, then measured the impact of calcium supplementation upon factors thought to increase stone risk. They found that calcium supplements increased urinary citrate, decreased urinary oxalate, and increased urinary calcium levels. Researchers believed that the increased risk of hypercalciuria was offset by the protective effects of relative hypooxaluria and hypercitraturia provided by the calcium supplementation.

Concerning the traditional recommendations for calcium restrictions, Heilberg (2000) and McCarron and Heaney (2004) also called for adequate dairy intake, citing the improvements in stone formation risk, as well as effects on blood pressure, bone strength, and management of obesity.

Oxalate intake. Many researchers have studied the role of dietary oxalate in the formation of calcium oxalate stones. No consensus, however, has emerged in dietary oxalate’s impact on stone formation. This is likely because of the complexities of digestion and metabolism of minerals associated with the formation of oxalate, and its excretion from the body.

Oxalate is present in urine in much smaller quantities than calcium. It is believed that for this reason, changes in oxalate levels in the urine have a much greater impact on stone formation than changes in calcium concentration – 23 times the impact for oxalate as for calcium (Morton, Iliescu, & Wilson, 2002).

Urinary excretion of oxalate in excess of 45 mg per day is regarded as hyperoxaluria. Hyperoxaluria may result from increased dietary intake, increased intestinal absorption of oxalate from the gut, or by increased endogenous production of oxalate by metabolic breakdown of ingested precursors (Siener, Ebert, Nicolay, & Hesse, 2003). Increased intestinal absorption can occur by mechanisms such as Crohn’s disease, short bowel syndrome, or by destruction of Oxalobacter formigenes, a naturally present bacterium which breaks down oxalate in the gut (Martini & Wood, 2000; Parmar, 2004). Martini and Wood (2000) concluded that hyperoxaluria, due to excessive dietary intake of oxalate, may be unusual despite oxalate’s presence in most foods. They contend that hyperoxaluria is a result of increased intestinal absorption in those who are prone to this abnormality, particularly malabsorption in the small bowel.

Siener et al. (2003) studied 186 stone formers, half with hyperoxaluria and half with normal urinary oxalate. The subjects provided 24-hour dietary diaries and underwent urine studies. There were no significant differences in dietary oxalate intake between the hyperoxaluric and normooxaluric subjects. The authors concluded that the higher rates of oxalate urinary excretion were associated with two phenomena: (a) hyperabsorption of oxalate from endogenous sources, rather than from dietary sources of oxalate; and (b) lower rates of calcium intake. This would lead to lower rates of complexing of calcium and oxalate in the gut, which would promote more oxalate filtration into the urine. Similar findings were reported by Chai, Liebman, Kynast-Gales, and Massey (2004). Likewise, Curhan et al. (1993) noted no added risk in ingestion of oxalate-rich foods on the formation of stones in their large epidemiologic study.

Contrary to these studies, Holmes et al. (2001) noted that little strong evidence was available to support the belief that stones are formed primarily by higher levels of absorption of oxalate rather than from dietary differences. In their study of 12 stone-forming persons, highly controlled diets were manipulated to provide variations in oxalate intake. They found that dietary oxalate contributed up to 50% of the variability in oxalate excretion. The highest urinary oxalate excretion was found when the calcium intake was most severely limited to 391 mg daily. The rate of actual stone formation among these persons was not investigated but rather the metabolic environment expected to facilitate stone formation.

Heilberg (2000) reviewed studies regarding calcium and oxalate intake in animals and humans. He found that oxalate stone formation was highly dependent on the balance of oxalate and calcium in the diet and blood. Exceedingly high oxalate intake could be completely offset by a concomitant increase in calcium intake. This researcher concluded, however, that not enough information was available to recommend restrictions in oxalate or calcium. He recommended further studies to determine if there was a benefit to altering the intake of oxalaterich foods, specifically rhubarb, spinach, chocolate, peanuts, pecans, almonds and instant tea.

Citrate intake. Citrates are compounds made from citric acid, or vitamin C, and are obtained exogenously through dietary ingestion of such foods as strawberries, lemons, oranges, cranberries, and grapefruits. Endogenous urinary citrate is derived via the breakdown of glucose through the Krebs cycle and excreted by renal tubular cells (Guyton & Hall, 2000; Parmar, 2004). Urinary citrate forms a soluble complex with calcium, and is believed to inhibit the formation of calcium stones (Seltzer, Low, McDonald, Shami, & Stoller, 1996). The normal range for citrate excretion is 300 to 700 mg per day. Excretion is reduced in periods of metabolic acidosis, such as with inflammatory bowel disease or renal tubular acidosis (Hall, 2002). Potassium citrate is often prescribed to increase urinary citrate for stone prevention.

Dietary Vitamin C in Beverages

Whether dietary alterations of citrate can affect the rate of stone formation is unclear, as various studies contradict each other, and may vary by source of vitamin C. While most vitamin C is excreted as citrate, it can also be metabolized and excreted as oxalate (Mayne Pharma Ltd., 2004).

Grapefruit juice. Curhan, Willett, Speizer, and Stampfer (1998) found that grapefruit juice was directly associated with kidney stone formation in women, echoing similar findings in men (Curhan, Willett, Rimm, Spiegelman, & Stampfer, 1996). Grapefruit juice is a well-known inhibitor of the metabolism of numerous drugs via cytochrome P450 and its use is discouraged with many medications. However, it is not known if grapefruit’s effect on stone formation may be due to some unknown metabolic alteration of metabolic processes with food breakdown similar to those associated with drug metabolism.

Orange juice. Orange juice ingestion is associated with no change in risk relative to water in the Nurses’ Health Study (Curhan et al., 1998). However, other studies have shown orange juice to reduce stone risk. Wabner and Pak (1993) found that orange juice was equally as effective in reducing the lithogenic qualities of urine as was potassium citrate supplementation among 11 men in a prospective crossover study. Coe, Parks, and Webb (1992) found a favorable change in urinary citrate among six female participants who consumed calcium-fortified orange juice in an 11-week, crossover study. No change was appreciated in the six male participants. It is not known what part the calcium fortification may have played in the reduction of risk in this small study.

Lemonade. As another source of citrate, lemonade is often recommended to patients with stones. Seltzer et al. (1996) found that the intake of lemonade in 12 calcium stone formers could aid in reducing risk factors for stone formation. In this study, lemonade increased urinary citrate in 11 of 12 subjects with hypocitraturia (daily urinary citrate less than 320 mg) by a mean value of 204 mg per day. Lemonade was well tolerated and was believed to provide an inexpensive alternative to potassium citrate supplementation. The study did not seek, though, to determine the actual rates of stone formation. The Nurses’ Health Study of 81,000 women showed no significant relationship between lemonade intake and stone risk, although lemonade and fruit punch use were studied together as one category (Curhan et al., 1998).

Cranberry juice. McHarg, Rodgers, and Charlton (2003) studied the effects of cranberry juice on the urinary qualities expected to impact the risk of stone formation. In a randomized crossover study, 20 South African men were given two different diets with and without cranberry juice, and urinary measurements were analyzed. Use of cranberry juice, which was high in both vitamin C and oxalate, resulted in improvements in urinary properties expected to reduce the risk of calcium oxalate stone formation, specifically increased urinary citrate, and reduced urinary oxalate and phosphate. Urinary calcium oxalate also decreased more with cranberry juice than without. McHarg et al. (2003) reported that while high in oxalate, cranberries’ oxalate is not largely bioavailable, and thus, not readily absorbed. This may explain the reduction in urinary oxalate despite higher oxalate content.

Siener et al. (2003) studied dietary patterns in 186 stoneforming individuals with hyperoxaluria vs. normooxaluria. The sample was equally divided with 93 subjects with hyperoxaluria and 93 subjects with normooxaluria. Dietary contents were measured scientifically and recorded. Among those stone formers with hyperoxaluria, they noted higher dietary intake of ascorbic acid through fruits and vegetables. Larger ascorbic acid intake was believed to result in conversion to oxalate and hyperabsorption from the gut, when in the presence of reduced calcium intake. Researchers thought this was at least partly responsible for the presence of hyperoxaluria in this group of 93 stone formers.

Taylor, Stampfer, and Curhan (2004) found a greater incidence of stones among men with larger total vitamin C intake, regardless of ori\gin. Among the 45,600 men studied over 14 years, men with the largest total vitamin C intake (over 1,000 mg daily) had a 41% greater risk of stone relative to those with the smallest intake of total vitamin C (less than 90 mg daily).

Supplemental vitamin C. Supplemental sources of vitamin C have been implicated in stone risk. Terris, Issa, and Tacker (2001) studied cranberry concentrate supplement use in a very small study of healthy adults. Five men and women provided urine studies before and after use of cranberry supplements for 7 days. Urinary oxalate levels increased in all subjects by an average of 43% after concentrate use. Other factors such as increases in urinary magnesium and potassium were noted which may reduce the risk of stone formation, mitigating the added risk of increased urinary oxalate.

Massey, Liebman, and Kynast- Gales (2005) found that ascorbic acid in supplement form caused increases in urinary oxalate among stone formers and nonstone formers alike, in their randomized crossover controlled study of 48 adults. Forty percent of the subjects had increases in urinary oxalate when given 1,000 mg ascorbic acid twice daily, compared to those without the supplementation. Oxalate stoneforming men and women had higher rates of oxalate absorption and endogenous oxalate synthesis than did non- stone formers when subjected to the same diet. In addition, these stone formers increased their own urinary oxalate levels when given ascorbic acid supplements, implying that vitamin C supplementation may be risky among known stone formers.

Opposing evidence has been presented. Taylor et al. (2004) noted no significant increased risk of stone formation with vitamin C supplementation in their study of men with kidney stones.

Sodium intake. The reabsorption of sodium and water in the kidney’s proximal tubule provides a mechanism for passive reabsorption of calcium to the blood from the kidney’s filtrate. Overingestion of sodium provides for less calcium reabsorption to the blood via passive reabsorption, leading to calcium excretion in larger quantities via the urine. A low-sodium diet is expected to conversely increase the reabsorption of sodium and calcium from the proximal tubule into the blood so that less remains in the urine, reducing stone risk. The recommendation for reduced dietary sodium is based on this understanding of the balance of sodium and calcium in the blood and urine. Kok, Iestra, Doorenbos, and Papapoulos (1990) found that a high sodium diet induced increases in urinary calcium and reductions in urinary citrate, which are commonly recognized as risks for stone formation. This effect was more dramatic when diets were high in sodium and protein at the same time.

The role of sodium in actual stone formation, however, is less clear. Borghi et al. (2002) found reduced recurrence of stones in 120 men with a history of hypercalciuric stone formation if they maintained a low-protein, lowsodium diet, compared with a low- calcium diet. Curhan et al. (1993), however, found no relationship between sodium intake and stone formation in their study of 45,000 men. It would appear that recommendations for low-sodium diets are based mostly on the physiologic processes, yet is not yet solidly borne out by epidemiologic evidence.

Magnesium intake. Magnesium is thought to reduce stone risk by complexing with oxalate in the gut thereby reducing oxalate excretion into the urine. Sources of dietary magnesium include dairy products, meat, seafood, apples, apricots, avocados, bananas, whole grain cereals, nuts, dark green vegetables, and cocoa. Hirvonen, Pietinen, Virtanen, Albanes, and Virtamo (1999) studied 27,000 Finnish smoking men in a prospective epidemiologic study of the risks of stones. This was part of a larger study that looked at smoking men’s risk of lung cancer if they supplemented their diets with alpha-tocopherol and beta-carotene. After 5 years of followup, 329 men developed kidney stones. They found that magnesium intake had a protective effect on stone formation. Those men with the highest magnesium intake (563 mg or more) had a relative risk of 0.52 for stone formation, compared to those with the lowest magnesium intake (382 mg or less). It is not known whether these results might be reproducible in other cultural groups, or what effect smoking may have had, if any, on these results.

Taylor et al. (2004) also found a reduced risk for stone formation among men aged 40 to 75 with increased dietary magnesium intake. Men with the highest dietary magnesium intake (over 450 mg/ day) had a relative risk of stone formation of 0.71, compared with men who consumed the lowest amount of magnesium (less than 314 mg/ day). In a study of the physiology of magnesium intake’s effect on oxalate, Liebman and Costa (2000) found that a diet high in magnesium oxide reduced oxalate absorption and oxalate excretion, compared to a diet with low magnesium oxide among 24 healthy men and women. This may at least partially explain the phenomenon of variable stone risk.

Protein intake. High-protein intake has long been proposed as a stone-forming dietary pattern. Those eating a high-protein, lowcarbohydrate diet, so popular in recent years, may be at greater risk of stone formation than those with a more balanced nutritional intake.

Kok et al. (1990) studied eight healthy Dutch men who were given sodium and protein dietary modifications for 1 week followed by urine measurements of select elements. Results showed a diet high in protein (more than 2 g per kg body weight per day) produced increases in urinary calcium and uric acid, and decreases in urinary citrate, especially when the high-protein diet was accompanied by a high-sodium intake. The urine showed a significant decrease in the ability to inhibit the formation of calcium oxalate stones. The relative inability was dependent proportional to the degree of decrease in urinary citrate.

Curhan et al. (1993) studied the rate of stone formation in men relative to animal protein intake. They found that animal protein intake was directly associated with stone formation, with the highest protein intake (77 grams daily or more) showing a relative risk of 1.33 compared with the lowest protein intake (50 grams daily or less).

Giannini et al. (1999) took the protein intake question further by studying the effect of protein restriction on a small group of stone-forming adults. Researchers studied 18 men and women, all with histories of calcium stones and hypercalciuria. These 18 subjects restricted their protein intake to 0.8 g per kg of body weight per day for 15 days, after which serum levels and urinary excretion of significant elements were measured. Researchers noted a significant reduction in urinary uric acid, calcium, and oxalate after protein restriction, and increases in urinary citrate. Giannini et al. (1999, p. 270) noted “a reduction of the entire lithogenic potential of these patients” after the short 30 day trial. No measurements were made of the residual effects of a reduced-protein diet, nor of the effects of the reduction if it were undertaken for a longer period.

Hiatt et al. (1996) conducted a randomized controlled trial of 99 persons with histories of one former stone to determine if a low- protein diet might further reduce the risk of stone recurrence. Though not highly controlled over 4.5 years, their lowprotein intake intervention group showed a significant increase in rates of recurrent stone formation compared to those who were instructed to only increase fluids (7.1 stones in 100-person years vs. 1.2 stones in 100-person years, respectively). Martini and Wood (2000) performed a metaanalysis of studies related to calcium and protein restrictions. They cautioned against stoneforming individuals undertaking low-protein diets, citing risk of elevation of parathyroid hormone, inducing bone loss. Martini and Wood (2000, p. 116) concluded that diets “restricting dietary protein to below RDA levels of 0.8 grams per kilogram per day are dangerous and should be avoided.” As expected, these authors called for further studies to further delineate the connection, if any, between protein intake and stone formation.

Other Beverages

Coffee. Because of its oxalate content, coffee has been discussed as a potential stone-forming beverage. As a diuretic, coffee’s increased risk may be mitigated because of caffeine’s effect in urine dilution. Indeed, Curhan et al. (1998) found coffee was associated with a reduced risk of stones in women, whether caffeinated or decaffeinated. Caffeinated coffee had a 10% cumulative risk reduction for each 240 ml ingested, and decaffeinated coffee a 9% cumulative reduction in risk for each cup ingested per day. Tea was credited with an 8% cumulative reduction in stone risk per 240 ml ingested.

Wine and beer. The most dramatic reduction in risk, however, was seen with wine consumption (Curhan et al., 1998). For each 240 ml intake of wine per day, there was a 59% reduction in stone risk among women. Beer intake showed a 12% decrease in risk per 240 ml ingested. For no yet discernible reason, liquor’s effects showed no change in risk.

Similar results on the risk of stones with beer intake were reported by Hirvonen et al. (1999). The risk of stones was reduced by 40% for each bottle (quantity not given) of beer ingested daily among smoking Finnish men. Other “spirits” (not specified as to type) had no significant effect on stone formation rates in this study.

Tea. While Curhan et al. (1998) found reduced stone formation among tea drinkers, some practitioners continue to suggest that teas, because of their high oxalate contents, be removed or limited in the diet of stone formers. In a separate study of various types of teas, black and herbal teas were studied to determine oxalate levels with brewing. Many herbal teas were found to have less oxalate than black tea, and were recommended by the researchers as possibl\y helpful to patients with recurrent stone risks (McKay, Seviour, Comerford, Vasdev, & Massey, 1995).

Cola. Limited research has been conducted concerning the risk of stones with cola intake. A small study of four men, one with a history of stones, underwent dietary manipulation to determine the risk of stone formation with cola ingestion (Weiss, Sluss, & Linke, 1992). Only three of the subjects were able to ingest a full 3 quarts of cola per day to complete the study. All subjects showed decreases in urinary citrate and magnesium, and increased urinary oxalate, which are believed to increase the risk of stone formation

Holistic Treatments

Holistic treatments embrace dietary and natural therapies to manage health. Phytotherapy, or herbal therapy, is central to holistic treatment. Phytotherapy is discussed below with regards to kidney stone disease management along with available scientific information to support it.

Phytotherapy. Phytotherapy is included in many holistic recommendations for treatment of kidney stones, as well as numerous other human conditions. The European Scientific Cooperative on Phytotherapy (ESCOP), established in 1989, defines phytomedicines as “medicinal products containing as active ingredients only in plants, parts of plants or plant materials, or combinations thereof, whether in the crude or processed state…plant materials include juices, gums, fixed oils, essential oils, and any other directly derived crude plant product. They do not include chemically defined isolated constituents, either alone or in combination with plant materials” (European Society Cooperative on Phytotherapy, n.d.). ESCOP supports clinical studies on the safety and efficacy of phytotherapeutic agents through financial support of the European Union. At this time, holistic and phytotherapeutic management is based in the tradition of centuries, and seeks to validate its practices with quantifiable research, but much work remains to be done.

One phytotherapeutic agent, Phyllanthus niruri, has been studied in humans to begin to evaluate its effectiveness in prevention of stones. Phyllanthis niruri is an herb used in Brazilian folk medicine, with reported benefits to stone disease. Nishiura, Campos, Boim, Heilberg, and Schor (2004) studied the effects of this herb on the chemical promoters and inhibitors of stone formation in known stone-forming patients. Sixty-nine previous stone formers were randomized to take either 1,350 mg of aqueous extract of P. niruri divided in three doses or placebo for 3 months. Researchers found that among all subjects, there was no significant difference in urinary levels of measured metabolites calcium, uric acid, citrate, oxalate, and magnesium. However, when evaluating the results of those with hypercalciuria only, those who took P. niruri had a significant reduction in urinary calcium.

Micali et al. (2006) studied the effect of P. niruri on 150 people who had extracorporeal shock wave lithotripsy (ESWL). Seventy- eight patients received P. niruri for 3 months or more after ESWL, while 72 received none. Those with lower pole stones who took P. niruri had fewer stone recurrences over 6 months than those who did not use the herb. Stones in mid or upperpole positions did not show significant recurrence rate changes compared with the control group.

In efforts to discover other examples of study of phytotherapy, a subject search on the search engine Alternative HealthWatch was performed in January 2006 with the words “kidney stone.” Only peer- reviewed journals were used. The search retrieved 55 articles, none of which was a scientific study of phytotherapy’s use in managing urolithiasis. A search in January 2006 of the last 6 years in the holistic journal Phytotherapy Research with the term “kidney stones” produced no experimental studies of herbal supplement on humans. Likewise, a title search in the holistic journal Phytomedicine in December 2006 found no human studies on kidney stone treatment with herbals over the last 6 years. Nor were any found in the journal Alternative Medicine Review for the last 7 years. Application of the principles of EBP indicates that there is currently no satisfactory body of evidence to satisfy EBP’s guidelines regarding phytotherapy for kidney stones. While the above studies on P. niruri are exciting to see, they are quite preliminary at best. This author agrees with ESCOP that much work needs to be done with phytotherapeutic agents. Phytotherapy may prove beneficial if studies such as those discussed here continue to show possible benefits. For now, no such strong evidence exists.

Obesity and Weight Gain

Three large prospective epidemiologic studies looked at the link between body weight and the risk of stones. The Health Professionals Follow-up Study of 46,000 male physicians over 14 years, the Nurses’ Health Study I of 93,000 older women, and Nurses’ Health Study II of 101,000 younger women asked about weight and incidence of symptomatic kidney stones that followed over the course of years. Among the men in the Health Professionals Follow-up Study (who were aged 40-75 years) weighing over 220 lbs, the relative risk of stones was 1.44, compared to men who weighed less than 150 lbs. If the men gained more than 35 lbs since early adulthood, they had a relative risk of stones of 1.35 compared to men whose weight remained unchanged. Among men, a BMI of 30 or more translated to a risk of 1.33 vs. that of men with BMI of 21 to 22.9. Waist circumferences also showed significance. Men with waist measurements of more than 43 inches had 1.48 times the risk of stones than men with waist circumferences of less than 34 inches (Taylor, Stampfer, & Curhan, 2005).

Among the older women of the Nurses’ Health Study I, aged 30 to 55, those weighing 220 lbs or more had a relative risk of stones of 1.89 compared with women weighing less than 150 lbs. Older women who gained more than 35 lbs since early adulthood had a relative risk for stone formation of 1.70 compared to those who did not gain weight. Among the older women, a BMI of 30 or more had a risk of stones of 1.9 of that of women with BMI of 21 to 22.9 (Taylor et al., 2005).

Similar trends were noted among the younger women of the Nurses’ Health Study II, who were aged 25 to 42. Younger women weighing over 220 lbs had a risk of stones of 1.82 times the risk of women weighing less than 150 lbs. Those who gained 35 lbs or more risked stones 1.82 times that of women whose weight did not change over the course of their adult lives. Those with BMIs of 30 or more had 2.09 times the risk of stones than women with BMIs of 21 to 22.9. Finally, women with waist circumferences of more than 40 inches had 1.94 times the risk of stones than women with waist measurements of less than 31 inches. Among the three groups, the younger women had the greatest risk with greater degrees of obesity (Taylor et al., 2005).

The Internet as a Source of Information

In December 2006, a search of kidney stone treatments on the World Wide Web via the Google search engine revealed a number of sites which offered to sell products to dissolve calcium oxalate stones. Among them were the following two sites: http://webagt.com/ a/kidneystoneslink. htm; http://cgi.ebay. com/ws/ eBayISAPI.dll?ViewIte m&item=9519705774&refid=store. Other sites recommend herbal or phytotherapeutic solutions such as dandelion leaf as an alternative diuretic to hydrochlorothiazide (All Natural Net, n.d.). Gravel Root, Jo Pye Weed, and Queen of the Meadow are alternate names for an herb suggested for stones prevention as a pH altering substance, and for treating cystitis and dysuria (Purple Sage Botanicals, 2006). Such treatments are attractive to patients because usage does not require consultation from a physician or nurse, giving patients a sense of control over their own treatment decisions. Just as dietary changes can be made without prescription, a prescription is not required to obtain these herbal products.

Many commercial treatments offered online are difficult to evaluate, much less endorse. The lack of specific information about some of these products makes it difficult to discuss with patients who want input on their track records of success. In addition, many herbal remedies lack the standardization of content required of pharmaceutical agents regulated by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration. It is impossible to evaluate a therapy that does not give full disclosure of its contents. Clinicians must educate patients about purchasing treatments, sometimes at great expense, that are uninvestigated as agents for treatment of kidney stones. While some may be effective, they are clinically unproven.

Implications for Practice

How do health care providers assimilate results from these multiple studies and apply them to our patients and practice? None of the information presented for dietary changes meets the strict criteria of EBP. However, there are varying levels of evidence which might guide clinicians in their recommendations to patients (see Table 1). There is good evidence to suggest that increasing fluids reduces the rate of stone formation. An easy guide is to suggest that urine should appear very light yellow to clear at all times. This technique makes it easy to quickly adjust oral intake, based on the appearance of urine, assuming the patient is not using drugs that change the color of urine, such as multivitamins with carotene, or pyridium. This recommendation is generally safe assuming the patient does not have kidney or heart failure precluding higher fluid intake.

There is also good, but not overwhelming evidence, that calcium intake should not be limited for the sake of stone risk. Dietary calcium may be safer than supplemental calcium. Those who use calcium supplements should consider administration with meals only, until more is learned about the risks of supplemental calcium for those with a history of stones.

Ther\e is some early evidence that high animal protein diets increase the risk of stones. Patients have one more reason to reconsider a decision to use a low-carbohydrate, high-protein diet for weight loss, because of the risk of kidney stones. Conflicting information exists on the benefit or harm of a reduced protein diet.

There is insufficient evidence to recommend a limited oxalate diet. Human oxalate levels may vary widely based on endogenous factors, and not dietary intake of oxalate, making dietary alterations impractical for the typical person. Patients with Crohn’s disease or gastric bypass may benefit from reduction of dietary oxalate, but studies do not yet show this as beneficial.

There is some weak evidence that low-sodium diets may benefit stone formers. The science behind this recommendation, however, is very incomplete and needs further study.

The information on vitamin C intake is contradictory. Supplemental vitamin C use should be undertaken cautiously among stone formers. Lemonade may be a good fluid choice among patients known to have low levels of urinary citrate, rather than grapefruit juice. Future studies should attempt to evaluate the breakdown of ascorbate to oxalate vs. citrate, as the association each has to stone formation is significant.

There is very little information upon which to base recommendations on the use of cola or other soft drinks. Given the empty caloric value of sugared soft drinks, their use in large quantities should continue to be discouraged. With their ubiquitous presence in our culture, however, they certainly deserve further study.

Patients with calcium stones can continue to use teas and coffees without particular concern, though the evidence is not clear that they are actually beneficial. Equally unclear are the possible benefits of alcoholic beverages, though wine and beer may carry some weight as stone inhibitors.

Maintenance of proper body weight may have benefits to reducing stone formation, though information is very limited. There are certainly enough reasons to maintain normal body weight, and risking stones may be another reason to avoid obesity.

Patients may find the use of herbal therapies appealing, particularly when traditional Western treatment fails. Clinicians need to inquire about herbal treatments used by patients in their assessments, especially when their stones recur. It is important for the clinician to communicate, through nonjudgmental language, that there is insufficient evidence to support the use of phytotherapeutic agents for kidney stones at this time as the field remains untested.

Future Implications

There is ongoing need for urologic nurses and health care providers to research and investigate treatment modalities for kidney stones. As we embrace EBP to guide recommendations, this review of available literature on dietary management of calcium oxalate kidney stones show little is known with any degree of certainty. It behooves us as clinicians to look critically at all our practices, review the available literature, and question what we believe we know.

Kidney stones constitute a problematic health condition for many of our patients. Our profession requires us to update our knowledge as new information is revealed. Urologic nurses and associates can not only benefit from understanding the literature, but also from taking part in studies that seek to evaluate the patient’s risk for kidney stones. In this way, we can develop powerful experience in urologic research. Mainstream Western medicine and alternative treatments should be considered as subjects for future study as well as seeking to incorporate the growing field of phytotherapy into our knowledge base.

References

All Natural Net. (n.d.). Dandelion Taraxacum officinale. Encyclopedia of herbs. Retrieved December 4, 2006, from http:// www.allnatural.net/herbpages/ dandelion.shtml

Borghi, L., Meschi, T., Amato, F., Briganti, A., Novarini, A., & Giannini, A. (1996). Urinary volume, water and recurrences in idiopathic calcium nephrolithiasis: A 5-year randomized prospective study. Journal of Urology, 155, 839-843.

Borghi, L., Schianchi, T., Meschi, T., Guerra, A., Allegri, F., Maggiore, U., et al. (2002). Comparison of two diets for the prevention of recurrent stones in idiopathic hypercalciuria. New England Journal of Medicine, 346, 77-83.

Chai, W., Liebman, M., Kynast-Gales, S., & Massey, L. (2004). Oxalate absorption and endogenous oxalate synthesis from ascorbate in calcium oxalate stone formers and non-stone formers (abstract). American Journal of Kidney Diseases: The official journal of the National Kidney Foundation, 44, 1060-1069.

Coe, F.L., Parks, J.H., & Webb, D.R. (1992). Stone-forming potential of milk or calcium-fortified orange juice in idiopathic hypercalciuric adults (abstract). Kidney International, 41, 139- 142.

Curhan, G.C., Willett, W.C., Rimm, E.B., & Stampfer, M.J. (1993). A prospective study of dietary calcium and other nutrients and the risk of symptomatic kidney stones. New England Journal of Medicine, 328, 833-838.

Curhan, G.C., Willett, W.C., Rimm, E. B., Spiegelman, D., & Stampfer, M.J. (1996). Prospective study of beverage use and the risk of kidney stones. American Journal of Epidemiology, 143, 240- 247.

Curhan, G.C., Willett, W.C., Speizer, F.E., Spiegelman, D., & Stampfer, M.J. (1997). Comparison of dietary calcium with supplemental calcium and other nutrients as factors affecting the risk for kidney stones in women. Annals of Internal Medicine, 126, 497-504.

Curhan, G.C., Willett, W.C., Speizer, F.E., & Stampfer, M.J. (1998). Beverage use and risk for kidney stones in women. Annals of Internal Medicine, 128, 534-540.

European Society Cooperative on Phytotherapy. (n.d.). What is ESCOP? Retrieved December 22, 2006, from http://www.escop.com

Gambaro, G., Reis-Santos, J.M., & Rao, N. (2004). Nephrolithiasis: Why doesn’t our “learning” progress? European Urology, 45, 547-556.

Giannini, S., Nobile, M., Sartori, L., Carbonare, L.D., Ciuffreda, M., & Corro, P., et al. (1999). Acute effects of moderate protein restriction in patients with idiopathic hypercalciuria and calcium nephrolithiasis. American Journal of Clinical Nutrition, 69, 267-271.

Guyton, A.C., & Hall, J.E. (2000). Textbook of medical physiology (10th ed.). Philadelphia: Saunders.

Hall, P.M. (2002). Preventing kidney stones: Calcium restriction not warranted. Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine, 69, 885-888.

Heilberg, I.P. (2000). Update on dietary recommendation and medical treatment of renal stone disease. Nephrology, Dialysis, Transplantation, 15, 117-123.

Hiatt, R.A., Ettinger, B., Caan, B., Quesenberry, C.P., Duncan, D., & Citron, J.T. (1996). Randomized controlled trial of a low animal protein, high fiber diet in the prevention of recurrent calcium oxalate kidney stones. American Journal of Epidemiology, 144, 25-33.

Hirvonen, T., Pietinen, P., Virtanen, M., Albanes, D., & Virtamo, J. (1999). Nutrient intake and use of beverages and the risk of kidney stones among male smokers. American Journal of Epidemiology, 150, 187-194.

Holmes, R.P., Goodman, H.O., & Assimos, D.G. (2001). Contribution of dietary oxalate to urinary oxalate excretion. Kidney International, 59, 270-276.

Kok, D.J., Iestra, J.A., Doorenbos, C.J., & Papapoulos, S.E. (1990). The effects of dietary excesses in animal protein and in sodium on the composition and the crystallization kinetics of calcium oxalate monohydrate in urines of healthy men (abstract). Journal of Clinical Endocrinology and Metabolism, 71, 861-867.

Liebman, M., & Costa, G. (2000). Effects of calcium and magnesium on urinary oxalate excretion after oxalate loads (abstract). Journal of Urology, 163, 1565-1569.

Martini, L.A., & Wood, R.J. (2000). Should dietary calcium and protein be restricted in patients with nephrolithiasis? Nutrition Reviews, 58, 111-117.

Massey, L.K., Liebman, M., & Kynast- Gales, S.A. (2005). Ascorbate increases human oxaluria and kidney stone risk. The Journal of Nutrition, 135, 1673-1677.

Mayne Pharma Ltd. (2004). Information for health professionals data sheet: Ascorbic acid injection. Retrieved January 21, 2006, from http://www.medsafe.govt.nz/profs/D atasheet/a/ Ascorbicacidinj.htm

McCarron, D.A., & Heaney, R.P. (2004) Estimated healthcare savings associated with adequate dairy food intake. American Journal of Hypertension, 17, 88-97.

McHarg, T., Rodgers, A., & Charlton, K. (2003) Influence of cranberry juice on the urinary risk factors for calcium oxalate kidney stone formation. BJU International, 92, 765-768.

McKay, D.W., Seviour, J.P., Comerford, A., Vasdev, S., & Massey, L.K. (1995). Herbal tea: An alternative to regular tea for those who form calcium oxalate stones (abstract). Journal of the American Dietetic Association, 95, 360-361.

Micali, S., Sighinolfi, M.C., Celia, A., DeStefani, S., Grande, M., Cicero, A.F. et al. (2006). Can Phyllanthus niruri affect the efficacy of extracorporeal shock wave lithotripsy for renal stones? A randomized, prospective, long-term study. The Journal of Urology, 176, 1020-1022.

Morton, A.R., Iliescu, E.A., & Wilson, J.W.L. (2002). Nephrology 1: Investigation and treatment of recurrent kidney stones. Canadian Medical Association Journal, 166, 213-218.

Moyad, M. (2003). Calcium oxalate kidney stones: Another reason to encourage moderate calcium intakes and other dietary changes. Urologic Nursing, 23, 310-313.

National Guideline Clearinghouse. (2006). Nephrolithiasis. Retrieved on December 4, 2006 from http:// www.guideline.gov/ summary/summary. aspx?doc_id=7463&nbr=004409 &string=kidney+AND+stones

Nishiura, J.L., Campos, A.H., Boim, M.A., Heilberg, I.P., & Schor, N. (2004). Phyllanthus niruri normalizes elevated urinary calcium levels in calcium stone forming (CSF) patients. Urology Research, 32, 362-366.

Pak, C.Y.C. (1999). Medical prevention of renal stone disease. Nephron, 81(Suppl. 1), 60-65.

Pak, C.Y.C., Sakhaee, K., Crowther, C., & Brinkley, L. (1980). E\vidence justifying a high fluid intake in treatment of nephrolithiasis. Annals of Internal Medicine, 93, 36-39.

Parmar, M.S. (2004). Kidney stones. British Medical Journal, 328, 1420-1424.

Purple Sage Botanicals. (2006). Gravel root. Retrieved December 4, 2006, from http://www.purplesage.org.uk/ profiles/gravelroot.htm

Qiang, W., & Ke, Z. (2004). Water for preventing urinary calculi. The Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews 3(CD004292.pub2). Retrieved November 23, 2005, from http://www.cochrane.org/cochrane/ r evabstr/AB004292.htm

Seltzer, M.A., Low, R.K., McDonald, M., Shami, G.S., & Stoller, M.L. (1996). Dietary manipulation with lemonade to treat hypocitraturic calcium nephrolithiasis. Journal of Urology, 156, 907- 909.

Siener, R., Ebert, D., Nicolay, C., & Hesse, A. (2003). Dietary risk factors for hyperoxaluria in calcium oxalate stone formers. Kidney International, 63, 1037-1043.

Stitchantrakul, W., Sopassathit, W., Prapaipanich, S., & Domrongkitchaiporn, S. (2004). Effects of calcium supplements on the risk of renal stone formation in a population with low oxalate intake (abstract). The Southeast Asian Journal of Tropical Medicine and Public Health, 35, 1028-1033.

Straub, M., & Hautmann, R.E. (2005). Developments in stone prevention (abstract). Current Opinion in Urology, 15, 119-126.

Taylor, E.N., Stampfer, M.J., & Curhan, G.C. (2004). Dietary factors and the risk of incident kidney stones in men: New insights after 14 years of follow-up. Journal of the American Society of Nephrology, 15, 3225- 3232.

Taylor, E.N., Stampfer, M.J., & Curhan, G.C. (2005). Obesity, weight gain, and the risk of kidney stones. JAMA, 293, 455-462.

Terris, M.K., Issa, M.M., & Tacker, J.R. (2001). Dietary supplementation with cranberry concentrate tablets may increase the risk of nephrolithiasis. Urology, 57, 26-29.

Wabner, C.L., & Pak, C.Y. (1993) Effect of orange juice consumption on urinary stone risk factors (abstract). The Journal of Urology, 149, 1405-1408.

Weiss, G.H., Sluss, P.M., & Linke, C.A. (1992). Changes in urinary magnesium, citrate, and oxalate levels due to cola consumption. Urology, 32, 331-333.

Laura R. Flagg, MSN, RN, CNP, is a Clinical Nurse, The University Hospital, and a Graduate Student, the University of Cincinnati, Cincinnati, OH.

Note: Objectives and CNE Evaluation Form appear on page 123.

Note: The author reported no actual or potential conflict of interest in relation to this continuing nursing education article.

Copyright Anthony J. Jannetti, Inc. Apr 2007

(c) 2007 Urologic Nursing. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

CLSI Publishes New Guideline for Analysis of Body Fluids

Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI, formerly NCCLS) has recently published an approved-level document, Analysis of Body Fluids in Clinical Chemistry; Approved Guideline (C49-A). This document provides guidance for clinical diagnostic laboratories to apply widely available measurement procedures to body fluids, as well as for reporting and interpreting those results. Emphasis is placed on:

the common clinical situations for this use;

acceptable practice for measuring analytes without extended method verification for abnormal body fluids;

influence of biologic and analytic variation on interpretation of results;

variability in comparing results between different instrument manufacturers; and

recommended reporting format.

This document does not consider serum, plasma, whole blood, or fluids for which assays typically have performance claims in the measurement procedure documentation.

The new guideline was developed by CLSI as part of a partnership effort with the International Federation of Clinical Chemistry and Laboratory Medicine (IFCC).

For additional information on CLSI or for further information regarding this release, visit our website at http://www.clsi.org or call +610.688.0100.

CLSI is a global, nonprofit, membership-based organization dedicated to developing standards and guidelines for the healthcare and medical testing community. CLSI’s unique consensus process facilitates the creation of standards and guidelines that are reliable, practical, and achievable for an effective quality system.

Introducing The DRAMBUIE Fizz

NEW YORK, May 15 /PRNewswire/ — DRAMBUIE(R) announces an exciting new cocktail to herald the summer season – the Drambuie Fizz cocktail. Like the signature Drambuie & Soda cocktail, which has enjoyed widespread popularity in the last year, the Drambuie Fizz is set to help a new generation of adult drinkers rediscover the unique taste of Drambuie.

(Photo: http://www.newscom.com/cgi-bin/prnh/20070515/NYTU003)

Served over crushed ice in a rocks glass, the Drambuie Fizz couples this Scottish spirit’s unique blend of Scotch whiskey and spiced honey, with the fragrant notes of freshly muddled limes. The result is a cocktail that is bold, exotic and deceptively easy to make.

The combination of limes with the spiced Scotch whiskey liqueur in this evocative cocktail makes for an exciting alternative to popular cocktails like the caipirinha or the mojito and creates a rugged, classic drink that enhances the distinctive flavor of Drambuie.

   Recipe   Muddle 6 to 8 lime wedges in a rocks glass, then fill with crushed ice.   Add 1.5 parts of Drambuie and top up with a splash of club soda.    About DRAMBUIE  

DRAMBUIE was created more than 260 years ago exclusively for Prince Charles Edward Stuart of Scotland. It is a unique combination of aged Scotch whiskies, heather honey and a blend of herbs and spices; a recipe kept secret since 1745. From the Gaelic “an dram buidheach” – the drink that satisfies – DRAMBUIE is enjoyed by those who appreciate its timeless, yet distinctive taste. DRAMBUIE can be served in a variety of classic cocktails; on the rocks; or as a tall DRAMBUIE and Club Soda with lime.

Note: High resolution art-work is available

ENJOY OUR GOOD TASTE WITH YOUR GOOD JUDGEMENT(R)

Drambuie is a registered trademark of the Drambuie Liqueur Company Limited, Edinburgh, Scotland 2007. Imported by Bacardi U.S.A, Miami, FL, Liqueur – 40%

Alc. By Vol.

Photo: NewsCom: http://www.newscom.com/cgi-bin/prnh/20070515/NYTU003AP Archive: http://photoarchive.ap.org/AP PhotoExpress Network: PRN# 1PRN Photo Desk, [email protected]

DRAMBUIE

CONTACT: Giles Hanson, +1-646-356-8315, [email protected], or KarenWong, +1-646-356-8335, [email protected], both for DRAMBUIE

Still Buff At 83

By Karen Haymon Long, Tampa Tribune, Fla.

May 15–ST. PETERSBURG — Granted, he doesn’t look as buff as he did in his 50s, when he reigned as Mr. America in bodybuilding championships. But at 83, Claude Rigon is muscular enough and in such great shape, he has been asked to pose June 9 in a bodybuilding competition.

Following in his footsteps, his grandson, J.T. Tapias, who’s 55 years younger, will compete in the same event at Jefferson High School in Tampa.

Weightlifting and staying in top shape is a full-time job for both men. Rigon works out four to five times a week at Gold’s Gym in St. Petersburg. Tapias, a popular personal trainer in south Tampa, gets lots of exercise on the job.

Despite their busy schedules, the two work out together as often as they can.

“This is going to sound strange coming from a man, but he’s the love of my life,” Rigon says of his only grandchild.

Staying in shape is nothing new to Rigon, a retired cardiologist who sang opera before turning to medicine. He got into bodybuilding in 1933 in school in Paris.

“I was small and spindly, so I started physical training. I fell in love with it and stayed in it my whole life,” he says.

Bodybuilding became his passion, and he was very good at it. In 1976 alone, he was Mr. Colonial American, Mr. Eastern Seaboard, Masters Mr. America and Mr. New Jersey.

In 1995, he came in third among 60 and older lightweights in a Southern States Masters competition.

Dressed in sweatpants and a snug tank top, he jokes that he doesn’t look as good as he used to. When asked how he is, he quips: “As fine as anybody can be at this stage of life.” Then, he adds with a grin: “Displaying anything at this age is dismal.”

Yet, he’s dead serious when vowing to fight aging with all his might.

“Mother Nature and Father Time win all the time. But when you make them work hard for it, it’s a good feeling,” he says.

The St. Petersburg resident has never considered retiring from bodybuilding or working out.

“What happens when you take a fish out of water? It is a part of my life — an important part of my life. If I sat in my chair, I would be a very old man very fast.”

For older people at the gym, he says, “I sort of serve as an example of what can be. And for the younger guys, I show them that a life of physical fitness pays off. You age more gracefully and it prolongs the quality of your physical life. It’s much better than those who sit around and eat happily. They end up living in the doctor’s office”

Bob Buchanan, co-owner of the Gold’s Gym where Rigon works out, says frequent exercise is as good for the mind as it is for the body. He has seen amazing changes both psychologically and physically in the older people who work out regularly at his gym.

One man was able to give up the wheelchair he had used for years after regularly working out.

Many take advantage of free gym membership through their Medicare-funded insurance policies. He estimates that 2,000 seniors work out in the five Gold’s Gyms in Pinellas County. Many work out on weight machines, treadmills, exercise bikes and curling machines. More attend low-impact aerobic classes and fall-prevention and strength instruction courses.

Buchanan marvels at men such as Rigon and Henry Wisniewski, the senior of all the seniors at Gold’s. Wisniewski is 95 and works out at the gym every day but Sunday during the six months he lives in the United States. He and his wife, who’s 77, spend the rest of the year in Poland, where they take care of her 107-year-old mother.

Like Rigon, Wisniewski has worked out all his life and can’t imagine giving it up. During World War II, he served in the Polish Army, then in the underground resistance movement. Later, he cut lumber and labored as a steelworker and then a toolmaker for Ford Motor Co., among other jobs.

He has always walked and swum. After heart bypass surgery, he started working out with weights, riding a stationary bike four days a week and taking aerobic classes twice a week.

“It makes me feel good,” he says. “It keeps me alive.”

Reporter Karen Haymon Long can be reached at (813) 259-7619 or [email protected].

—–

Copyright (c) 2007, Tampa Tribune, Fla.

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

NYSE:F,

FDA Approves Phase I Clinical Trial Using Ichor’s TriGrid System and DNA Vaccine for Melanoma Developed at Sloan-Kettering

Ichor Medical Systems announced today it has received FDA approval to conduct a Phase I clinical trial of a melanoma vaccine to be administered to patients utilizing a novel delivery technology.

The vaccine, which was developed by Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center scientists, consists of DNA encoding a form of the tyrosinase protein. This protein is found broadly in melanoma cells and is a promising target for immunotherapy. The vaccine will be administered with the Ichor TriGrid™ Delivery System (TriGrid), which uses electroporation to increase the intracellular delivery of the DNA vaccine to the cells at the site of administration. By “teaching” the body’s own immune or disease-fighting system to target melanoma cells which contain the tyrosinase protein, the vaccine has the potential to alter the course of the disease.

The TriGrid, a small hand-held device used to apply the entire administration procedure, is the first fully automated one-step method for electroporation based DNA delivery. The integrated design of electrodes and DNA injection needle in the TriGrid yields consistent placement of electroporation pulses where DNA is administered in the target tissue. The automated one-step push-of-a-button process controls the rate of DNA injection and the time interval between injection and electroporation application. Taken together, these features of the TriGrid system minimize human error and deliver DNA to each patient in a consistent manner — a requirement in clinical trials and eventual commercialization. Studies show that TriGrid electroporation can increase uptake of agents by 10, 100 or even 1,000 times compared to other methods of delivery.

MSKCC has started enrolling patients with stage IIB to IV malignant melanoma for the two-year period.

“We are seeing the emergence of immunotherapy as an important component of cancer treatment through the application of new technologies,” said Dr. Alan N. Houghton, a member of the melanoma/sarcoma service and head of the melanoma disease management team at Memorial Sloan-Kettering. “DNA cancer vaccines offer a new approach to immunotherapy, but we need to improve the efficiency of vaccine delivery. We are hopeful that Ichor’s TriGrid will help fulfill that potential.”

Dr. John Laszlo, chairman of Ichor’s scientific advisory board and former national vice president of the American Cancer Society, said everyone involved is excited about the launch of Phase I clinical trials on the melanoma vaccine developed by Dr. Houghton and his team at Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center.

“Dr. Houghton has been a pioneer in developing cancer vaccines, and there is no better place to begin an evaluation of the TriGrid than with this distinguished group of investigators at Memorial,” said Laszlo. “Our new TriGrid DNA vaccine delivery system has shown tremendous promise in terms of preclinical testing for efficacy and practicality; hopefully it will address the shortcomings of conventional methods for DNA vaccine delivery and help us take an important step forward in the field of melanoma therapy.”

“Since advanced melanoma is life threatening, and current therapies are neither highly effective nor free of side effects, we are pleased the TriGrid platform has been selected by Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center physicians to advance possible treatment of this disease,” said Bob Bernard, CEO of Ichor.

Bernard said DNA vaccines hold promise for the prevention and treatment of many diseases. In addition to MSKCC, Ichor and its other research partners are using TriGrid in a wide range of pre-clinical and clinical studies for potential treatments of MS, atherosclerosis, HIV, Hepatitis B, Avian Flu and vaccine research for countering bio defense threats.

About Ichor Medical Systems:

Ichor Medical Systems, a privately held biotech company, is developing products based on the in vivo application of electroporation to enhance intracellular delivery of DNA drugs encoding therapeutic proteins or antigens for vaccines. Ichor’s proprietary TriGrid™ Delivery System (TriGrid) is the first and only integrated and fully automated system for electroporation-mediated DNA administration. This system allows the site of DNA injection, placement of electrodes, rate of DNA administration and timing of electrical pulse application to be consistent among different operators and patients. As a result, Ichor’s TriGrid enables safe, effective and reproducible clinical application of electroporation in a manner capable of supporting development and commercialization of DNA-based products. The Ichor system is currently being used on three continents in a wide range of pre-clinical and clinical studies for potential treatments of melanoma, MS, atherosclerosis, HIV, Hepatitis B, and Avian Flu. For further information, visit www.ichorms.com.

Millennium Biotechnologies and P4 Healthcare Launch Resurgex(R) Products into 100 of the Largest US Private Oncology Practices

BASKING RIDGE, N.J., May 14 /PRNewswire-FirstCall/ — Millennium Biotechnologies, Inc. a wholly owned subsidiary of Millennium Biotechnologies Group, Inc. (BULLETIN BOARD: MBTG) and P4 Healthcare LLC today announced a strategic alliance to deliver the Resurgex(R) line of high-quality nutrition products to cancer patients and oncology practices. The partnership brings together Millennium, a leading nutraceutical company and a pioneer in the field of specialized nutritional supplements, and P4 Healthcare, the world’s leading provider of customized solutions for Oncology Practices featuring premier patient educational resources and practice management tools.

The predecessor corporation to P4 Healthcare, International Oncology Network (ION), was founded in 1992. ION created a group purchasing organization (GPO) with the 100 largest oncology practices in the U.S. ION soon there-after quickly grew to 8 billion in sales and was acquired in 2003. P4 Healthcare evolved from the successful ION venture and was founded to continue catering to the needs of these same top 100 US private oncology practices.

P4 Healthcare LLC through its website, http://www.caring4cancer.com/ and patient guide, Caring4Cancer, reaches more than 1.2 million cancer patients annually. Many of the nation’s largest oncology practices now use the Caring4Cancer patient guide, a quarterly publication serving the interests and needs of cancer patients, survivors, and their families, as their primary patient education tool. With coverage of all aspects of cancer care — from diagnosis and treatment, to side effect management, nutrition, finances, sexuality, spirituality, and lifestyle matters — Caring4Cancer has quickly become a key patient education resource prescribed by doctors and nurses just as they prescribe medication or therapy.

Keeping to their core values of only offering the best in the area of information, products and services P4 has identified quality nutritional support, specifically Resurgex, as a key addition. “Offering our Oncology partners such a distinguished product as Resurgex(R) helps to solidify P4 and Caring4Cancer as the world’s leading provider of customized solutions for Oncology Practices,” comments P4 CEO Raj Mantena.

During phase one of the partnership, Millennium’s patented line of Resurgex(R) products will be promoted within the practices and made available online through P4 Healthcare’s website http://www.caring4cancer.com/. The website is a leading internet destination for cancer patients, caregivers and survivors that provides a wide range of trustworthy and valuable information and innovative health management tools reviewed by leading US oncologists. A growing online community creates an interactive venue for members to discuss issues impacting the oncology community from patients to caregivers.

Recently, approximately 40 of the top 100 practices were presented with the opportunity to make Resurgex(R) products available to their patients via caring4cancer.com. The response was overwhelming with over 95% of practices responding in the affirmative when asked if they would incorporate Resurgex into their practices. Resurgex(R) will be offered to patients throughout the entire course of their treatments and beyond in effort to yield more favorable treatment outcomes. “Proper nutrition is an important component in the therapeutic regimen for cancer. This alliance is a natural progression for Resurgex(R), given its leadership position in the oncology market,” said Jerry Swon, Sr., President of Millennium Biotechnologies Group, Inc.

Resurgex Select(R) has made significant inroads in the oncology marketplace and has been issued a U.S. Composition Patent for the proprietary formula, as well as a registered trademark. Resurgex Select(R) provides a superior source of high-quality calories as opposed to the corn oil and corn syrup-laden products that are found in the marketplace. As with the previous patent issued for Resurgex(R), this additional patent will protect the intellectual property of Millennium for the Resurgex(R) family of products.

About Millennium Biotechnologies, Inc.: Millennium Biotechnologies, Inc. is a research-based nutraceutical company and a pioneer in the emerging field of specialized nutritional supplements. The company’s flagship products, Resurgex(R), Resurgex Plus(R), and Resurgex Select(R), are designed to assist in reducing fatigue and oxidative stress, maintaining lean muscle and immune support in immunocompromised conditions.

Millennium Biotechnologies, Inc. is a wholly owned subsidiary of Millennium Biotechnologies Group, Inc., a publicly-traded company (BULLETIN BOARD: MBTG) . For more information about Millennium Biotechnologies, please contact Jerry Swon, Chief Executive Officer, at [email protected] or call (908) 604-2500. For more information about the Resurgex(R) line of products visit http://www.resurgex.com/.

About P4 Healthcare, LLC: P4 Healthcare provides comprehensive, customized health care management solutions that increase practice efficiencies and enhance the quality of patient care. By partnering with the leading specialty therapeutic practices across the nation, P4 Healthcare connects physicians, patients, pharmaceutical companies, and payers to bring these practices new and innovative solutions to important business challenges-from practice efficiency and quality improvement programs to superior patient care solutions.

P4 Healthcare is a privately held company with vast experience partnering with oncology practices.

This release includes certain forward-looking information that is based upon management’s beliefs as well as on assumptions made by and data currently available to management. This information which has been, or in the future may be, included in reliance on the “safe harbor” provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, is subject to a number of risks and uncertainties, including but not limited to uncertainty as to market acceptance of our products and the factors identified in the Company’s 10-KSB and other documents filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission. Actual results may differ materially from those anticipated in such forward-looking statements even if experience or future changes make it clear that any projected results expressed or implied therein may not be realized. The Company undertakes no obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements to reflect subsequent events or circumstances.

Millennium Biotechnologies, Inc.

CONTACT: Jerry Swon, Chief Executive Officer of MillenniumBiotechnologies, Inc., +1-908-604-2500, [email protected]

Web site: http://www.resurgex.com/http://www.caring4cancer.com/

Matritech’s NMP22(R) BladderChek(R) Test Will Be Featured in Presentations at the American Urological Association (AUA) Annual Meeting

Matritech (Amex: MZT), a leading developer and marketer of protein-based diagnostic products for the early detection of cancer, announced today that the NMP22® BladderChek® Test will be included in a plenary session State-of-the-Art lecture and two discussed poster presentations May 21-22, 2007 at the American Urological Association (AUA) annual meeting in Anaheim, California. More than 10,000 urologists and healthcare professionals are expected to attend the conference.

This year’s presentations support using the NMP22 BladderChek Test as a critical tool for regularly evaluating patients at high risk for bladder cancer: long-time smokers, people who work around particles in manufacturing, or who work with chemicals like those in hair dyes, or toxic fumes like firefighters. During the past year, the Test has been increasingly used in screening programs for firefighters, most recently by the city of San Francisco, and by occupational health groups to test people in high-risk occupations for bladder cancer.

Highlights of the AUA accepted abstracts on the NMP22 BladderChek Test and scheduled presentation are as follows:

Monday, May 21, 2007

3:30 — 5:30 PM Moderated Poster Sessions — Bladder Cancer Detection and Screening

Poster #1083

“Impact of Risk Factors on the Performance of a Point-of-Care Bladder Cancer Test,” Yair Lotan, M.D., University of Texas, Southwestern Medical Center

In this study at risk patient groups are segmented and analyzed to demonstrate the positive predictive value of the NMP22 BladderChek Test for detecting bladder cancer.

Dr. Lotan has previously reported on and published results from his analyses which demonstrated that screening for bladder cancer can save money as well as lives, by finding more cancers before they become muscle invasive. If testing is focused on patients at high risk and conducted with the low cost NMP22® BladderChek® Test the money saved in treatment expense is greater than the cost of screening.

Poster #1098

“NMP22 as an Adjunct to Urine Cytology and Cystoscopy in Follow-up of Superficial TCC of the Urinary Bladder,” Narmada P. Gupta, M.D., New Delhi, India

In this study of patients with bladder cancer, a positive NMP22 BladderChek Test result during initial treatment was associated with a significantly greater risk of tumor recurrence within one year of follow up.

Tuesday, May 22, 2007

11:10 AM — Plenary Session

State-of-the-Art Lecture: “Is Screening for Bladder Cancer Ready for Prime Time?”

H. Barton Grossman, M.D., Deputy Chairman, Department of Urology,

M.D. Anderson Cancer Center, Houston, TX

Dr. Grossman is the lead author and principal investigator of the two studies published in JAMA on the NMP22 BladderChek Test. In previous presentations on the use of tumor markers in the diagnosis of bladder cancer, he has pointed out that the NMP22 BladderChek Test was proven to identify cancers missed by cystoscopy in two large clinical trials, citing the publications in JAMA. He has also emphasized that when using any diagnostic test it is important to understand its performance characteristics. Dr. Grossman has drawn attention to the significantly better negative predictive value (NPV), or reliability of a negative test result, of the point-of-care NMP22 BladderChek Test, which has fewer missed cancers (false negatives), compared to the urine cytology laboratory based test.

In addition to the presentations on the NMP22 BladderChek Test, Dr. Mark S. Soloway Chairman, Department of Urology, University of Miami Leonard M. Miller School of Medicine, a clinical investigator and co-author of two studies published in the Journal of the American Medical Association (JAMA) on the NMP22 BladderChek Test will be hosting a Lunch with the Expert. He is considered an international leader on bladder cancer detection, research and treatment.

He is a vocal advocate for improving the early detection of this disease, authoring papers calling for better education of the public and primary care physicians. “With urine-based markers that are now on the scene and with public information and targeting those cigarette smokers that are at risk, older individuals, and anyone with blood in the urine, I believe we now have an opportunity to make a major change for the earlier diagnosis of men and women with bladder cancer,” he has been quoted as saying.

Screening, especially in high-risk populations is an area of research for Dr. Soloway. He is a co-author of poster #1082 with Dr. Alan Neider, et al., entitled “Evaluation and Work-up of Hematuria among Primary Care Physicians in Miami-Dade County: An Anonymous Questionnaire-based Survey.” In this survey, only 36% and 77% of patients with microscopic and gross hematuria are referred to urology. The authors conclude that screening for microscopic hematuria may be appropriate since these patients are not automatically referred to urology and may encounter a delay in diagnosis … [and] Further prospective studies are warranted to evaluate the efficacy of screening for UC, especially in high-risk populations.

Information about the NMP22 BladderChek Test will be available at Matritech’s booth #516.

About the NMP22® BladderChek® Test

The NMP22® BladderChek® Test was developed and commercialized by Matritech, a leading developer and marketer of protein-based diagnostic products for the early detection of cancer. The NMP22 BladderChek Test detects elevated levels of the NMP22 protein marker in a single urine sample. Most healthy individuals have very small amounts of the NMP22 protein marker in their urine, but bladder cancer patients commonly have elevated NMP22 marker levels, even at early stages of the disease. The NMP22 BladderChek Test, a painless and noninvasive assay, is the only in-office test approved by the FDA for both the diagnosis and monitoring of bladder cancer. It is used in a physician’s office, requires only four drops of urine and results are available in 30 minutes — during the patient visit, allowing a rapid and accurate way to aid in the detection of bladder cancer. The NMP22 BladderChek Test is reimbursed by Medicare and many medical insurers and has an average cost of less than $30. It also has been shown to detect over three times as many cancers as the commonly used laboratory based urine cytology test.

Two studies published in the Journal of the American Medical Association (JAMA) in February 2005 and January 2006 reported on clinical data showing the NMP22 BladderChek Test used in combination with cystoscopy for the diagnosis and monitoring of bladder cancer detected up to 99% of bladder malignancies. The NMP22® BladderChek® Test also detected cancers that were missed during an initial cystoscopic examination, most of which were high grade. In other clinical study analyses it was shown to detect 100% of the aggressive tumors, one of which was muscle invasive, in women with symptoms or risk factors for bladder cancer. It was also reported to detect all the transitional cell cancers that occurred in the upper urinary tract of patients with risk factors or symptoms of bladder cancer. Cystoscopy did not identify these tumors because they were outside the viewing area of the instrument.

The San Francisco Fire Department is using the NMP22 BladderChek Test in an annual screening program of active and retired firefighters for bladder cancer. In addition to San Francisco, voluntary screening of firefighters with the NMP22 BladderChek Test is on-going or has occurred in a number of smaller communities throughout the country. Legislation providing for the screening of firefighters is being considered in Rhode Island, Florida, New York, Vermont and Massachusetts.

The NMP22 BladderChek Test is also being used by local wellness and/or occupational health programs to test individuals in Arizona, Colorado, Wisconsin, Texas, Michigan, Kentucky, New York, Massachusetts, Washington, DC and Rhode Island.

About Matritech

Matritech is using its patented proteomics technology to develop diagnostics for the detection of a variety of cancers. The Company’s first two products, the NMP22® Test Kit and NMP22® BladderChek® Test, have been FDA approved for the monitoring and diagnosis of bladder cancer. The NMP22 BladderChek Test is based on Matritech’s proprietary nuclear matrix protein (NMP) technology, which correlates levels of NMPs in body fluids to the presence of cancer. Beginning with a patent portfolio licensed exclusively from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT), Matritech’s patent portfolio has grown to 14 other U.S. patents. In addition to the NMP22 protein marker utilized in the NMP22 Test Kit and NMP22 BladderChek Test, the Company has discovered other proteins associated with cervical, breast, prostate, and colon cancer. The Company’s goal is to utilize protein markers to develop, through its own research staff and through strategic alliances, clinical applications to detect cancer. More information about Matritech is available at www.matritech.com.

Statement under the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act

Any forward-looking statements relate to the Company’s current expectations of the Company’s NMP22 products and technology. Actual results may differ materially from those predicted in such forward-looking statements due to the risks and uncertainties inherent in the Company’s business, including without limitation risks and uncertainties including those detailed in the Company’s periodic reports and registration statements as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission. These forward-looking statements are neither promises nor guarantees. There can be no assurance that the Company’s expectations for its products will be achieved. Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date hereof. Matritech undertakes no responsibility to revise or update any such forward-looking information.

Former Immunex Management Team Chosen to Head-Up CTI Subsidiary Aequus BioPharma, Inc.

SEATTLE, May 14 /PRNewswire-FirstCall/ — Cell Therapeutics, Inc. (CTI) (Nasdaq; MTAX: CTIC) today announced the management team for its recently- formed subsidiary Aequus BioPharma, Inc. Carl J. March, Ph.D., MBA, a former Senior Vice President at Immunex has been chosen to lead the new company as President and CEO. Stewart D. Chipman, Ph.D., Vice President of Research at CTI and former Director of Biomolecular Screening at Immunex, who was a co- inventor of the technology and managed the team that advanced its development through an initial proof of concept stage, will serve as Executive Vice President and Chief Scientific Officer. David Cosman, Ph.D., former Distinguished Fellow and Research Director at Amgen and Vice President of Molecular Biology at Immunex, will join the Company’s Board of Directors.

CTI also announced it will co-develop AQB-101 with Aequus BioPharma, Inc. AQB-101 is being developed as a follow-on biologic that is a Genetic Polymer modified version of G-CSF, to help fight infection in some patients taking chemotherapy. The therapy has the potential to be dosed once per chemotherapy cycle similar to some currently marketed G-CSF products, such as Neulasta(R). Using Aequus’ Genetic Polymer technology to create the novel human therapeutic AQB-101 may result in greater ease of manufacture and a lower cost of goods.

“There is a lot of buzz around the Seattle venture and biotech community about this technology and its potential to rapidly develop follow-on biologics to current G-CSF or Interferon based human therapeutics while at the same time having novel applications for delivering small inhibitors of RNA,” said James A. Bianco, M.D., President and CEO of CTI. “We have put together some of the scientists from the team who participated in the development of biologics at Immunex, such as Leukine(R) and Enbrel(R), so we are confident we have the requisite experience in protein therapeutic development and manufacturing.”

CTI announced the formation of Aequus BioPharma in February. Its mission is to further develop the Genetic Polymer technology, discovered at CTI, which may speed the manufacture, development and commercialization of novel biopharmaceuticals including follow-on biologics or so-called biosimilars. CTI has committed to fund Aequus with a loan of up to $2 million and will initially retain a 70 percent equity interest in the new company.

“A key pitfall of protein therapeutics has been the relatively short plasma life of these types of drugs, which leads to the need for frequent injections and higher associated costs for therapies,” said Bianco. “Aequus BioPharma will utilize the Genetic Polymer technology which we expect to extend the plasma half-life of therapeutic proteins and provide a potentially less expensive, streamlined development pathway for next generation of biologics. Aequus’ technology can help speed access to the benefit of these new biotech drugs for millions of patients.”

Carl March spent over 19 years in R&D at Immunex, most recently serving as Senior Vice President of Information Technology and Biochemical Sciences. In addition to co-managing the day-to-day discovery research effort at Immunex, March was directly responsible for the company’s biochemical sciences group, which provided biochemistry, bioinformatics, protein chemistry, proteomics, and small molecule expertise to Immunex’s cytokine biology research platform. March was also responsible for the corporate library and information technology at Immunex and helped guide the successful integration of the company’s information systems with those at Amgen following its acquisition of Immunex in 2002. March received his Ph.D. in Chemistry from Purdue University and his MBA from the University of Washington Business School. He has served on numerous advisory boards and currently is a member of the Founding Board at the Information School (iSchool) at the University of Washington.

“I am very excited to team up with my former Immunex colleagues to help commercialize the very promising Genetic Polymer technology developed by Stewart and his team at CTI,” said March. “While our initial focus will be directed toward follow-on biologics, we certainly believe CTI’s discovery provides a platform which enables the rapid development of novel biotherapeutics so that patients can more readily benefit from the extreme pace of biomedical research we’re experiencing in the post-genome era.”

Stewart Chipman is a biotech executive with over 15 years of experience in building and leading scientific teams focused on the discovery and development of novel human therapeutics in the fields of inflammation, metabolic bone diseases, and cancer biology. Prior to joining Immunex, he was Director of Biology at ArQule in Boston. Chipman received his B.S. in Biology at Boston University and Ph.D. in Biochemistry from the Boston University School of Medicine. Prior to pursuing his career in biotech, he was an Associate Professor of Medicine at The Johns Hopkins University Medical School. He has co-authored more than 40 peer-reviewed scientific papers and is a co-inventor on seven U.S. and foreign patents.

David Cosman was educated at Cambridge University, then pursued his Ph.D. at Pennsylvania State University College of Medicine and Tufts University School of Medicine. He has published more than 130 peer-reviewed scientific papers and reviews and is a co-inventor on 35 U.S. patents as well as numerous foreign patents. One of the Institute for Scientific Information’s most highly-cited scientists in Immunology, he has served on the Scientific Advisory Boards of the Keystone Symposia and Amgen Ventures, and presently serves on the Scientific Advisory Board of another Seattle startup with Immunex roots, VLST Corporation.

Additional board members will include Jack W. Singer, M.D., CTI’s Chief Medical Officer and co-inventor of the Genetic Polymer technology, Fred W. Telling, Ph.D., CTI board member and former Vice President of Corporate Policy and Strategic Management for Pfizer Inc., as well as Dr. Bianco, who will serve as non-executive Chairman.

About Biologics

Biologics, especially recombinant DNA (rDNA) derived protein biopharmaceuticals, represent the fastest growing segment of pharmaceutical sales, currently at $51 billion worldwide and expected to hit $87 billion by 2010. Industrial scale protein production technologies are currently being applied to the development of a wide variety of protein-based therapeutics, including hormones, growth factors, antibodies and cytokine modulators, to treat a vast range of human diseases. But these drugs have a relatively short plasma half life. As a result, several physical, genetic and chemical approaches have been developed to extend the plasma half life of the therapeutic proteins while not compromising efficacy or introducing safety issues (immunogenicity and other off-mechanism toxicities). The most successful of these approaches has been chemical conjugation with monomethoxypolyethylene glycol (PEG), amino acid engineering leading to altered protein glycosylation and the addition of non-biologically active “carrier” domains.

About Cell Therapeutics, Inc.

Headquartered in Seattle, CTI is a biopharmaceutical company committed to developing an integrated portfolio of oncology products aimed at making cancer more treatable. For additional information, please visit http://www.cticseattle.com/.

About Aequus BioPharma, Inc.

Headquartered in Seattle, Aequus BioPharma is a biopharmaceutical company committed to developing affordable and improved biopharmaceuticals in a wide variety of human disease indications. For additional information, please visit http://www.aequusbiopharma.com/.

This press release includes forward-looking statements about the formation of Aequus BioPharma, the Genetic Polymer(TM) technology developed by CTI and the co-development of AQB-101 that involve a number of risks and uncertainties, the outcome of which could materially and/or adversely affect actual future results. Specifically, the risks and uncertainties that could affect the transaction include risks associated with Aequus BioPharma’s unproven technology, preclinical and clinical developments in the biopharmaceutical industry in general and with the Genetic Polymer technology in particular including, without limitation, further research and development of AQB-101, the ability of Aequus BioPharma to raise additional capital as needed to fund its development programs, and the risk factors listed or described from time to time in CTI’s filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission including, without limitation, CTI’s most recent filings on Forms 10-K, 8-K, and 10-Q. Except as may be required by Italian law, CTI does not intend to update or alter its forward-looking statements whether as a result of new information, future events, or otherwise.

   Media Contact:   Cell Therapeutics, Inc.   Dan Eramian   T: 206.272.4343   C: 206.854.1200   Susan Callahan   T: 206.272.4472   F: 206.272.4434   E: [email protected]   http://www.cticseattle.com/media.htm    Investors Contact:   Cell Therapeutics, Inc.   Leah Grant   T: 206.282.7100   F: 206.272.4434   E: [email protected]   http://www.cticseattle.com/investors.htm   Aequus BioPharma, Inc.   Carl J. March   T:  (206) 855-7802   Email:  [email protected]  

Cell Therapeutics, Inc.

CONTACT: media, Dan Eramian, +1-206-272-4343, cell, +1-206-854-1200, orSusan Callahan, +1-206-272-4472, fax, +1-206-272-4434, [email protected],or investors, Leah Grant, +1-206-282-7100, fax, +1-206-272-4434,[email protected], all of Cell Therapeutics, Inc.; or Carl J. March ofAequus BioPharma, Inc., +1-206-855-7802, [email protected]

Web site: http://www.aequusbiopharma.com/

Web site: http://www.cticseattle.com/

Sidetracked Negotiations: The Contract for Nearly 10,000 Unionized Amtrak Employees Expired on Dec. 31, 1999. Since Then, Talks Have Failed to Make Much Headway

By Jane M. Von Bergen, The Philadelphia Inquirer

May 13–Amtrak and its union locomotive mechanics, signal repairmen, track-maintenance crews, conductors and engineers have to be setting some kind of organized-labor record.

Nearly 10,000 unionized Amtrak employees have been working under a contract extension for more than seven years — since their last collective-bargaining agreement expired Dec. 31, 1999.

“It’s a record in my lifetime,” said Thomas Roth, a labor economist who has consulted with transit unions for 30 years. “I haven’t seen it — not in any industry, not in transit, not in freight railroad, not in airlines.”

An additional 5,000 or so Amtrak workers, including food servers, reservation clerks and station cleaners, have been on a contract extension for a mere 28 months, since Dec. 31, 2004.

To say that negotiations are moving at a snail’s pace might be an exaggeration, but not much. Union officials count their meetings with Amtrak negotiators over the last two years on one hand, and most have not seen their federal mediator for more than 12 months.

“Not to be negative . . . but seven years. . . . It’s a little disheartening,” said Brian Bogarde, a union track-repair worker from Morrisville, Bucks County, on a break from resurfacing track near the North Philadelphia train station last week.

“It just seems to be going nowhere,” he said.

But — and here’s what’s unusual — that might be a good thing for labor and Amtrak.

Why? It has to do with the confluence of three forces — the declining ability of workers to negotiate generous contracts, particularly for health care, the general antilabor bent of the Bush administration, and the complex vagaries of the Railway Labor Act, the federal law that governs railroad and airline negotiations.

Amtrak officials declined to comment on negotiations except to say, through spokesman Clifford Black: “We’re hopeful that we can reach agreements that are beneficial to Amtrak.” The National Mediation Board also had no comment.

One complication is the Railway Labor Act, enacted in 1926 with the prime economic goal of keeping commerce moving by keeping trains on track.

The long and cumbersome bargaining process called for by the act begins with negotiations overseen by a mediator. If the talks reach an impasse, the mediator can release the two sides from bargaining, leaving them free to strike or impose a contract or lockout, unless they choose binding arbitration.

(One quaint aspect of the act is that, in it, a strike or lockout is known as “self-help.”)

Usually, before a strike or lockout, the president appoints an emergency board. The board investigates for 30 days and issues recommendations.

Those recommendations can be rejected, but often lead to a settlement. If not, Congress can impose a solution, or the sides can resort to “self-help.”

To encourage bargaining and discourage strikes, the act provides a modest wage increase — half of the cost of living — during negotiations. Some track-repair workers, for example, have seen a $1.61-an-hour raise over seven years.

In those years, Amtrak has been able to operate with nearly flat wage increases. Meanwhile, the unions have kept health benefits, negotiated in 1997, that look generous by today’s standards.

The current contracts limit Amtrak’s ability to hire nonunion workers. Amtrak wants complete latitude to change that and won’t budge. That stance is part of management’s strategy to keep wages low by stalling the talks, union leaders say. Amtrak would not comment.

Meanwhile, the 13 unions in mediation limbo are not in agreement on the best strategy for moving ahead.

“Our members might like a strike, for a show of solidarity,” said George Davidson, vice chairman of the Brotherhood of Maintenance of Way Employees, the Teamster-affiliated union that represents 1,559 track-maintenance workers — one of the largest unions.

But that is not practical, said his boss, Jed Dodd, president of the Pennsylvania Federation of the Brotherhood of Maintenance of Way Employees. Dodd would like to move out of mediation and into binding arbitration, avoiding a presidential emergency board.

“We’re looking for a fair shake, and we couldn’t get a fair shake from a presidential emergency board under this president,” Dodd said.

The International Association of Machinists, which represents 487 mechanics who fix locomotives and repair trains, thinks it is worth the risk.

“Seven years, that’s ridiculous . . . how long before there’s an absolute revolt?” said machinists’ spokesman Joseph Tiberi.

The machinists are willing to gamble that even a presidential emergency board appointed by President Bush would find in favor of the employees. If not, the union still could strike, Tiberi said.

The Brotherhood of Railroad Signalman also is willing to gamble.

Earlier this year, a presidential emergency board appointed to oversee a contract between workers and Metro North, a suburban New York commuter system, made reasonable recommendations, said David Ingersoll, general chairman of the signalmen’s union.

Those recommendations could provide a pattern in an industry with a long history of pattern bargaining, he said.

A presidential emergency board also could follow the pattern set by a new contract between union workers and freight lines, which went to the same unions for ratification just last week — or it could follow the pattern in contracts signed by some of Amtrak’s unions earlier in the decade, said Buchanan Ingersoll & Rooney partner Robert S. Hawkins, who represents railroad companies in labor negotiations. Those contracts, which were less favorable for workers, have since expired.

Absent any movement at the bargaining table, the unions are agitating to keep up workers’ spirits and to set the stage for a change in the White House in 2008, while moving a Democratic Congress to action.

On March 14, 38 signalmen picketed outside an Amtrak board of directors’ meeting in New York. They later were threatened with discipline for taking off from work, though Ingersoll said they had done so in accordance with Amtrak policies.

On May 5, Dodd led a group on a leafletting tour of the upscale Washington neighborhood where Amtrak CEO Frank Kummant lives.

On Thursday, workers from Amtrak unions will rally in front of Washington’s Union Station before heading to a bigger noontime rally on Capitol Hill.

“Part of the problem,” Tiberi said, “is that Amtrak has to beg for funding.”

In fiscal 2006, the White House suggested giving Amtrak no funding. For fiscal 2008, Bush has proposed $900 million, far short of the $1.5 billion Amtrak seeks. A bill sponsored by Sen. Frank Lautenberg (D., N.J.) would provide for enhanced funding, although not enough, Tiberi said, to cover adequate contracts for the workers.

The irony is that railroads are faring well. Freight traffic is up. The freight-management coalition predicts railroads will hire 80,000 workers in the next five years.

Amtrak’s business also has picked up.

Ticket revenues increased 11 percent, to $840 million, in the seven months between October and April. Ridership rose 5 percent, to 14.32 million, Black said.

Operating losses have been narrowing, and Amtrak has been paying down its debt, but the railroad is still $3.4 billion in the red, Black said.

Out on the tracks in North Philadelphia, an Amtrak resurfacing crew took a forced break late Tuesday afternoon while it waited for the crew ahead to finish its work. These crews move along Amtrak’s East Coast corridor from Washington to Boston for four-day stints, staying in motels. Last week, the workers doubled up in a hotel in Bensalem, getting three meals on a $29 per diem meal allowance.

Amtrak’s Acela trains roar by at top speed, and SEPTA commuter trains move through at a good clip. It’s a job where one minute’s inattention can mean death and almost everyone knows someone who was either hurt or killed on the job.

The crews work in all weather. Most on the crew in North Philadelphia were circling 50.

“I do like my job,” said Jerome Longmire, 60, of Baltimore, who earns $17.91 an hour as a laborer, one of the lowest classifications. “I like the traveling and I like the work I do. I like being outside. It’s not as confining as a factory. I like my coworkers. We’ve been working together for years.”

Longmire knows workers like him could earn more with the freight lines, but like the union, he’s stuck between a rock and a hard place. He’s got 27 years in — three more to go before he can retire with a pension. If he left, he’d have to start over.

“Maybe if I was 16 or 20 years younger. . .,” he mused, as a train roared past. “The cost of living goes up. Union dues go up. Everything goes up but our pay.”

——

Amtrak and Its Many Unions

Amtrak has 24 labor agreements with 14 separate unions representing a total of 15,742 workers.

Union Number of employees

Transportation Communications International Union 4,378

United Transportation Union 1,914

Brotherhood of Maintenance of Way Employees 1,559

Transport Workers Union 1,467

Brotherhood of Locomotive Engineers 1,215

International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers 1,060

Brotherhood of Railroad Signalmen 551

International Association of Machinist

and Aerospace Workers 487

Hotel, Restaurant & Dining Car Employees 479

Sheet Metal Workers International Association 421

Fraternal Order of Police 307

National Conference of Firemen and Oilers 262

American Train Dispatchers Association 158

International Brotherhood of Boilermakers

and Blacksmiths 66

SOURCE: Amtrak, as of February 2007.

Contact staff writer Jane M. Von Bergen at 215-854-2769 or [email protected].

—–

Copyright (c) 2007, The Philadelphia Inquirer

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

First Rib Resection in Thoracic Outlet Syndrome

By Barkhordarian, Siamak

Most patients with thoracic outlet syndrome (TOS) present with exercise-induced upper extremity paresthesia. Neurogenic TOS is the most common type where the brachial nerve plexus is compressed against a tight thoracic outlet. Vascular compromise although rare can result from thoracic outlet pressure against the subclavian artery or more commonly the subclavian vein. This article reviews the pathophysiology of TOS and describes several effective surgical interventions. Complete first rib resection with surgical decompression is an essential part of the treatment for TOS. First rib resection via supraclavicular or a preferred transaxillary route should be considered when conservative modalities provide no symptom improvement. (J Hand Surg 2007;32A:565-570. Copyright 2007 by the American Society for Surgery of the Hand.)

The first reported excision of a cervical rib was performed by Coote at St. Bartholomew’s Hospital, London, in 1861. With the description of a simpler technique of first rib resection in 1966 using an axillary approach, surgical relief of this common syndrome became technically easier and more acceptable to both patient and physician.1

Thoracic outlet syndrome (TOS) is a well-described entity affecting younger individuals. It frequently involves the brachial plexus and less frequently the subclavian vein or artery. Most patients who present with TOS have well-developed muscles in their upper chest and upper extremities. These individuals are more susceptible to thoracic outlet compressions by the hypertrophie subclavius tendon or scalene muscle. Repetitious injury to these nerves or vessels can result in neuropraxia or symptomatic vascular compromise of the upper extremity.

In this article, different etiologies of TOS are described, and essential surgical maneuvers are further discussed.

Pathophysiology of TOS

Thoracic outlet syndrome results from impending thoracic outlet pressure on the neurovascular bundle exiting the thoracic cavity and entering the upper extremity. The pressure is created by several factors. These include the first rib and accessory or cervical ribs. Associated surrounding hypertrophic muscles, namely the scalene and the subclavius with their corresponding tendons, will also contribute to this local pressure syndrome. Detailed understanding of the local anatomy is critical in both diagnosing the etiology of TOS and offering an effective surgical intervention. The first thoracic rib forms the floor of the compression compartment, trapping or scissoring the brachial plexus and subclavian vessels between the first rib and other local structures. These surrounding structures include the clavicle, a cervical rib, an anomalous cervical band from an elongated C7 transverse process, the subclavius muscle, and bony callous or exostosis.

By removing the first rib, the floor of the compression compartment or the lower blade of the scissor is removed, thereby releasing the entrapment of the brachial plexus and subclavian vessels allowing them to drop away from the clavicle.1

The individuals that are commonly affected are athletes, climbers, and those who use their upper extremities repeatedly (eg, pigeon shooters, pilots, builders, and painters).

Neurogenic TOS compromises the majority of these symptomatic individuals presenting with brachial plexus and Tl nerve palsy. Neck trauma is also the most common cause of neurogenic TOS in patients with abnormal ribs. Cervical and anomalous first ribs are the predisposing factors rather than the cause.2 During evaluation of these patients, one must rule out a prior traumatic insult to the surrounding neck, shoulder, and arm areas.

Unilateral arm swelling without thrombosis, when not caused by lymphatic obstruction, may be due to subclavian vein compression at the costoclavicular ligament because of compression either by that ligament or the subclavius tendon most often because of congenital close proximity of the vein to the ligament. Arm symptoms of neurogenic TOS, pain, and paresthesia often accompany venous TOS, whereas neck pain and headache, other common symptoms of neurogenic TOS, are infrequent.3

Paget-Schroetter syndrome is a condition where the patients present with upper extremity venous congestion secondary to subclavian venous thrombosis. The most common cause for this outflow venous obstruction is an underlying obstructing thoracic outlet. They often present with asymmetrical upper extremity edema with congestive bluish skin discoloration. Venous thrombolysis and first rib resection are mandatory steps in relief of this venous outlet obstruction.

Upper extremity arterial compromise due to this compacted thoracic outlet may also occur with a resulting limb ischemia. Patients often present with a painful upper extremity after exercise albeit limb claudication symptoms. Discolored, pale, underperfused arms with absent or decreased arterial pulse is a common finding in these individuals with an arterial form of TOS.

Figure 1. This right arm angiograph reveals a widely patent right subclavian artery with right arm adducted and in the resting position.

Figure 2. This angiogram of a patient with TOS with right arm abducted and raised above the head depicts complete right subclavian arterial occlusion.

Diagnosis

A detailed history and examination is usually sufficient to suspect and even diagnose TOS. Arm claudication, exercise-induced paresthesia, color discoloration after exercise or after erect postures are highly suspicious of TOS. Absent radial pulse with contracterai head rotations (Adson maneuver) is helpful but not always present in patients with TOS. Some normal individuals also tend to have a positive Adson test. Additional investigations are helpful but not mandatory in the diagnostic process. Postural venography, arteriography (Figs. 1, 2) or even magnetic resonance angiography (Figs. 3, 4) may also be helpful.

Figure 3. Magnetic resonance angiography of a patient in the resting position with adducted arms.

Figure 4. Magnetic resonance angiography of a patient with TOS with both arms above the head.

Signs and symptoms helpful in making the diagnosis of neurologic TOS are supraclavicular tenderness on palpation and exacerbation of symptoms with the arms in the abducted external rotated position.4

Thoracic outlet syndrome may also follow trauma and may be seen as a result of postural abnormalities of the shoulder girdle. Cervical ribs and other anatomic variations are not prerequisites for the diagnosis, although they may be more common in patients with TOS. There is no reliable laboratory diagnostic test to confirm or exclude the diagnosis. Proper selection of candidates for surgery can produce excellent and good results in a high percentage of cases.5

Diagnosing and treating TOS can be challenging and frustrating. It must be emphasized that the diagnosis of TOS is a clinical one based on a detailed history and physical examination. This takes time and effort and is often confounded by the patient’s research on the Internet and emotional problems usually resulting from the symptoms and lack of appropriate treatment. Some have had symptoms so long that there may be permanent neurologic damage. Each patient presents his or her own diagnostic challenge. Solving the problem and providing effective therapy can be rewarding for doctor and patient.6,7 There are some congenital anomalies that are superimposed on some form of neck or arm trauma. There are some promising technologies that offer hope of early anatomic diagnosis. Sophisticated imaging of the brachial plexus as advocated by Collins offers hope. High-resolution multidetector computed tomography scanning seems even more promising.6,7

Treatment

Physical therapy with special dedicated postural exercises should be routinely used as the initial treatment for TOS. However, patients with severe symptomatic TOS will often not benefit from physical therapy.1

The decompression of the neurovascular bundle in vascular TOS should include the first rib resection in each case.8 This is an essential step in therapy of all 3 types of TOS (neurogenic, venous, and arterial).

Cases of the venous form of TOS who present with Paget- Schroetter syndrome (PSS) are best treated with venogram, subclavian vein thrombolysis, as well as first rib resection on the same hospital admission. These patients should be kept on anticoagulation therapy after their lytic interventions while waiting for their first rib resection. Immediate thrombolytic therapy followed by early surgical decompression has been shown to be safe and effective while significantly decreasing the duration of disability suffered by patients with this form of TOS. Therefore, a unified approach to acute axillosubclavian venous thrombosis in a single hospital admission should be considered an alternative standard of care for treatment of PSS.9 Untreated symptomatic patients with PSS can sustain chronic disability from venous obstruction, with arm swelling, pain, and early exercise fatigue.10

Diagnosis of venous TOS is made by dynamic venography. First rib resection, which includes the anterior portion of rib and cartilage plus division of the costoclavicular ligament and subclavius tendon, proves to be an effective treatment.3 Residual subclavian vein stenosis after operative thoracic outlet decompression is common in patients with venous TOS. Combination trea\tment with surgical thoracic outlet decompression and intraoperative percutaneous transluminal angioplasty is a safe and effective means for identifying and treating residual subclavian vein stenosis. Moreover, intraoperative percutaneous transluminal angioplasty may reduce the incidence of postoperative recurrent thrombosis and eliminate the need for future venous stent placement or open venous repair.11 Intravenous stents are however contraindicated in patients with thrombosis of the axillary-subclavian vein (PSS). In one such study, all 22 patients with intravenous stents reoccluded their axillary-subclavian veins from 1 day to 6 weeks after insertion.12

First rib resection can be performed via 2 common surgical routes: a supraclavicular approach and a transaxillary approach. Each has its benefits with minimal limitations, and both remain very effective in TOS management and relief of symptoms.

First Rib Resection: Supraclavicular Approach

Results after supraclavicular decompression are satisfactory, and the complication rates are low.13 The Supraclavicular approach has been a successful route for thoracic outlet decompression. It permits some more options than the transaxillary route. Anterior and middle scalenectomy, together with brachial plexus neurolysis, can be performed with excellent exposure. The same incision can be used to perform cervical or first rib resection. In one large series, the 5-year success rate using life-table methods was approximately 70%.14

In another series, 770 Supraclavicular first rib re sections and scalenectomies were performed for TOS. After Supraclavicular scalenectomy and rib resection, an excellent response was achieved in 455 (59%) cases and a good result was achieved in another 206 (27%) cases. A fair outcome was present in 95 (13%) cases, and a poor result was found in only 13 (1%) cases. There was a single occurrence of lymphatic leakage and no brachial plexus injuries resulted. Postoperative causalgia requiring subsequent sympathectomy developed in 2 cases. No vascular or permanent phrenic nerve injuries occurred, and only 12 (2%) patients required operative intervention for recurrent TOS. First rib resection and scalenectomy can be performed by the supraclavicular route with an acceptable outcome, minimal morbidity, and long-lasting results.15 Decompression for thoracic outlet compression syndrome through a Supraclavicular approach encompassing first rib resection leads to good long-term results with few complications.16

First Rib Resection: Transaxillary Approach

The transaxillary approach to first rib resection is well tolerated, and serious complications should be unusual when the procedure is performed by an experienced surgeon. Postoperative attention to shoulder girdle mechanics is important in the prevention of recurrence of symptoms.5

The relative length of the posterior rib stump is correlated with the outcome after transaxillary first rib resection in patients with TOS. First rib resection in patients with proven vascular compression should be as close as possible to the articulation with the transverse process without injuring the brachial plexus.17 Partial removal of the first rib is usually performed via the Supraclavicular approach and is often inadequate because a long rib stump may entrap the plexus or vessels by periosteal scar tissue leading to severe brachial neuritis, ischemia, or venous congestion. The posterior stump of the first rib should be left so short that it lies posterior to the Tl cervical root clearly seen at the operation and should not extend more than 1 cm anterolaterally when seen by chest x-ray.1 This can be seen in Figure 5 where the right first rib was removed via a right transaxillary approach for PSS.

Figure 5. Postoperative chest x-ray of a TOS patient. The arrow points to the absent right first rib, which was removed via a right axillary approach.

In most series, transaxillary first rib resection provides better relief of symptoms than supraclavicular neuroplasty of the brachial plexus. The major compressive element in patients with TOS- associated pain appeared to be the first rib.18 Total resection of the first rib with its periosteum should be preferred in all of these cases with accompanying pathologies such as cervical rib, fibrous ligaments, and scalene muscle. The transaxillary approach provides a good exposure for the resection of cervical ribs, the first rib, and excision of fibrous ligaments and scalene muscle with an excellent cosmetic result. All patients should be encouraged toward several months of physical exercise starting from the early postoperative period.19

Newer techniques are also available for nerve release. Endoscopie computerized instrumentation in transaxillary first rib resection has been performed, and this decreases the risk of neurovascular injury, promotes complete decompression, and can provide a safe alternative to standard first rib resections.20

Transaxillary rib resection is a safe and effective procedure, allowing almost two thirds of patients a return to normal activity.21

Discussion

Some prefer a combination of approaches to treat TOS. Vascular TOS is seen less frequently than the neurogenic form; however, in most cases it requires surgical treatment. Some prefer a combined supraclavicular and infraclavicular approach because it offers complete exposure of the subclavian artery, cervical and first ribs, and all soft tissue anomalies.22

One study followed 300 operations for TOS for at least 1 year. The first group was treated with either supraclavicular or transaxillary approach and with scalenotomy combined with the resection of the first rib or without rib resection. The second group was operated via the supraclavicular approach without exception and always with the resection of the first rib. The results of the second group were significantly better.23 Others recommend that starting with the first rib resection and following immediately with a transcervical anterior and middle scalenectomy accomplishes total decompression of the thoracic outlet area with much better improvement of symptoms and much lower recurrence rate.24

Surgical intervention is indicated for vascular and true neurogenic TOS and for some patients with the common or nonspecific type of TOS in whom nonoperative therapies fail. With careful patient selection, operative intervention usually yields satisfactory results.25

In one large series of 155 patients after TOS surgery, predictive factors of negative outcomes were acute ischemia (p

Postoperative complications are rare but include hemothorax and/ or pneumothorax, infraclavicular anesthesia, causalgia, lymphocele, wound infection or incisional separation, rib regeneration, and recurrence. Rarely, bleeding and venous injury is encountered during the rib resection. Damage to intercostobrachial sensory nerve should be avoidable. This nerve usually runs across the axillary cavity. The nerve injury occurs with axillary exposure and instrumentation while removing the first rib. This can result in incisional and anterior chest paresthesia.

In another study of 409 adults, 78% (319) of the patients with neurologic TOS in this group improved postoperatively: 21% (86) had complete relief, 32% (131) had good relief, and 25% (102) had fair relief. Twenty-two percent showed no improvement. The surgical procedures are safe. Patients with TOS refractory to conservative management can benefit from TOS.4

Conclusions

Thoracic outlet syndrome should be suspected in individuals with upper extremity vascular compromise and paresthesia. First rib resection remains an important and essential step in management of the TOS. This procedure can be performed with minimal morbidity and with excellent outcomes. Both the supraclavicular route and the transaxillary route of the first rib resection remain effective surgical techniques and should be considered in patients with refractory symptoms.

References

1. Roos DB. Experience with first rib resection for thoracic outlet syndrome. Ann Surg 1971;173:429-442.

2. Sanders RJ, Hammond SL. Management of cervical ribs and anomalous first ribs causing neurogenic thoracic outlet syndrome. J Vasc Surg 2002;36:51-56.

3. Sanders RJ, Hammond SL. Subclavian vein obstruction without thrombosis. J Vasc Surg 2005;41:285-290.

4. Jamieson WG, Chinnick B. Thoracic outlet syndrome: fact or fancy? A review of 409 consecutive patients who underwent operation. Can J Surg 1996;39:321-326.

5. Leffert RD, Perlmutter GS. Thoracic outlet syndrome. Results of 282 transaxillary first rib resections. Clin Orthop Relat Res 1999;368:66-79.

6. Brantigan CO, Roos DB. Diagnosing thoracic outlet syndrome. Hand Clin 2004;20:27-36.

7. Brantigan CO, Roos DB. Etiology of neurogenic thoracic outlet syndrome. Hand Clin 2004;20:17-22.

8. Pupka A, Rucinski A, Skora J, Janczak D, Pawlowski S, Kaluza G, et al. The treatment of subclavian artery compression with the use of ringed polytetrafluoroethylene vascular prostheses. Polim Med 2004;34:53-61.

9. Caparrelli DJ, Freischlag J. A unified approach to axillosubclavian venous thrombosis in a single hospital admission. Semin Vasc Surg 2005;18:153-157.

10. Khan SN, Stansby G. Current management of PagetSchroetter syndrome in the UK. Ann R Coll Surg Engl 2004;86:29-34.

11. SchneiderDB, Dimuzio PJ, Martin ND, Gordon RL, Wilson MW, Laberge JM, et al. Combination treatment of venous thoracic outlet syndrome: open surgical decompression and intraoperative angioplasty. J Vasc Surg 2004;40:599-603.

12. Urschel HC Jr, Patel AN. Paget-Schroetter syndrome therapy: failure of intravenous stents. Ann Thorac Surg 2003;75:1693-1696; discussion 1696.

13. Konig RW, Kretschmer T, Borm W, Hubner F, Richter HP, Antoniadis G. [Neurogenic thoracic outlet syndrome. Longterm results of supraclavicular decompression]. Nervenarzt 2005;76:1222, 1224- 1226, 1230.

14. Sanders RJ, Hammond SL. Supraclavicular first rib resection and total scalenectomy: technique and results. Hand Clin 2004;20:61- 70.

15. Hempel GK, Shutze WP, Anderson JF, Bukhari HI. 770 consecutive supraclavicular first rib resections for thoracic outlet syndrome. Ann Vasc Surg 1996; 10:456-463.

16. Maxwell-Armstrong CA, Noorpuri BS, Haque SA, Baker DM, Lamerton AJ. Long-term results of surgical decompression of thoracic outlet compression syndrome. J R Coll Surg Edinb 2001;46:35-38.

17. Geven LI, Smit AJ, Ebels T. Vascular thoracic outlet syndrome. Longer posterior rib stump causes poor outcome. Bur J Cardiothorac Surg 2006;30:232-236.

18. Sheth RN, Campbell JN. Surgical treatment of thoracic outlet syndrome: a randomized trial comparing two operations. J Neurosurg Spine 2005;3:355-363.

19. Han S, Yildirim E, Durai K, Ozisik K, Yazkan R, Sakinci U. Transaxillary approach in thoracic outlet syndrome: the importance of resection of the first-rib. Eur J Cardiothorac Surg 2003;24:428- 433.

20. Martinez BD, Wiegand CS, Evans P, Gerhardinger A, Mendez J. Computer-assisted instrumentation during endoscopie transaxillary first rib resection for thoracic outlet syndrome: a safe alternate approach. Vascular 2005;13:327-335.

21. Fulford PE, Baguneid MS, Ibrahim MR, Schady W, Walker MG. Outcome of transaxillary rib resection for thoracic outlet syndrome- a 10 year experience. Cardiovasc Surg 2001;9:620-624.

22. Davidovic LB, Kostic DM, Jakovljevic NS, Kuzmanovic IL, Simic TM. Vascular thoracic outlet syndrome. World J Surg 2003;27:545- 550.

23. Stober R. [The thoracic outlet syndrome-diagnostic tips, operative technique and results]. Handchir Mikrochir Plast Chir 2006;38:46-50.

24. Atasoy E. Combined surgical treatment of thoracic outlet syndrome: transaxillary first rib resection and transcervical scalenectomy. Handchir Mikrochir Plast Chir 2006;38:20-28.

25. Huang JH, Zager EL. Thoracic outlet syndrome. Neurosurgery 2004;55:897-902; discussion 902-903.

26. Altobelli GG, Kudo T, Haas BT, Chandra FA, Moy JL, Ahn SS. Thoracic outlet syndrome: pattern of clinical success after operative decompression. J Vasc Surg 2005;42:122-128.

Siamak Barkhordarian, MD

From Brown Medical School, Providence, RI.

Received for publication November 28, 2006; accepted January 22, 2007.

No benefits in any form have been received or will be received from a commercial party related directly or indirectly to the subject of this article.

Corresponding author: Siamak Barkhordarian, MD, 10445 Wilshire Blvd. Los Angeles, CA 90024; e-mail: [email protected].

Copyright 2007 by the American Society for Surgery of the Hand

0363-5023/07/32A04-0019$32.00/0

doi:10.1016/j.jhsa.2007.01.018

Copyright Churchill Livingstone Inc., Medical Publishers Apr 2007

(c) 2007 Journal of Hand Surgery, The. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Woman Called State’s Oldest Working Nurse: Berkley Resident, 85, Loves Her Job

By Gina Damron, Detroit Free Press

May 12–Dorothe Canty’s first uniform was crisp and white, paired with white hosiery, white shoes and a white cap each day.

Nurses, she said, were required to give up their seats to doctors and let them exit elevators first.

There was no such thing as disposable surgery equipment; surgical tools and even gloves were sterilized and reused.

A lot has changed since Canty graduated from nursing school in 1943 — except for Canty, who, at age 85, is still working.

In honor of National Nurses Week, Canty was recognized Wednesday at Beaumont Hospital with a proclamation from Gov. Jennifer Granholm for being the oldest working nurse in Michigan.

“I guess I don’t know what the word retirement means,” said Canty of Berkley.

Canty began working at Beaumont Hospital in Royal Oak in 1968 and still works for a doctor affiliated with the hospital.

Some say she’s rare, and that the industry, which is struggling to keep experienced nurses and combating nursing shortages everywhere from hospitals to home health care, could use more like her.

In her 64 years as a nurse, she has worked in several capacities from emergency to surgery to obstetrics, where she’s spent the bulk of her career. Nowadays, she works 20 hours a week for a Beaumont doctor in Berkley, occasionally teaching childbirth classes.

Really, Canty said, she just loves watching babies being born. “It’s such a miracle,” she said.

Canty’s a happy mother of five, grandmother of 10 and great-grandmother of five. Her three daughters all have gone on to become nurses at Beaumont, where two of them still work.

“They’ll tell you that I said they had to,” she said, with a grin on her face. “But, it’s not true.”

Daughter Darlene Ditrapani, 48, tells a different story. She said her mother always said they could be a nurse or a teacher.

Then she’d ask: “Which do you want?” Ditrapani said laughing. “We decided to do nursing. We always looked up to her.”

Despite dedicated nurses like Canty, there remains a need for more. Though there has been an influx of students interested in going into nursing, many schools don’t have enough faculty to accommodate the need, said Rachelle Hulett, head of human resources for the Visiting Nurse Association of Southeast Michigan.

Alexandra Hichel, communications specialist with the association, said the home health care and hospice industry has been hit hard, as baby boomers get older and demand grows.

“In some cases,” Hulett said, “we’ve had to limit incoming referrals because we don’t have the staff” for in-home care.

But, no matter how much the industry changes, Canty has stayed a little old school and said she works to keep young. She wore her white nursing cap until five years ago and still refers to her coworkers as “the girls.” She comes from a time when nursing felt more like a calling than a career — a time when nurses knew patients by their first names.

“Today, it seems patients are known by the number room their in,” she said. “It seems to be almost a business now.”

Contact GINA DAMRON at 248-351-3293 or [email protected].

—–

Copyright (c) 2007, Detroit Free Press

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

Nothing to Sneeze at: Avid Gardeners With Allergies Have to Battle to Keep Their Hobby

By Matt Gleason, Tulsa World, Okla.

May 12–Patricia Sutton’s prize-winning African violet, a tiny little thing resplendent in purple flowers, stays mostly out of sight in a converted pantry awaiting its next showing.

Although it’s kind on the eyes, that African violet produces pollen, which is among the allergens that make Sutton’s eyes water, cause sneezing fits and even leave her broken out in hives.

To combat those symptoms, the Tulsa Garden Club president gives herself allergy shots every Monday.

It’s the price the Tulsa woman pays for growing prize-winning African violets. And it’s the price she pays for being able to venture into her backyard garden in a city the Asthma and Allergy Foundation of America named the worst in the nation for those with spring allergies.

“I never let it interfere,” Sutton said of her allergies. “I just never let it interfere.”

However, on a recent afternoon, the African violet-lover sat on her living room couch and said even though she never misses an allergy shot, she often stays inside because her allergies can still make her sneeze and suffer watery eyes.

“It’s better this year,” she said. “It’s better, but it is still there.”

If Sutton didn’t have allergies, she would be outside more often, she said, tending to her garden and simply enjoying the outdoors.

Instead, she keeps busy inside. For instance, she is vigilant about dusting away the allergenic particles that so trouble her. As for ridding pollen from her home for good, which would mean banishing her African violets, Sutton said, “I would not give them up.”

Dr. Warren V. Filley, an Oklahoma Allergy & Asthma Clinic allergist, couldn’t tend to his peony, lilac and crinum lily, nor his 60 roses bushes, among the other colorful additions to his Edmond garden, if it weren’t for his allergy shots

“The shots make my allergies mild,” he said, “and then the medicines work on mild disease. Therefore, I’m pretty much a happy camper.”

Filley lives just outside of Oklahoma City, which is among the top 25 worst cities in the nation for those with asthma according to the AAFA. Oklahoma City ranked No. 24 and Tulsa came in at No. 25.

In the OAAC’s spring newsletter — found online at www.oklahomaallergy.com — the former president of the Oklahoma Horticultural Society provided a list of trouble-free shrubs, flowers, trees and ground cover for those with allergies.

Although Filley tames his own garden the best he can, he said, “It’s very difficult to just go out in the yard and enjoy things when the trees are pollinating or the grass is pollinating.”

Beyond wearing gloves, Filley said he wears a mask when he does “heavy work” in the garden, such as mowing the grass, which aerosolizes pollen and mold, or working with compost.

Among the various techniques Filley recommends for reducing allergy symptoms is to make sure, after you finish your garden chores, to immediately wash your work clothes. Filley also uses a saltwater rinse to flush out his nose after a long day in the garden.

Like the local African violet-lover, Filley will do whatever he can to battle his allergies so he can enjoy his allergen-filled hobby.

On a recent weekend, Filley said he spent the entire Saturday and Sunday — “I skipped church. I sinned” — because it was such a “beautiful day.”

“For me, it’s therapy,” he said of gardening. “It’s meditation. It’s being out there communing with nature. And it’s just a lot of fun.”

——

Matt Gleason 581-8473 [email protected]

—–

Copyright (c) 2007, Tulsa World, Okla.

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

Abbott’s HIV-1 Viral Load Test Approved By FDA for Use on New M2000(TM) Molecular Diagnostics Instrument

DES PLAINES, Ill. and ROCKVILLE, Md., May 11 /PRNewswire-FirstCall/ — Abbott and Celera , an Applera Corporation business, announced today that Abbott has received U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approval to market the Abbott RealTime HIV-1 viral load test for use on the company’s m2000(TM) automated instrument system.

The Abbott RealTime HIV-1 assay, for use on the new m2000 system, is designed to detect and precisely measure levels of the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) circulating in a patient’s blood (viral load), including the three major groups of HIV-1 as well as non-B subtypes. The test is intended for use as a marker of disease prognosis and an aid in assessing viral response to antiretroviral treatment.

“As the viral diversity of HIV-1 continues to increase, the need for highly sensitive tests to monitor patient response to antiviral therapies becomes even more important,” said John Robinson, Ph.D., senior director, research and development, Abbott Molecular. “The reliability and precision of the Abbott RealTime HIV-1 test on the m2000 system for detecting HIV-1 subtypes across a broad dynamic range should help physicians be confident about assessing viral levels in their patients, enabling them to provide optimal treatment.”

HIV-1 can be divided into groups M (major), O (outlier) and N (new). The vast majority of isolates cluster in the M group. Distinct lineages within group M have also been identified, and these lineages are called strains or subtypes. They include subtype designations A through G. While HIV-1 subtype B continues to be the most common strain found in the United States, studies suggest that an increasing number of newly diagnosed patients are infected with non-B subtype viruses and various circulating recombinants as a result of the influx of immigrants from countries where variant strains of HIV are more common. In a recent study published in the Journal of Medical Virology(1) examining the impact of this phenomenon on Minneapolis-based Hennepin County Medical Center, the predominant HIV subtypes identified by the hospital in African-born patients were subtype C (40 percent), followed by A (20-25 percent), D (10 percent) and G(3-5 percent).

Another recent study by the Centers of Disease Control and Prevention involving more than 3,000 HIV patients in the United States found that 5.1 percent of those patients were infected with HIV-1 non-B subtypes.(2)

“The ability to detect and measure each of these genetic variations of the virus is an important factor in managing the disease on a worldwide basis and determining the most effective course of treatment for patients,” said Timothy Stenzel, M.D., Ph.D., medical director, Abbott Molecular.

The RealTime HIV-1 test has been developed for use on the Abbott m2000 system, an automated instrument for DNA and RNA testing in molecular

laboratories. The m2000 system is based on real-time polymerase chain reaction (PCR) technology and is designed to efficiently detect and measure life-threatening viruses and bacteria in patient samples in less than five hours, compared to other testing methods that may take up to two days.

Additional products in development for the Abbott m2000 system include assays for hepatitis C virus (HCV), hepatitis B virus (HBV), HCV genotyping, chlamydia and gonorrhea. Abbott markets the m2000 system and a menu of tests throughout the world as part of a strategic alliance with Celera.

“We’re very pleased that Abbott, through its alliance with Celera, has secured FDA approval on a real-time viral load assay for HIV,” said Kathy Ordonez, president, Celera. “Today, more than 2 million HIV viral load tests are performed annually in the United States, and we believe both the Abbott RealTime HIV assay and the m2000 system offer substantial productivity and performance advantages to customers performing these tests.”

About the Abbott RealTime HIV-1 Viral Load Test

The Abbott RealTime HIV-1 assay, for use on the m2000 system, is among the most sensitive viral load tests available today, with a broad dynamic range, capable of quantitating HIV-1 in plasma down to as few as 40 RNA molecules per milliliter (mL) and up to as many as 10 million molecules per mL. The Abbott RealTime HIV-1 assay is intended for use in conjunction with clinical presentation and other laboratory markers as an indicator of disease prognosis and for use as an aid in assessing viral response to antiretroviral treatment as measured by changes in plasma HIV-1 RNA levels. This assay is not intended to be used as a donor-screening test for HIV-1 or as a diagnostic test to confirm the presence of HIV-1 infection.

About the Abbott m2000

The Abbott m2000 system consists of two instruments: the Abbott m2000sp and the m2000rt. The system’s sophisticated computer software links an instrument that automates the extraction, purification and preparation of DNA and RNA from patient samples (m2000sp) with a real-time PCR instrument that amplifies, detects and measures minute levels of infectious agents (m2000rt). The system automates a variety of manual processing steps, such as pipetting, helping to reduce the hands-on time required to prepare patient samples for DNA/RNA testing by as much as 75 percent.

“By automating all of the complex, manual steps often associated with molecular testing, the m2000 system gives molecular laboratories the ability to prepare patient samples and deliver test results fast and efficiently,” said Scott Safar, senior director, systems development and support, Abbott Molecular. “We believe the ease of use and sample tracking features of the instrument have taken automation to another level for molecular laboratories.”

The m2000 system and a menu of tests for HIV-1, HCV, Chlamydia trachomatis (CT) as well as a combination test for CT/Neisseria gonorrhoeae are available in the European Union as CE-marked products.

About Applera Corporation and Celera

Applera Corporation consists of two operating groups: Celera and the Applied Biosystems groups. Celera is primarily a molecular diagnostics business that is using proprietary genomics and proteomics discovery platforms to identify and validate novel diagnostic markers, and is developing diagnostic products based on these markers as well as other known markers. Celera maintains a strategic alliance with Abbott for the development and commercialization of molecular, or nucleic acid-based, diagnostic products, and is also developing new diagnostic products outside of this alliance. Through its genomics and proteomics research efforts, Celera is also discovering and validating therapeutic targets, and has established and is seeking strategic partnerships to develop therapeutic products based on these discovered targets. The Applied Biosystems Group serves the life science industry and research community by developing and marketing instrument-based systems, consumables, software, and services. Customers use these tools to analyze nucleic acids (DNA and RNA), small molecules, and proteins to make scientific discoveries and develop new pharmaceuticals. Applied Biosystems’ products also serve the needs of some markets outside of life science research, which is referred to as “applied markets,” such as the fields of: human identity testing (forensic and paternity testing); biosecurity, which refers to products needed in response to the threat of biological terrorism and other malicious, accidental, and natural biological dangers; and quality and safety testing, for example in food and the environment.

Applied Biosystems is headquartered in Foster City, CA, and reported sales of over $1.9 billion during fiscal 2006. Information about Applera Corporation, including reports and other information filed by the company with the Securities and Exchange Commission, is available at http://www.applera.com/, or by telephoning 800.762.6923. Information about Celera is available at http://www.celera.com/.

Applera Corporation’s Forward-Looking Statements

Certain statements in this press release are forward-looking. These may be identified by the use of forward-looking words or phrases such as “believe,””plan,” and “should,” among others. These forward-looking statements are based on Applera Corporation’s current expectations. The Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 provides a “safe harbor” for such forward- looking statements. In order to comply with the terms of the safe harbor, Applera notes that a variety of factors could cause actual results and experience to differ materially from the anticipated results or other expectations expressed in such forward-looking statements. These factors include but are not limited to (1) uncertainty that the Abbott RealTime HIV-1 and HCV assays or the m2000 system will be accepted by the market, including the risk that these products will not be competitive with products offered by other companies; and (2) other factors that might be described from time to time in Applera’s filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission. All information in this press release is as of the date of the release, and Applera does not undertake any duty to update this information, including any forward-looking statements, unless required by law.

About Abbott’s Molecular Diagnostics Business

Abbott Molecular, a division of Abbott based in Des Plaines, Ill., is an emerging leader in molecular diagnostics — the analysis of DNA, RNA and proteins at the molecular level. Abbott Molecular’s instruments and tests provide physicians with critical information based on the early detection of pathogens and subtle, but key changes in patients’ genes and chromosomes. They help physicians diagnose disease and infections earlier, select appropriate therapies and monitor disease progression.

Abbott Molecular’s portfolio of products includes innovative genomic tests for chromosome changes associated with congenital disorders and cancer, including the PathVysion(R) HER-2 DNA Probe Kit, a test used to help select women with breast cancer who could benefit from Herceptin(R) therapy, and UroVysionTM, which detects genetic changes in bladder cells for aiding in the diagnosis of bladder cancer in patients with hematuria (blood in the urine) and for monitoring bladder cancer recurrence.

About Abbott

Abbott is a global, broad-based health care company devoted to the discovery, development, manufacture and marketing of pharmaceuticals and medical products, including nutritionals, devices and diagnostics. The company employs 65,000 people and markets its products in more than 130 countries.

Abbott’s news releases and other information are available at the company’s Web site at http://www.abbott.com/.

   (1) Journal of Molecular Virology, Cartwright, 2006   (2) Abstract of the 14th Conference on Retroviruses and Opportunistic       Infections, Mahle K, Bodnar U, et al., 2007  

Abbott

CONTACT: media, Don Braakman, +1-224-361-7246, or financial, TinaVentura, +1-847-935-9390, both of Abbott; or media and financial, DavidSpeechly, Ph.D. of Celera, +1-510-749-1853

Web site: http://www.abbott.com/http://www.applera.com/http://www.celera.com/

Medical Staffing Network Holdings Announces Acquisition of InteliStaf Holdings, Inc.

Medical Staffing Network Holdings, Inc. (NYSE: MRN), a leading healthcare staffing company and the largest provider of per diem nurse staffing services in the nation, announced today that it has agreed to acquire InteliStaf Holdings, Inc. (“InteliStaf”), a privately held leading healthcare staffing company headquartered in Oakbrook Terrace, Illinois, for $92 million in cash. InteliStaf provides nurses, allied healthcare professionals and other medical professionals to healthcare facilities through its per diem, travel nurse and vendor management services divisions.

Upon the closing of the transaction, Medical Staffing Network will become the third largest healthcare staffing company in the country. The transaction is subject to customary closing conditions, including regulatory approval, and is expected to close in the second or third quarter of 2007.

Commenting on the InteliStaf transaction, Robert J. Adamson, Medical Staffing Network’s chairman and chief executive officer, said, “The combination of the largest and second largest providers of per diem nurse staffing will allow us to offer clients and healthcare professionals an unparalleled level of service. We are equally excited about the addition of InteliStaf’s travel nurse staffing and vendor management services business units, which will be highly complementary to our core per diem nurse staffing business. This transaction will enable us to offer a diverse range of quality staffing solutions to healthcare organizations. The expertise contributed by InteliStaf’s management team and employees to the combined companies will enhance our near and long-term market share and profitability objectives. The acquisition is a significant fit with Medical Staffing Network’s current operations and creates an opportunity for us to increase the scale of our operations and enhance our operating income.”

Michael Wilstead, InteliStaf’s chief executive officer, said, “Combining two of the largest healthcare staffing companies will provide our clients a fully integrated solution that includes per diem, travel and vendor management services with greater access to highly qualified healthcare professionals. We are excited about joining the Medical Staffing Network team and believe that this transaction will allow us to better meet the unique requirements and expectations of our clients, healthcare professionals and administrative personnel.”

Medical Staffing Network intends to finance the transaction with $155 million senior secured credit facilities consisting of a six-year $30 million revolving credit facility, a six-year $100 million term loan and a seven-year $25 million second lien term loan. These funds will be used to refinance Medical Staffing Network’s existing debt, finance the acquisition of InteliStaf and provide for working capital and general company purposes. The financing is subject to customary closing conditions.

About Medical Staffing Network Holdings, Inc.

Medical Staffing Network Holdings, Inc. is the largest provider of per diem nurse staffing services in the United States as measured by revenues. The Company also provides travel nurse staffing services and is a leading provider of allied health professionals, such as radiology and diagnostic imaging specialists, clinical laboratory specialists, rehabilitation specialists, pharmacists and respiratory therapists and other similar healthcare vocations.

About InteliStaf Holdings, Inc.

InteliStaf Holdings, Inc., headquartered in Oakbrook Terrace, Illinois, is one of the largest healthcare staffing companies in the United States, operating nearly 70 offices and supporting more than 25,000 medical professionals. The privately held company provides nurses, allied healthcare professionals, and other medical professionals to healthcare facilities on a temporary and contract basis. InteliStaf is at the forefront of vendor management services (VMS), creating and directing innovative solutions designed to meet its customers’ specific contract labor, patient care, and financial requirements. The company is the nationally recognized leader for such services. For more information, visit www.intelistaf.com.

This release contains statements that are forward-looking in nature. Statements that are predictive in nature, that depend upon or refer to future events or conditions or that include words such as “expects,””anticipates,””intends,””plans,””believes,””estimates,” and similar expressions are forward-looking statements. These statements involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors that may cause our actual results and performance to be materially different from any future results or performance expressed or implied by these forward-looking statements. These factors include the following: our ability to increase revenues, market share or profitability; our ability to continue to generate significant amounts of cash flow from operations; our ability to sustain the improved self insurance claims experience; our ability to attract and retain qualified nurses and other healthcare personnel; the overall level of demand for services provided by temporary healthcare professionals; our ability to enter into and maintain contracts with hospital and healthcare facility clients on terms attractive to us; our ability to maintain the improvement in the spread between bill and pay rates; our ability to maintain the reduction in the cost of capital resulting from the amended credit facility; our ability to obtain additional financing, if required, in future periods; willingness of hospital and healthcare facility clients to utilize temporary healthcare staffing services; the general level of patient occupancy at our hospital and healthcare facility clients; the functioning of our information systems; the effect of existing or future government regulation and federal and state legislative and enforcement initiatives on our business including Joint Commission accreditation; our clients’ ability to pay us for our services; our ability to successfully implement our acquisition and integration strategies; the proposed acquisition may take longer to close than expected if at all; the proposed transaction may not close due to the failure of any of the closing conditions to occur, such as the failure to receive regulatory approval or the requisite stockholder vote; our ability to recognize the benefits of the proposed transaction; the effect of liabilities and other claims asserted against us; the effect of competition in the markets we serve; our ability to carry out our business strategy; the departure of key officers and management personnel; and the effect of our recognition of an impairment to goodwill, if any. Additional information concerning these and other important factors can be found within our filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission. Statements in this release should be evaluated in light of these important factors. Although we believe that these statements are based upon reasonable assumptions, we cannot guarantee future results. Given these uncertainties, the forward-looking statements discussed in this press release might not occur.

Tourette’s Patients Learn to `Surf the Urge’

RALEIGH, N.C. _ Rick Shocket sits on the floor of his Cary, N.C., bedroom, absorbed in building his latest Lego Bionicles creature. His concentration is interrupted by soft, hiccuplike squeaks that periodically escape his throat _ the only hint that he is anything other than a typical 9-year-old boy.

Rick has Tourette’s syndrome. A year ago, he could hardly cross a room. With nearly every step, he felt compelled to do a deep knee bend _ a strange dance that left him frustrated and exhausted at the end of each day. “Every time I went anywhere it was like, squat, squat, squat,” said Rick, whose tics include an assortment of sniffs, coughs, yips, fidgets and twitches. “I could never get anywhere.”

Over the past eight months, Rick has learned to do what many thought was impossible for people who have Tourette’s syndrome, a brain disorder that causes repetitive movements and sounds. Using willpower to change his behavior, Rick has become part of a revolution in treatment of the disorder.

By focusing on his tics, he is routinely able to recognize the warning signs that precede them and then resist the urge to perform them. Since starting behavioral therapy at a Duke University Medical Center clinic, he has dramatically reduced unwanted sounds and motions. Equally compelling, he has come off all the prescription medications he once took to control symptoms.

It’s a controversial development. For decades, Tourette’s patients have been told that tics are involuntary and that they should do their best to ignore them. Habit-reversal training, the type of behavioral therapy Rick does, preaches the exact opposite. It instructs patients to be hyper-aware of tics so they can learn to anticipate and suppress them.

Duke has been a leader in establishing behavioral therapy as a treatment for children who have neurocognitive conditions such as obsessive-compulsive disorder.

Rick’s parents say the behavioral approach has given them confidence their son can live a full life _ something Clare and Abe Shocket couldn’t say more than a year ago, when Rick was diagnosed.

“He hasn’t squatted since September,” said Clare Shocket, who says she would have tried behavioral therapy before drugs if she had known it was an option. “I’ve tried to figure out why more people don’t rush out and do this.”

Tourette’s syndrome was once considered a rare disorder occurring in no more than five of every 10,000 people. Today, it is thought to affect one in 100 people, largely because physicians are more likely to recognize even mild cases. The most severe cases, which include the infamous but rare symptom of shouting obscenities, occur in perhaps 200,000 Americans, according to the National Institute of Neurological Disorder and Stroke.

To be diagnosed with Tourette’s, a patient must have multiple motor tics and at least one vocal tic for at least a year.

“There’s a big severity spectrum,” said Dr. Jarrett Barnhill, a specialist in tic disorders and director of the Developmental Neuropharmacology Clinic at the University of North Carolina Hospitals in Chapel Hill. “There are kids who meet the diagnostic criteria for tics, but if you weren’t looking for them, you might not think anything of it.”

Doctors no longer think of Tourette’s as a mental illness but as an inherited neurological condition. It occurs in boys up to four times more often than in girls, with symptoms usually appearing between the ages of 7 and 10.

Tourette’s usually accompanies one or more related problems such as autism, anxiety, attention-deficit difficulties, impulse-control issues and obsessive-compulsive disorder. Research suggests this spectrum of neurocognitive disorders is genetically linked, but scientists have only started to identify the genes involved.

“It’s a complex disorder,” Barnhill said. “It stands to reason that the cause is also complex.”

For years, the Shockets tried to overlook Rick’s odd behaviors.

At 4, he coughed all the time, even though he wasn’t sick. At the same age, Rick also frequently performed a routine of sniffing hard, hitching up his trousers and kicking out one leg. A family friend once told Clare Shocket she ought to get her son tested for Tourette’s syndrome. She was offended.

“To me, Tourette’s was this wacky thing where people yelled and cursed,” she said. “To me (Tourette’s) was an ugly thing and an ugly word.”

Not that the Shockets hadn’t wondered about Rick’s idiosyncrasies. His pediatrician assured Clare Shocket that tics are common in small children, and he would likely outgrow them.

When Rick was 7, Shocket started to pay closer attention to her son’s tics after seeing a segment on television about the disorder and watching a documentary on it, called “I Have Tourette’s but Tourette’s Doesn’t Have Me.”

“After the first two minutes, I said, `That’s Rick,'” Shocket said. The next moment, she was in tears. “Here I had been thinking he had a passing problem with tics _ I didn’t know he had a lifelong brain disorder. My first thoughts were, `Will he have friends? Who will he go to the prom with?'”

Shocket watched the documentary a second time with her husband, who was equally shaken.

“At the time we didn’t know what to expect,” Abe Shocket said. “He couldn’t even put a sock on if the seam didn’t lay just right. Was it going to get worse?”

Around the same time, Rick himself was becoming alarmed at the role tics had assumed in his life. Classmates complained about the constant symphony coming from him. He wanted to stop the sounds and movements but couldn’t. One day after school, Rick approached his mother.

“Mom, I need help. I’m having a problem with some noises,” Clare Shocket remembers him saying.

Within weeks, the Shockets had an appointment with Barnhill, the University of North Carolina-Chapel Hill doctor who specializes in tic disorders. He confirmed that Rick had Tourette’s and also diagnosed anxiety, attention-deficit problems and obsessive-compulsive disorder. The latter condition is deeply entwined with Rick’s Tourette’s. Many tics he experiences must be completed a certain number of times for him to feel “right.”

Barnhill prescribed a variety of medications, but many triggered side effects, including drowsiness and weight gain. Clare Shocket searched for different treatments. Cognitive behavioral therapy was one of the first alternatives she came across.

When she mentioned the idea of therapy to doctors in Barnhill’s clinic, they were supportive. They pointed her to Dr. John March, who is chief of adolescent and child psychiatry at Duke Hospital and a national leader in the use of cognitive behavioral therapy with children. March led a major national study, published in 2004, that showed such therapy to be better than medicine alone at managing symptoms of obsessive-compulsive disorder. He formally established a program specializing in tic disorders last summer.

Rick Shocket was one of the first patients. The therapy is deceptively simple.

First, Rick identified the tics he most wanted to control. He listed his squat, his squeaks and coughs, and tics that caused him to jerk his neck and look away from people mid-conversation.

Then he was instructed to concentrate on feelings or sensations that occur right before a tic. Many Tourette’s patients feel a building tension or feeling of intense discomfort, like an itch that must be scratched, that can only be relieved by expressing a tic. Rick felt an itchy sensation in his legs right before he’d do a squat.

Once he had learned to recognize the signs a tic was imminent, Rick devised a competing action or response that would make it difficult or impossible to tic. To block the squat, for example, Rick decided he would lock his knees. For squeaking and coughing, he would initiate slow breathing. If he felt the urge to look away, he’d clamp his upper arms to his torso.

For a while, Rick’s tics got worse, which was a natural response to focusing on them. But within a month, Rick was using his competing actions to suppress tics. Suddenly walking across the room wasn’t such a daunting task.

After about five weekly sessions at Duke, Rick moved on to the most advanced phase of therapy, in which patients learn to resist tics without having to perform competing motions. His therapist calls it “surfing the urge.”

“There’s this feeling like, `You’ve got to do this, you’ve got to do this,'” Rick said in describing how he uses the approach. “But then you say, `OK, I need to do this. But not right now. Maybe later.'”

More than eight months after starting therapy, Rick can usually block his tics so effectively it is often difficult to tell he has Tourette’s. He stopped taking drugs to control his tics months ago, though he still takes medicine to help with anxiety.

Even in the most motivated patients, behavioral therapy is not a cure for Tourette’s, which is considered a lifelong disorder.

“It’s not realistic to think you’re going to leave the patient tic free,” said Stephanie Best, a therapist and Duke doctoral candidate in child psychology who works with Rick. “But you can give the patient ways to manage so they don’t feel like this is something that is just happening to them.”

The Shockets are the first to acknowledge that behavioral therapy isn’t perfect. Even when it’s working well, Rick sometimes comes home from school and unleashes a torrent of tics, as if he saved up all that he suppressed. And he has had at least two serious lapses. Rick insists he is still trying to “surf the urge” and refuse to tic.

“Some of them are just harder than others to resist,” he said.

During the most recent lapse, which occurred in March, his vocal tics were so bad he seemed to gasp for air with every breath, Clare Shocket said. His third-grade teacher remarked that, for the first time, it was obvious that Rick has Tourette’s. Clare Shocket briefly considered putting her son back on medication.

“I was scared we were going to go all the way back to the top again,” she said.

But now, Rick’s tics seem to be on the wane again _ a pattern the family is slowly beginning to recognize and expect.

“It appears to be something that’s not the end of the world,” Abe Shocket said. “The tics come and go. Every month that goes by, it seems more likely that he’ll be able to have a normal life.”

___

CHANGE THOUGHTS, CHANGE BEHAVIOR

Cognitive behavioral therapy, or CBT, is an umbrella term that describes a particular approach to resolving myriad social and behavioral problems.

The approach, pioneered in the 1950s and 1960s, holds that patients can get better by learning to become aware of negative thoughts and behaviors and then consciously working to change them. CBT has been tested in hundreds of clinical trials and found effective in treating everything from anxiety and depression to insomnia and obesity.

In recent years, studies have shown a subtype of CBT, called habit-reversal training, reduces symptoms with neurocognitive disorders traditionally thought to be biological and thus outside the patient’s control. Habit-reversal therapy is an established treatment for obsessive-compulsive disorder and, more recently, has been used for patients with Tourette’s syndrome. Some recent milestones:

2004: A national study led by Duke University child psychiatrist Dr. John March reports that behavioral therapy, or a combination of therapy and medication, is more effective than drugs alone at reducing symptoms in children with obsessive-compulsive disorder.

2005: Researchers in California, Maryland and Wisconsin launch the first large clinical trial to test behavioral therapy in children with tic disorders, including Tourette’s syndrome. It is still under way.

MARCH 2007: The Duke psychiatrist publishes data from his earlier study that suggest children with tic disorders in addition to obsessive-compulsive disorder also responded best to behavioral therapy or a mix of medicine and therapy.

_National Institute of Mental Health; www.clinicaltrials.gov; News & Observer Research

___

(c) 2007, The News & Observer (Raleigh, N.C.).

Visit The News & Observer online at http://www.newsobserver.com/

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

_____

PHOTOS (from MCT Photo Service, 202-383-6099): MED-TOURETTES

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA. 1043905

Family Sues Burger’s Lake Over Death COURTS

By Max B. Baker, Fort Worth Star-Telegram, Texas

May 10–Burger’s Lake, Fort Worth’s popular private swimming hole, is being sued by the family of a 39-year-old man who drowned there two years ago.

Described as a “healthy, experienced swimmer,” Phillip Flores was swimming with his brother and a friend in July 2005 when he “exhibited distress and then slipped below the surface,” the lawsuit states.

Flores’ family contends that Burger’s Lake did not have enough policies, practices and procedures in place to help the drowning man even after his companions tried to lift him to the surface, the lawsuit says.

Flores’ body was recovered by lifeguards who dived to the bottom from rowboats. They took his body to shore and administered cardiopulmonary resuscitation and other lifesaving measures, court records show.

Authorities later said that Flores had been underwater for about five minutes.

Officials at Burger’s Lake, which is scheduled to reopen for the summer this weekend, did not return a phone call seeking comment.

Burger’s Lake is a 30-acre facility that features a spring-fed, 1-acre pool with six diving boards, a 20-foot slide and a 25-foot trapeze, and two beaches. It is at 1200 Meandering Road in northwest Fort Worth, near Naval Air Station Fort Worth.

The lawsuit is the second against Burger’s Lake in recent years.

Last year, a suit was filed by the mother of Tommy Lot, 18, a Venus High School senior who drowned at Burger’s Lake.

Lot was on a senior class trip with about 100 classmates in May 2006. His body was found at the bottom of the water by a swimmer. The swimmer notified the lifeguards, and, according to the lawsuit, Lot was alive when he was pulled from the water. The lawsuit says Burger’s employees failed to use the necessary lifesaving techniques to revive him.

Lot died at the hospital.

In court documents, attorneys for Burger’s Lake owner Jimmy Dent denied the allegations. The case is set for trial early next year.

The attorney for the family in the Lot case did not return calls seeking comment.

——

Max B. Baker, 817-390-7714 [email protected]

—–

Copyright (c) 2007, Fort Worth Star-Telegram, Texas

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

Genes, Environments & Behaviors

By Ehrlich, Paul; Feldman, Marcus W

Our large brains are surely at the center of our humanity. But it is equally certain that few organs are the subject of more misinformation in scientific and public discourse – especially in the widespread notion that most behaviors controlled by our marvelous brain are somehow programmed into it genetically.

A typical treatment in the popular press is this overexcited claim by columnist Nicholas Wade in the New York Times : “When… [the human genome].. .is fully translated, it will prove the ultimate thriller – the indisputable guide to the graces and horrors of human nature, the creations and cruelties of the human mind, the unbearable light and darkness of being.”1

Wade may get a pass for being a journalist, but some scientists are equally confused. Molecular biologist Dean Hamer wrote : “People are different because they have different genes that created different brains that formed different personalities,” and ” [ujnderstanding the genetic roots of personality will help you ‘find yourself and relate better to others.” As distinguished a neurobiologist as Michael Gazzaniga is guilty of the misleading claim that “all behavioral traits are heritable”;2 and molecular evolutionists Roderick Page and Edward Holmes have asserted that “genes control 62% of our cognitive ability. “3 In fact, an entire neo-field labeled evolutionary psychology has sprung up based on the misconception that genes are somehow determining our everyday behavior and our personalities. It is a field that believes there are genetic evolutionary answers to such questions as why a man driving an expensive car is more attractive than one driving a cheap car.4

So even well-educated and thoughtful observers have been persuaded by the language of heritability. With expressions such as ‘genes are responsible for 50 percent of,’ or ‘genes contribute 50 percent of,’ a behavior, this language gives the impression that genetic and environmental contributions to human behaviors are actually separable. They are not.

Heritability was originally introduced in the 19305 in the context of agriculture. It is an index of amenability to selective breeding under environmental conditions that the breeder could control. This index, now often termed ‘narrowsense heritability/ is the fraction of all variation in a trait that can be ascribed only to genes that act independently of one another and whose joint effect is the sum of their individual effects. One easy-to- understand way of measuring heritability is through a one- generation selection experiment. Individuals with extreme values of a trait are bred to one another – for example, the heaviest individuals from a hog population. The offspring are then raised in the same environment, and their average weight calculated. If the average weight of the offspring doesn’t increase over that of the entire population (not just of the heavy parents) in the previous generation, the heritability is zero. On the other hand, if the average weight of the offspring equals that of their heavy parents, the heritability is 100 percent.

In the 1960s, the term ‘heritability’ was adopted by some students of human behaviors who wanted to know what fraction of the variation in these behaviors was primarily attributable to genetic differences and what percentage to environmental differences. Because controlling the environments of human subjects is not possible, however, this fraction – now called ‘broad-sense heritability’ – includes variation from interactions between genes and environments. That fraction of variation is nevertheless interpreted as determined by genes, thus inflating the heritability.

In other words, this new heritability statistic assumes no relationship between genetic transmission and environment, e.g., that the IQ scores of parents cannot affect those parts of the environment that might interact with genes to influence a child’s IQ. The amount of stimulation parents provide their young children, the nature of dinner-table conversations, and the number of books in the home are thus taken to be independent of any genetic influences on children’s IQ. When this independence assumption is violated, there is gene-environment correlation – exactly the correlation that agricultural experiments to estimate narrow-sense heritability eliminated by holding environments constant. But with human behaviors such designs are impossible, and the correlation between parental IQ and the offspring’s environment may contribute to the heritability.

Many of the high estimates for heritability, and the resulting interpretation that human behavioral traits are heavily influenced by genes, have been derived from comparisons of identical twins (who originate from a single fertilized egg) and fraternal twins (from two eggs). These estimates are based on the fact that identical twins share exactly the same hereditary endowment, while fraternal twins, on average, share only 50 percent of their genes.

But many assumptions about twins inflate twin-based estimates of broadsense heritability. One is the ‘equal environments’ assumption, that variation in environments created by parents to which identical twin pairs are exposed is the same as those to which fraternal pairs are exposed – i.e., that there is no difference between the way parents treat identical and fraternal twins. Statistical estimates of the differences in the environmental exposure of identical and fraternal twins outside of the parental contribution, however, are not usually made. Some studies have found that the correlation between IQ and the environments not transmitted by the parents of identical twins is much higher than that of fraternal twins.5 Thus, factors in the nonfamilial environment of identical twins are often more similar than those of fraternal twins, but this difference between identical and fraternal twins is usually ignored.

It might be thought that some of the problems with twin studies may be overcome if the identical twins under study were reared apart, that is, in different families. In a perfect experiment of this kind, all observed differences between the twins should be environmental, and high levels of similarity of the pair should be due to their identical genes. It turns out not to be so simple. First, separated twin pairs are rare, and the reasons for the separation are not usually known. second, the twins share the prenatal environment of the ovary, fallopian tube, and uterus, which could be very influential in producing similar developmental pathways. Third, the separation is frequently carried out well after birth so some shared early postnatal environmental effects could mistakenly be interpreted as genetic. Fourth, twins have often been placed in separate homes that are similar in aspects that may be important for the traits under study, for example, in homes of relatives of their parents. The environments are thus not a random sample of all possible environments. Kamin and Goldberger documented these problems with the wellpublicized Minnesota study of twins reared apart.6 All of these effects add to that component of variation that is interpreted as genetic, with the result that estimates of genetic heritability based on identical twins raised separately are biased upward.

At first glance, some of the stories of the similarities of identical twins raised separately seem extraordinary examples of the power of genetic identity. Two men separated near birth grow up to be beer-drinking firelighters and grasp the beer cans in the same unusual way, holding the little finger under the can.7 But they were raised in similar lower middle-class Jewish homes in New Jersey. Being a firefighter is an ambition of many males, and firefighters are not notorious for being addicted to wine. Furthermore, it is well known that physical attributes of people greatly influence how other people treat them. Individuals with identical genomes are usually strikingly alike in appearance, and within the same culture they will be treated more similarly than randomly selected individuals of the same gender from the same occupational and age groups. Resemblance in body structure (strong in identical twins) would probably also make it comfortable to hold containers in the same manner, and we doubt if even the most dedicated hereditarian would seek a gene for use of the pinky in beer drinking.

Ever since narrow-sense heritability was first used, it has been well understood by geneticists that an estimate of the genetic influence on a trait’s variability depends on the particular population and the particular environment in which the trait was measured. Furthermore, even a very high heritability measured in a population cannot be used to infer something about any single member of that population. Suppose a population is known to have higher than average blood pressure. Would a physician treating one individual patient from that population prescribe an antihypertensive drug on the basis of the population statistic? Of course not – a doctor would use detailed history and laboratory workup to decide on the appropriate treatment for that particular patient. The patient’s diet or stress level (the environment) would be critical to the medical recommendation and, in most cases, likely to overwhelm any genetic effect inferred from population studies. The logic of using the heritability of some trait in a \population to predict something about a member of that population would be foolish.

Recent studies of intelligence in samples of twins of different socioeconomic status strongly reinforce these restrictions on the generalization of heritability. For example, the estimated heritability of IQ in individuals from advantaged backgrounds is significantly higher than in those from disadvantaged backgrounds.8 That is because better environments allow more variance in IQ to be expressed : potential geniuses have trouble developing into Einsteins in slums without schools. Likewise, the heritability of height in a normal human population would be greater than that in a starved one, where everyone’s growth is stunted and the variance in height thereby reduced.

Individuals with Down syndrome, caused by an entire additional chromosome 21 (trisomy), develop as severely mentally handicapped if given no special treatment. But it turns out that the degree of handicap is extremely labile to the environment of rearing.9 In fact, the day may come when an environment can be provided in which their development will be entirely normal. Moreover, not even evolutionary psychologists have proposed that chromosome 21 is the locus of ‘the intelligence gene.’

Such important gene-environment interactions preclude the partition of variation in traits like trisomy, IQ, or height into genetic and nongenetic influences. It is especially inappropriate to talk about genetic ‘contributions’ to such complex traits when in some environments genetic variation is not even detectable. It is equally incorrect to say, ‘characteristic A is more influenced by nature than nurture,’ as it is to say, ‘the area of a rectangle is more influenced by its length than its width.’ (Note that the area of a rectangle one hundred miles long and one inch wide is halved by reducing its length by fifty miles or by reducing the width by half an inch.)

None of this should be taken to mean that genes do not affect behavior. In fact, in a sense, they influence all behavior, at least by laying out how human capabilities differ from those of other primates. If genes did not, in the course of development, interact with pre- and postnatal environments to generate the brain some of the major patterns of its organization, and its principal modes of interaction with hormonal systems – the human behaviors that interest us would not occur at all. Genomic disparities between species doubtless influence differences in the general configuration of the systems that control behavior.

But it is clear from the long pre- and (especially) postnatal environmental programming that these systems must undergo to produce a behaviorally ‘normal’ person that genes are not responsible for embedding detailed instructions on how to act, or even ‘tendencies’ toward certain kinds of behavior. Environmental inputs are so extensive that the cortex of the brain is not fully developed until the mid-twenties. In view of this, it’s not surprising that nothing indicates that genes favored by selection while our ancestors were hunter-gatherers significantly influence such contemporary individual behavioral characteristics as choice of beers or marriage partners.

For many behavioral traits, especially serious psychiatric disorders, some individual genes have been shown to play a role in some environments but not in others. Consider research by psychologist Avshalom Caspi and his colleagues on the effects of having different forms of a gene involved in the transport of serotonin, a compound that is involved in transmitting signals along certain nerve pathways. Which form an individual possesses apparently influences whether stressful events will produce depression. Having the ‘wrong’ gene, however, only makes a difference if an individual is exposed to a stressful environment early in adult life – a beautiful example of gene-environment interaction.10

Many other cases illuminate the failure of genes to ‘control’ behavior. The original Siamese twins, Chang and Eng, were joined for life by a narrow band of tissue connecting their chests. Despite their identical genomes, they had very different personalities. One was an alcoholic, the other sober; one was dominant, the other submissive. Equally fascinating is the story of the Dionne quintuplets, five genetically identical little girls who, in the 19305, were essentially raised in a laboratory under the supervision of a psychologist. When the girls were only five, the psychologist wrote a book that expressed his astonishment at how different the little girls were – something confirmed by their very different life trajectories. One had epilepsy, the others did not; some died young, the others old; some married, others remained single ; and so on. Similarly, the identical Marks triplets grew up with different sexual orientations, two straight and one gay ; one of the two identical Ferez girls chose to change her sex with hormones and surgery and married a woman, while the other twin remained female and married a man.11

But one does not even have to look at such extreme cases to see that genes are not controlling human actions ; evidence that common behaviors are not genetically determined is superabundant. Perhaps the most impressive comes from thousands of cross-cultural ‘experiments’ in which children from one culture are raised from an early age by adoptive parents from another. Invariably, the children mature with the language and attitudes of the adoptive culture.

Also impressive is the ease with which culture overrides the only ‘commandment’ we can be sure is contained in everyone’s DNA: ensure that your genes are maximally represented in the next generation, either by having more children or by helping your relatives (who tend to have the same genes) to reproduce. Differential reproduction of genetically different individuals (not explicable by chance) is natural selection, the creative force in evolution. We wouldn’t be here if our ancestors hadn’t been effective reproducers of their genes, if they hadn’t had high ‘fitness.’ But culture (part of the environment) has led human beings to limit their reproduction as far back in history as we can trace, all the way to the ancient Egyptians who used crocodile-dung suppositories as contraceptives (which we are convinced were very effective I).12 Indeed, although evolutionary psychologists like to imagine that rapists are programmed to assault women in order to reproduce themselves – that is, to increase their fitness – over half of all rapes occur in circumstances (e.g., victims too old or too young, no ejaculation into the vagina) where fertilization is impossible, and in more than a fifth of cases more force is used than would be required to achieve the supposed reproductive goal.13

Most definitive, though, is the problem of gene shortage.14 Our roughly twenty-five thousand genes can’t possibly code all of our separate everyday behaviors into the human genome. After all, we have less than twice as many as required to make a fruit fly, and just a few more than those that lay out the ground plan of a simple roundworm. Even if the human brain had not evolved for flexibility but instead were programmed for stereotypic behavior, our genes couldn’t store enough information to accomplish it. Genes are not little beads with instructions like ‘grow up gay’ engraved on them. They are instructions that, in a very complex mechanism, can be translated into a sequence of amino acid residues in a protein. It is near miraculous that these proteins interacting with each other, functioning in different physical, physiological, and social environments, and helping to control the production of other proteins – are able to produce an entire human body and the basic scaffolding for a brain with a trillion or so nerve cells (neurons) connected to each other by tens of trillions of intricate junctions (synapses). On average, each gene must influence many characteristics. There are obviously enough genes, interacting with each other and with diverse environments at all scales, to provide a brain that can generate all observed human behaviors. But this has confused some observers into thinking that because one gene normally affects many functions there is no gene shortage.

That fact is actually the basts of calling it gene shortage. It means that natural selection altering the genome to encode one behavior would inevitably change other aspects of the genome as well – so that selection increasing, say, the speed of contraction of muscle fibers would quite possibly modify the connections between some neurons that, say, transmit visual information from the retina to the brain. Because of the small number of genes in the human genome and the ubiquity of interactions between proteins and between proteins and environments, natural selection must ordinarily entrain a multiplicity of changes. It must operate on a genome enormously ‘amplified’ in development by the multiple uses of the proteins produced by single genes, by the alternative ways the proteins are assembled, by the small RNA molecules that often control the expression of multiple genes, and by the epigenetic phenomena that may have differing effects even on identical genotypes.15

This may be why it has been so difficult to demonstrate that natural selection has changed more than a tiny fraction of genes during the transition from chimpanzee to modern human being. Changing just a few genes can have effects that totally transform an entire organism. Thus, most population geneticists – remembering linkage, pleiotropy, epistasis, and developmental complexity – reject evolutionary psychology as a theoretical paradigm : its predictions ignore how difficult gene-gene and geneenvironment interactions make it for selection to operate on just one phenotypic attribute. If we had trillions of largely independent genes, then it might be possible for selection(were it strong enough and time available long enough) to program us to rape, be honest, detect cheaters, excel at calculus, or vote Republican. But the number of independent genes is much smaller than twenty-five thousand.

Perhaps the most interesting thing about aU the attention paid to whether nature or nurture controls behaviors is not that individuals with identical genomes often behave very differently, but that those same individuals exposed to extremely similar environments also turn out to behave quite differently. This has been clearly demonstrated in mice, where genetically uniform strains exposed to laboratory environments made as identical as possible still behaved differently.16 Indeed, nonidentical human siblings, who share half of their genes, the same parents, and apparently very similar environments, often seem more unalike than unrelated people drawn from the same population. Think of all the ‘isn’t it weird that Johnny and Sammy Smith are so different’ anecdotes many more, it seems to us, than ‘isn’t it weird that Johnny and Sammy Smith are so similar.’

If genes don’t ‘determine’ our behavior, how can it be that obvious aspects of our (or mice’s) environments don’t either? We don’t know for sure, but we can make some guesses. One is that researchers have not yet identified key environmental variables that are subtle to them but central to a behaving organism – be it a mouse with a genome that makes it love alcohol or Johnny trying to get along with Sammy. Another is that prenatal influences may put genetically similar (or identical) individuals on quite different behavioral trajectories. There is a tendency to think, first there’s fertilization, and then some nine months later a baby pops out. But, of course, an incredibly complex series of events takes place during those nine months: cellcell, tissue-tissue, and organ-organ interactions ; pulses of hormones ; responses to pleasant and unpleasant stimuli such as voices heard through the uterine wall ; and in some cases interactions with another fetus in the womb. Studies have already shown what dramatic effects prenatal environments can have. For instance, young female fetuses whose mothers had minimal diets during the Dutch famine of World War II grew up into women who were more obese than those whose mothers were well fed ; they also had higher levels of ‘bad’ cholesterol. As more is learned about environmental influences in the womb it seems likely that many of the differences between siblings could be discovered to have prenatal origins.

Could there be another source of the sometimes dramatic differences among siblings, including identical twins? We hypothesize that there may be a ‘sibling bifurcation’ phenomenon, in which individuals having close relationships with others early in life, either pre- or postnatal, often seek different life courses. This could be related to such things as a kin-recognition/ inbreeding avoidance system; attempts by parents, siblings, teachers, and peers to distinguish related individuals ; genetic differences (between fraternal twins) ; birth-order effects ; and so on.

We now know more than enough about the human genome and human development to see that the notion of ‘genes for behaviors’ is misguided. For complex traits such as normal behaviors, few cases have been found where a specific gene, or even many genes, greatly influences variation in the trait. It is clear that when genes influence traits, including behaviors, they only do so in ways that are affected by environments. Thus environments during any phase of life might alter the way in which an individual’s genes function in those environments. This is, of course, a tribute to the marvelous plasticity of the human brain, which neurobiologists know changes in response to external and internal environments throughout life. It also makes ridiculous the claim that genes program our behaviors or, indeed, that genes are responsible for some specified fraction of any human behavior.

1 The authors thank Richard Lewontin, Deborah Rogers, Robert Sapolsky, and Michael Soule for their comments on earlier versions of the manuscript. N. Wade, “Ideas and Trends : The Story of Us ; The Other secrets of the Genome,” New York Times, February 18, zooi, sec. 4,3.

2 M. S. Gazzaniga, The Ethical Brain (New York: Dana Press, 2005), 44.

3 R. D. M. Page and E. C. Holmes, Molecular Evolution : A Phylogenetic Approach (Oxford : Blackwell, 1998), 119.

4 D. M. Buss, The Evolution of Human Desire (New York: BasicBooks, 1994), 99-100.

5 C. R. Cloninger, J. Rice, and T. Reich, “MuItifactorial Inheritance with Cultural Transmission and Assortative Mating,” American Journal of Human Genetics 31 (1979) : 176 -198 ; M. W. Feldman and S. Otto, “Twin Studies, Heritability and Intelligence,” Science 278 (1997): 1383-1384.

6 L. J. Kamin and A. S. Goldberger, “Twin Studies in Behavioral Research : A Skeptical View,” Theoretical Population Biology 61 (2002) : 83-95.

7 N. L. Segal, Indivisible by Two : Lives of Extraordinary Twins (Cambridge, Mass. : Harvard University Press, 2005).

8 E. Turkheimer, A. Haley, M. Waldron, B. D’Onofrio, and 1.1. Gottesman, “Socioeconomic Status Modifies Heritability of IQ in Young Children,” Psychological Science 14 (2003): 623-628.

9 R. I. Brown, “Down Syndrome and Quality of Life : Some Challenges for Future Practice,” Down Syndrome Research and Practice 2 (1994) : 19-30; N. J. Roizen and D. Patterson, “Down’s Syndrome,” The Lancet 361 (2003): 1281-1289.

10 M. Rutter, Genes and Behavior : Nature-Nurture Interplay Explained (Oxford: Blackwell, 2005).

11 Segal, Indivisible by Two : Lives of Extraordinary Twins.

12 L. Manniche, Sexual Life in Ancient Egypt (New York : Kegan Paul, 1997).

13 J. Coyne, “Of Vice and Men : A case Study in Evolutionary Psychology,” in Evolution, Gender, and Rape, ed. C. Travis (Cambridge, Mass. : MIT Press, 2003), 171 -189.

14 P. R. Ehrlich, Human Natures : Genes, Cultures, and the Human Prospect (Washington, D.C. : Island Press, 2000) ; P. R. Ehrlich and M. W. Feldman, “Genes and Cultures : What Creates Our Behavioral Phenome?” Current Anthropology 44 (2003) : 87 -107.

15 M. F. Fraga et al., “Epigenetic Differences Arise During the Lifetime of Monozygotic Twins,” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 102 (zoos): 10604-10609.

16 J. C. Crabbe, D. Wahlsten, and B. C. Dudek, “Genetics of Mouse Behavior: Interactions with Laboratory Environment,” Science 284 (1999) : 1670 -1672.

Paul Ehrlich, a Fellow of the American Academy since 1982, is Bing Professor of Population Studies and president of the Center for Conservation Biology at Stanford University. He is the author of numerous publications, including “The Population Bomb” (1968), “The End of Affluence” (with Anne H. Ehriich, 1974), “Human Natures : Genes, Culture, and the Human Prospect” (2000), and “One with Nineveh : Politics, Consumption, and the Human Future” (with Anne H. Ehrlich, 2004).

Marcus W. Feldman, a Fellow of the American Academy since 1987, is Burnet C. and Mildred Finky Wohlford Professor and director of the Mormon Institute for Population and Resource Studies at Stanford University. He has published extensively in scientific journals such as “Science,””Nature,” and “Evolution. ” His current research interests include the evolution of complex genetic systems that can undergo both natural selection and recombination; human molecular evolution; and the interaction of biological and cultural evolution.

2007 by the American Academy of Arts & Sciences

Copyright MIT Press Spring 2007

Teacher Charged With Sex Assault of Two of His 9th-Grade Students

By Larry King, The Philadelphia Inquirer

May 9–A Bucks County middle school teacher has been charged with sexually assaulting two of his ninth-grade students after propositioning the girls over the Internet and on their cell phones.

Jeffrey Anderson, 23, of Northeast Philadelphia, was arrested Monday night and charged with crimes including involuntary deviate sexual intercourse, aggravated indecent assault, and criminal use of communications devices.

Anderson had been the building substitute at Tohickon Middle School in Plumstead Township. Detectives pulled him out of his classroom Monday for questioning, and he provided a 14-page confession, court records say.

Anderson was fired immediately by the Central Bucks School District, where the La Salle University graduate had worked since 2005.

According to court records, Anderson admitted he kissed, fondled and digitally penetrated the girls, ages 15 and 14, inside the 15-year-old’s house on a recent Saturday afternoon. He also engaged in oral sex with the younger girl during the April 28 meeting, the records say.

If convicted of the most serious crimes, Anderson faces a mandatory minimum five years in state prison. He is being held in Bucks County prison in lieu of $500,000 bail.

The girls’ parents had been alerted by computer monitoring software that their daughters had been communicating with the teacher via instant messaging and Facebook.com personal Web sites, District Attorney Diane Gibbons said. They confronted the girls, who admitted engaging in sexual acts with Anderson, a probable-cause affidavit said.

Both girls had been in Anderson’s class, and had been messaging him outside of school for about a month. In some exchanges, Anderson told the girls he wanted to have sex with them, the affidavit says, and recently met with them in a Tohickon classroom and kissed them.

In an April 22 Facebook posting, Anderson pleaded with the girls to keep things quiet, the affidavit says.

“PLEASE . . . nothing that is said or done between the three of us can EVER be repeated to anyone else!!!” the message said. “Not your best friend, your diary, or any of those girls at school!! I could get fired, never become a teacher again. or go to jail. . .”

Five days later, after an explicit proposition to the girls on Facebook, Anderson allegedly added: “Hah . . . im so going to hell . . . I can’t believe I hooked up with two 9th graders!!”

On Saturday, April 28, the affidavit says, Anderson was text-messaging the girls on his cell phone when he learned the 15-year-old’s parents would be away for the day. At about 4 p.m., he parked his vehicle down the block from the girl’s house and met both girls inside, where they engaged in sexual acts.

A few days later, Anderson met the 14-year-old inside a Tohickon chorus room and kissed her, the affidavit said.

The parents of the girls had installed on the girls’ computers software called IamBigBrother. It gives parents the ability to capture and monitor incoming and outgoing e-mail, as well as Web sites visited, passwords entered, and basically everything typed, both online and offline. Gibbons said that the girls knew their parents were using this software.

The charges echo a 2003 case in which Ryan Newman, a popular young art teacher at neighboring Holicong Middle School, went to prison for at least five years after admitting to an affair with a 15-year-old student.

In that case, too, the victim’s parents were alerted by reading an instant-message thread their daughter had left on her computer. Newman was well-known among students for chatting online, and some even stopped by his apartment in Doylestown borough to socialize.

Like many districts, Central Bucks has a general policy prohibiting offensive contact or relationships between students and employees, but does not specifically ban fraternization outside of school.

In the case of predators, Gibbons said, a tougher policy might not matter. “I don’t think it would stop them,” she said.

Contact staff writer Larry King at 215-345-0446 or [email protected].

—–

Copyright (c) 2007, The Philadelphia Inquirer

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

Leprosy and Tuberculosis: An Insight-Review

By Hussain, Tahziba

A quick glance at this review article provides an insight into the common and different features of M. leprae and M. tuberculosis and the diseases caused by these organisms. Table I provides the popular names, history, stigma, description of the disease, clinical features, classification and the types of disease manifestations, who are affected, Signs and Symptoms, Clinical examination, treatment regimens, reactions, relapses, immunity, infectiousness, risk groups, deformities, sequelae, transmission, prevention, complications, vaccination, laboratory studies, days of importance for both the diseases. Table II provides information regarding the causative organisms, M. leprae and M. tuberculosis, their size, genome, protein coding region, lost genes, pseudogenes, classification, predilection, incubation period, ecology, cell structure, metabolism, resistance, bacterial index, growth in vitro, experimental animals, etc. Table HI provides figures of M. leprae and M. tuberculosis, their genome, Lepromin and Tuberculin testing, Global scenario, Indian scenario, colonies of M. leprae and M, tuberculosis, drugs for treatment of tuberculosis and leprosy (MDT blister pack), and so on.

Keywords Leprosy; tuberculosis; M. tuberculosis; M. leprae; Genome; disease; treatment

INTRODUCTION

M. tuberculosis and M. leprae have many features in common, few differences, yet the disease outcome is varied requiring prolonged treatment, from 6 months to 24 months, and the response to treatment is subject to wide individual variations and may range from manageable clinical conditions to confinement up to several days and sometimes fatal. A quick glance at this table provides an insight into the details between M. leprae and M. tuberculosis.

Leprosy

Ever since ancient times, leprosy has been one of the most hated diseases. Leprosy, also known as Hansen disease, is a chronic infectious disease that, if left untreated, can cause debilitating deformities and slowly progress throughout one’s life. Leprosy is characterized by peripheral nerve damage and cutaneous lesions. In order to contract the disease, one has to live in close contact with an infected individual for a prolonged amount of time. These physical effects paired with the social stigma of being infected with this dreaded disease, often lead to those affected being afraid to come forward to seek treatment in the early stages of the disease.

Leprosy is often found in conditions connected with poverty: overcrowding, poor sanitation, and insufficient nutrition). According to current WHO data, the current global prevalence rate is around 1.4 cases per 10,000 people. Around 500,000 new cases of leprosy are registered each year, about 300 of which are in the United States. WHO has mounted a campaign to try to eliminate Hansen’s disease. Elimination is defined as less than one case per 10,000 people. Of the 24 countries where leprosy is endemic, 12 will meet the elimination goal by the end of the year 2000. These countries include Cameroon, Chad, Congo, Cote d’Ivoire, Ethiopia, Gabon, Gambia, Guinea Bissau, Mali, Papua New Guinea, Paraguay, and Sierra Leone. The remaining twelve are Angola, Brazil, Central African Republic, Democratic Republic of the Congo, India, Indonesia, Guinea, Madagascar, Mozambique, Myanmar, Nepal, and Niger. These countries account for 90% of the global prevalence. India alone has about 500,000 infected people, which represents 63% of the global occurrences and 87% of the cases for that region.

The bacillus Mycobacterium leprae causes leprosy. Mycobacterium leprae was discovered in 1873 by G. A. Hansen (hence the disease was subsequently named after him). At that time, it was the only bacterium that had been discovered to cause a human disease. Rod- shaped with rounded ends, Mycobacterium leprae occurs in large numbers, often grouped in bundles, in the lesions of patients with lepromatous leprosy. The bacilli also group in clumps surrounded by a capsule called globi, located both in intracellular and extra- cellular spaces. Viable bacilli stain with carbol-fuchsin as solid rods, whereas bacilli that stain irregularly are probably dead. In Figure 1 the top images are drawings of the human leprosy bacilli seen under a microscope in the bottom row. The right images show that the bacillus is viable because it is uniformly stained. The bacteriological staining and the middle images with empty cell walls at the extremities are dead forms of the bacillus. The Mycobacterium leprae grows in the vesicles within macrophages which must be activated by TH1 cells. Photograph courtesy of Wolstenholme et al. index (BI), calculated by counting six to eight stained smears, and shows how much bacillus is present. The smears are made by cutting the skin around the infected area with a scalpel and scraping fluid and tissue from it. This sample is them evenly spread on a slide and stained by the Ziehl-Neelsen method. The bacilli are then counted and expressed in a logarithmic scale. The BI is useful because the results are representative of many of the infected individual’s lesions.

TABLE 1

About the disease: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE 1

About the disease: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE I

About the disease: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE I

About the disease: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE I

About the disease: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE I

About the disease: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE I

About the disease: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE I

About the disease: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE I

About the disease: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE I

About the disease: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE I

About the disease: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE II

About the Organism: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE II

About the Organism: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE II

About the Organism: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE III

Figures, Genomic Organisation, Indian Scenario and the Global estimates: Leprosy and Tuberculosis

TABLE III

Figures, Genomic Organisation, Indian Scenario and the Global estimates : Leprosy and Tuberculosis.

TABLE III

Figures, Genomic Organisation, Indian Scenario and the Global estimates : Leprosy and Tuberculosis.

FIG. 1. Mycobacterium leprae, the causative agent of Hansen’s Disease (leprosy). A. When stained with a red dye and decolorized with acid-alcohol, M. leprae retains the red color (i.e., it is ‘acid-fast’), and appears as a rod-shaped bacillus when viewed under the conventional light microscope. Shorter fragments are produced when the bacilli are dead or dying. These red organisms are seen here within a human nerve, which is stained blue. M. leprae is the only bacterium that infects nerve. (Original magnification approx. 800). B. M. leprae as they appear under a scanning electron microscope, which reveals the surface of the organisms. M. leprae, like other mycobacteria, tend to cluster together. (Original magnification 5000). C. The inner features of M. leprae are observed in this ultra-thin section of the bacilli, magnified 29000 under a transmission electron microscope. The round and oval images seen in the upper portion of this photograph are bacilli which have been cut perpendicular to their length, like a slice of sausage. (Photographs by Mr. Greg McCormick, NHDP).

The only known reservoir of this bacillus is humans, but diseases caused by bacilli are indistinguishable from M. leprae have been discovered in armadillos of the southern U.S. It is not known, however, if these bacilli can cause leprosy in humans. Although the direct means of transmission between humans is unknown, it is believed that the bacillus is expelled from the nose in respiratory droplets or from sores and thus can be spread through direct skin contact or by inhalation. Individuals with lepromatous leprosy have an enormous amount of bacilli, reaching to over seven billion organisms per gram of tissue. Mycobacterium leprae from nasal secretions can live outside of the human host for 36 hours, or as much as nine days in tropical climates. It is quite difficult, however, to determine when the bacillus was contracted because it has an incubation period of about five years, but it may take as many as 20 years for symptoms to develop). It has been found that leprosy is not a highly contagious disease. In fact, many adults that live in leprosy-affected areas seem to be immune, but children are more susceptible.

In the 1940s, scientists discovered that the drug dapsone stopped the progress of leprosy. Dapsone is an antibiotic that inhibits “folk acid synthesis by inhibition of di-hydropteroate synthetase.” Treatment with this drug required that the patient take dapsone for many years. Drug-resistant Mycobacterium leprae was found in the 1960s, thus the only treatment available became useless in some cases. Luckily, soon afterwards, rifampicin and clofazimine were found to very effective. Rifampin, an anti-tubercular drug stops the progression of leprosy so that the individual is no longer contagious and clofazimine reduces the number of mycobacteria in circulation. Some instances have been recorded where the bacilli has become drug resistant, but these times are typically when the drug treatment schedule is not followed correctly. In 1982, the World Health Organization (WHO) began recommending multi-drug therapy (MDT) for leprosy patients. MDT contains three drugs, clofazimine, dapsone, and rifampicin which kill “the germ cures the patient and pre\vents the occurrence of drug resistance.”

If MDT is started as soon as symptoms are detected, deformities can be avoided. MDT is very effective for another reason; it makes the individual non-infectious after the first treatment. Individuals with tuberculoid leprosy can be cured during a six-month course of MDT while patients with lepromatous leprosy require 12 months. In July of 1998, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration approved the use of thalidomide for leprosy treatment as an anti-inflammatory. Thalidomide inhibits the production of TFN-alpha, which can be over- produced in leprosy. When over-produced, TFN-alpha causes fever and night sweats. A short time ago three new drugs were demonstrated to have bactericidal activity against M. leprae. Collectively, called ROM, the drugs are ofloxacin-a fluoroquinolone, minocycline-a tetracycline which is believed to have both anti-bacterial and anti- inflammatory properties, and clarithromycin-a macrolide.

Mycobacterium Leprae

There are 113 species of mycobacteria. Two most important human pathogens of this genus are M. tuberculosis and M. leprae. The term Mycobacteria was coined by Lehman and Neuman (1886). According to 9th edition of Bergey’s Manual of Systemic Bacteriology, the genus Mycobacterium is classified as follows:

* Order: Actinomycetales

* Family: Mycobacteriaceae

* Genus: Mycobacteria

Mycobacteria are divisible into two major groups, the slow and rapid growers. The mycobacteria are acid fast aerobic, non-spore forming, and non-capsulated bacteria. Most of the species are non motile but the sliding motility in M. smegmatis and M. avium have been reported.

The bacilli are straight or slightly curved rod shaped organism with parallels sides and rounded ends, 1-8 m long, and 0.3 m in diameter. It divides by binary fission. It is obligate intracellular parasite, predominantly in macrophages, where the organisms commonly occur in clumps or ‘globi’ which may become very large, containing 100 of bacteria. In smaller clumps the organisms characteristically occur in parallel array resembling ‘bundles of cigars.’

The human being is the only known reservoir of infection in leprosy except for the fact that naturally occurring disease with organisms indistinguishable from M. leprae has also been detected among wild armadillos in parts of the Southern U.S.

The incubation period of M. leprae is as follows:

* Tuberculoid leprosy: 2.9-5.3 years

* Lepromatous leprosy: 9.3-11.6 years

* Mycobacteriophages-Only one phage, D29 is associated with M. leprae is equivocal and because it has only broad specificity it has no taxonomic value.

* Generation time: 11-13 days

Affecting predominately skin, nasal mucosa, and peripheral nerves. In armadillo M. leprae multiplies in the liver. Spleen and lymph nodes and skin containing 10^sup 9^-10^sup 10^ acid fast bacilli (AFB) per gram.

The minimal infective dose of M. leprae is 3-40 solidify staining bacteria. The viability of M. leprae is retained for 7-10 days in tissue or in homogenates of tissues stored at 4C. There is no difference in growth pattern or pathogenicity in mice or armadillos of M. leprae isolates from patients, irrespective of their type of leprosy. Race or geographic origin. Continuous serial passages of M. leprae over several years in normal mice did not increase or change their pathogenicity. Survival of M. leprae in nasal discharges: Suspensions of M. leprae survive exposure to 0.5 N sodium hypoxide for 20 minutes at room temperature as do M. tuberculosis.

At liquid nitrogen 196C, stored for indefinitely time. For optimum preservation of M. leprae the essential requirements include 10% w/v dimethylsulfoxide as the best protective agent over the critical cooling range -15C to -60C. M. leprae in suspension or in tissues can be stored up to 7 days at 4C, without significant loss of viability.

Cell wall consists of a cross linked peptidoglycan to which are attached polysaccharide chains (arabinogalactan) bearing mycolic acids. M. leprae has only α and β keto mycosides. Moreover, in M. leprae unlike in all other species of mycobacteria L- alanine is replaced completely by glycine in peptide moiety of the peptidoglycan.

Mycobacteria characteristically produce a variety of unusual lipids, which are frequently well associates. The lipids so far identified from M. leprae share these characteristics and include phosphatidyl inositol oligo mannosides, phthiocerol demycocerosate (PDIM), trace of cord factor, an attenuation indicator lipid and a mycoside of the phenol glycol type.

One of the earlier reported biochemical activities of M. leprae was its ability to oxidize a range of diphenols of which D- dihydroxy phenylalanine (DOPA) was chosen as the standard substrate because animal diphenoloxidases can only oxidize the L-isomer of DOPA. Although the nature of its activity remains controversial, DOPA oxidase activity is unique to M. leprae among Mycobacteria and therefore, is now one of the important tests for identifying M. leprae DOPA is also taken up by M. leprae.

Bacteria are protected from self destruction by their own oxygen free radical and those from the host by superoxide dismutase (SOD) and peroxidase. In addition, intracellular bacteria like M. leprae are protected from host H^sub 2^ O^sub 2^ by catalase as compared with those of other mycobacteria and no catalase.

Leprosy is a slowly progressing bacterial infection that affects the skin, peripheral nerves in the hands and feet, and mucous membranes of the nose, throat, and eyes. Destruction of the nerve endings causes the affected areas to lose sensation. Occasionally, because of the loss of feeling, the fingers and toes become mutilated and fall off, causing the deformities that are typically associated with the disease.

Leprosy is also known as Hansen’s disease after G. A. Hansen who in 1878, identified the bacillus Mycobacterium leprae that caused the disease. The infection is characterized by abnormal changes of the skin. These changes, called lesions, are at first flat and red. Upon enlarging, they have irregular shapes and a characteristic appearance. The lesions are typically darker in color around the edges with discolored pale centers. Because the organism grows best at lower temperatures the leprosy bacillus has a preference for the skin, the mucous membranes and the nerves. Infection in and destruction of the nerves leads to sensory loss. The loss of sensation in the fingers and toes increases the risk of injury. Inadequate care causes infection of open wounds. Gangrene may also follow, causing body tissue to die and become deformed.

Because of the disabling deformities associated with it, leprosy has been considered one of the most dreaded diseases since biblical times, though much of what was called leprosy in the Old Testament most likely was not the same disease. Its victims were often shunned by the community, kept at arm’s length, or sent to a leper colony. Many people still have misconceptions about the disease. Contrary to popular belief, it is not highly communicable and is extremely slow to develop. Household contacts of most cases and the medical personnel caring for Hansen’s disease patients are not at particular risk. It is very curable, although the treatment is long-term, requiring multiple medications.

The World Health Organization (WHO) puts the number of identified leprosy cases in the world, at the beginning of 1997, at about 890,000. Seventy percent of all cases are found in just three countries: India, Indonesia, and Myanamar (Burma). The infection can be acquired, however, in the Western Hemisphere as well. cases also occur in some areas of the Caribbean and even in southern Texas and Louisiana.

History of Leprosy

Leprosy has tormented humans throughout recorded history. The earliest possible account of a disease that many scholars believe is leprosy appears in an Egyptian Papyrus document written around 1550 B.C. Around 600 B.C. Indian writings describe a disease that resembles leprosy. In Europe, leprosy first appeared in the records of ancient Greece after the army of Alexander, the Great, came back from India and then in Rome in 62 B.C. coinciding with the return of Pompeii’s troops from Asia Minor.

Throughout its history, leprosy has been feared and misunderstood. For a long time leprosy was thought to be a hereditary disease, a curse, or a punishment from God. Before and even after the discovery of its biological cause, leprosy patients were stigmatized and shunned. For example, in Europe during the Middle Ages, leprosy sufferers had to wear special clothing, ring bells to warn others that they were close, and even walk on a particular side of the road, depending on the direction of the wind. Even in modern times, leprosy treatment has often occurred in separate hospitals and live-in colonies called leprosariums because of the stigma of the disease. Leprosy has been as prevalent in various areas as certain times throughout history that is has inspired art work and influenced other cultural practices.

The following is a timeline of the medical advances in leprosy.

1873: Gerhard Henrik Armauer Hansen of Norway was the first person to identify the germ that causes leprosy under a microscope. Hansen’s discovery of Mycobacterium leprae proved that leprosy was caused by a germ, and was thus not hereditary, from a curse, or from a sin.

FIG. 2. A plant of Chaulmoogra Nut.

Early 20th century: Until the late 1940 s, leprosy doctors all over the world treated patients by injecting them with oil from the chaulmoogra nut (Figure 2). This course of treatment was painful, and although some patients appeared to benefit, its long term efficacy was questionable.

1921: U.S. Public Health Service established the Gillis W. Long Hansen’s Disease Center in Carville, Louisiana, which became known as “Carville.” It became a center of research and testing to find a cure for leprosy and a live-in t\reatment center for leprosy patients.

1941: Identified and used at Carville. Promin successfully treated leprosy but unfortunately treatment with Promin required many painful injections

1950s: Dapsone pills, pioneered by Dr. R.G. Cochrane at Carville, became the treatment of choice for leprosy. Dapsone worked wonderfully at first, but unfortunately, M. leprae eventually began developing dapsone resistance.

1970s: The first successful multi-drug treatment (MDT) regimen for leprosy was developed through drug trials on the island of Malta

1981: The World Health Organization began recommending MDT, a combination of three drugs: dapsone, rifampicin, and clofazimine. MDT with these drugs takes from six months to a year or even more, depending on strength of leprosy infection.

Now: MDT with a combination of dapsone, rifampicin, and clofazimine is still the best treatment for preventing nerve damage, deformity, disability and further transmission Figure 3. Researchers are working on developing a vaccine and ways to detect leprosy sooner in order to start treatment earlier.

FIG. 3. The MDT blister pack.

Distribution of Leprosy

The total numbers of leprosy patients in the world vary from 10 to 12 million. The last estimate by the WHO made in 1975 was about 10.6 million. Of the estimated cases, Asia has the largest share with about 62%.

* Asia: 62%

* Africa: 34%

* South America: 3%

* Rest of world: 1%

However, in terms of intensity of the disease in the population the problem is about three times as intense in Africa as it is in Asia. Almost one billion people in the world live in high endemic areas where the prevalence of leprosy is at least 1/1000.

In countries where leprosy is endemic, the prevalence rates show marked variations with rates ranging from below one per 1000 to over 50 or more per 1000. In exceptional situations, rates as high as 250/ 1000 or more have been reported.

Leprosy is known to occur at all ages ranging from early infancy to very old ages, the youngest age reported for occurrence of leprosy is three weeks old in Martinique. The youngest case seen by the author was in an infant of two and a half months, where the diagnosis of tuberculoid leprosy was confirmed by histopathology. Occurrence of leprosy presumably for the first time, is not uncommon even after the age of 70. Although leprosy affects both sexes in most parts of the world, males are affected more frequently than females, often in the ration of 2:1.

FIG. 4. The portrait of leprosy.

These factors include climatic conditions, diet, nutrition, and socio-economic factors such as literacy, caste and so on, the association between leprosy and hot and humid climate has been pointed out by some workers, eating of fish and eating of cocoyam have also been incriminated in relation to leprosy, nutritional deficiencies, and their relationship to leprosy have also been studied, however, none of the studies on the above factors has clearly established a causal association between them and leprosy.

In the population, leprosy was found to contribute to about 1% of all deaths.

Method of Transmission of Leprosy

The exact mechanism of transmission of leprosy is not known. At least until recently, the most widely held belief was that the disease was transmitted by contact between cases of leprosy and healthy persons. More recently the possibility of transmission by the respiratory route is gaining ground. There are also other possibilities such as transmission through insects which cannot be completely ruled out.

The prevalence pool of leprosy in a population in general is in a constant flux resulting from inflow and outflow. The inflow is contributed by the occurrence of new cases, relapse of cured cases, and immigration of cases. The outflow is mainly through cure or inactivation of cases, death of cases, and emigration of cases. Of the various factors that influence the prevalence pool, the importance of inactivation of disease and mortality are less well recognized.

Where leprosy treatment facilities exist, inactivation or cure due to specific treatment is an important mode of elimination of cases from the prevalence pool. Even in the absence of specific treatment, a majority of patients, particularly of the tuberculoid and indeterminate types, tend to get cured spontaneously. An earlier study in India had shown that over a period of 20 years, the extent of spontaneous regression among children with tuberculoid leprosy was about 90%. A study in Culion Island in the Philippines showed that among children self-healing occurred in 77.7% of cases. A later study in South India involving long-term follow-up of a high endemic population showed that among newly detected tuberculoid cases of all ages and both sexes, the rate of inactivation was 10.9% per year, the bulk of inactivation in the study being spontaneous.

The two portals of exit of M. leprae often described are the skin and the nasal mucosa. However, the relative importance of these two portals is not clear. It is true that the lepromatous cases show large numbers of organisms deep down in the dermis. However, whether they reach the skin surface in sufficient numbers is doubtful. Although there are reports of AFB being found in the desquamating epithelium of the skin, Weddell et al. (1963a) have reported that they could not find any AFB in the epidermis even after examining a very large number of specimens from patients and contacts.

Regarding the nasal mucosa, its importance has been recognized as early as 1898 by Schaeffer (1898), particularly that of the ulcerated mucosa. The quantity of bacilli from nasal mucosal lesions in lepromatous leprosy has been demonstrated by Shepard (1960) as large, with counts ranging from 10,000 to 10,000,000. Pedley (1973) has reported that the majority of lepromatous patients showed leprosy bacilli in their nasal secretions as collected through nose blows. Davey and Rees (1974) have indicated that nasal secretions from lepromatous patients can yield as much as 1 million viable organisms per day. The portal of entry of M. leprae into the human body is not definitely known. However, the two portals of entry seriously considered are the skin and the upper respiratory tract. With regard to the respiratory route of entry of M. leprae, the evidence in its favor is on the increase in spite of the long-held belief that the skin was the exclusive portal of entry. Rees and McDougall (1977) have succeeded in the experimental transmission of leprosy through aerosols containing M. leprae in immune-suppressed mice, suggesting a similar possibility in humans. Successful results have also been reported on experiments with nude mice when M. leprae was introduced into the nasal cavity through topical application.

In summary, although no firm conclusions can be reached with regard to the portal of entry, entry through the respiratory route appears most probable, although other routes, particularly broken skin, cannot be ruled out.

Sub-Clinical Infection in Leprosy

In spite of the fact that as yet there is no simple immunological test to identify sub-clinical infection with sufficient specificity and sensitivity, evidence accumulated in the past few years clearly indicate that sub-clinical infection does occur in leprosy as in many other communicable diseases. This evidence has mainly come from limited studies with in vitro tests for cell-mediated immunity (CMI) such as the lymphocyte transformation test (LTT) and serological tests for detecting humoral antibodies such as phenolic glycolipid I- based ELISA.

In addition to the above, skin tests with various preparations of lepromin, and more recently with soluble antigens from M. leprae, have also provided useful information on the occurrence of sub- clinical infection, although the specificity of these tests, particularly of integral lepromin, has been rather questionable. Zuniga et al. (1982), using a soluble skin test antigen prepared by the Convit method, have found that skin test positivity in a part of Venezuela was 19% among the general population (noncontacts), 36% among contacts outside the household, and 48% among household contacts. The gradation of reactivity clearly suggests the correlation between exposure and possible subclinical infection. However, in India no difference was seen in the distribution of skin test reactions to soluble antigens among cases, contacts, and general population.

Transmission by Contact

The term ‘contact’ in leprosy is generally not clearly defined. All that we know at present is that individuals who are in close association or proximity with leprosy patients have a greater chance of acquiring the disease. It is with reference to this observation that the early workers appear to have used the term ‘contact’ as method of transmission. However, it is the definition of contact by later workers with qualifications such as ‘skin to skin,’ ‘intimate,’ ‘repeated,’ and so on that has made it appear as if the disease could be acquired only under such conditions, and that the transmission involved some kind of ‘inunction’ or rubbing in of the organisms from the skin of affected persons into the skin of healthy subjects. Certainly, there is no proof that transmission takes place only through such inunction.

In general, closeness of contact is related to the dose of infection which, in turn, is related to the occurrence of disease. Of the various situations that promote close contact, contact within the household is the only one that is easily identified. In that area the relative risk for contacts was about four times that of non- contacts. The actual incidence among contacts and the relative risk for them appear to vary considerably in different studies. Attack rates for contacts of lepromatous leprosy have varied from 6.2 per 1000 per year in Cebu to 55.8 per 1000 per year in a part of South India.

The possibility of transmission of leprosy through the respiratory rout\e is gaining increasing attention in recent years. It is interesting to note that as early as 1898 this possibility has also been discussed at some length by Schuffer. The possibility of transmission through the respiratory route is based on:

1. The inability of the organisms to be found on the surface of the skin,

2. The demonstration of a large number of organisms in the nasal discharge,

3. The high proportion of morphologically intact bacilli in the nasal secretions, and

4. The evidence that M. leprae could survive outside the human host for several hours or days.

Transmission Through Insects

With the available evidence on intra-cutaneous inoculation as a successful method of transmission of M. leprae in the mouse footpad model and a similar situation possibly existing in human beings, the question arises whether insects could play any role in natural infection. Although a large number of experiments had been conducted in the past demonstrating AFB in biting insects, the question whether insect’s actually transmitted infection had remained unanswered.

Causes

The organism that causes leprosy is a rod-shaped bacterium called Mycobacterium leprae. This bacterium is related to Mycobacterium tuberculosis, the causative agent of tuberculosis. Because special staining techniques involving acids are required to view these bacteria under the microscope, they are referred to as acid-fast bacilli (AFB).

When Mycobacterium leprae invades the body, one of two reactions can take place.

In tuberculoid leprosy (TT), the milder form of the disease, the body’s immune cells attempt to seal off the infection from the rest of the body by surrounding the offending pathogen. Because this response by the immune system occurs in the deeper layers of the skin, the hair follicles, sweat glands, and nerves can be destroyed. As a result, the skin becomes dry and discolored and loses its sensitivity. Involvement of nerves on the face, arms, or legs can cause them to enlarge and become easily felt by the doctor. This finding is highly suggestive of TT. The scarcity of bacteria in this type of leprosy leads to it being referred to as paucibacillary (PB) leprosy. Seventy to eighty percent of all leprosy cases are of the tuberculoid type.

In lepromatous (LL) leprosy, which is the second and more contagious form of the disease, the body’s immune system is unable to mount a strong response to the invading organism. Hence, the organism multiplies freely in the skin. This type of leprosy is also called the multibacillary (MB) leprosy, because of the presence of large numbers of bacteria. The characteristic feature of this disease is the appearance of large nodules or lesions all over the body and face. Occasionally, the mucous membranes of the eyes, nose, and throat may be involved. Facial involvement can produce a lion- like appearance (leonine facies). This type of leprosy can lead to blindness, drastic change in voice, or mutilation of the nose. Leprosy can strike anyone; however, children seem to be more susceptible than adults.

Symptoms

Well-defined skin lesions that are numb are the first symptoms of tuberculoid leprosy. Lepromatous leprosy is characterized by a chronic stuffy nose due to invasion of the mucous membranes, and the presence of nodules and lesions all over the body and face.

The incubation period varies anywhere from six months to ten years. On an average, it takes four years for the symptoms of tuberculoid leprosy to develop. Probably because of the slow growth of the bacillus, lepromatous leprosy develops even more slowly, taking an average of eight years for the initial lesions to appear.

It is not very clear how the leprosy bacillus is transmitted from person to person. Inhaling bacteria that are present in dust is thought to be one of the modes of transmission. However, even among people who live in the same household as the patient and are in close contact, only 5% get leprosy. It is obviously not a highly communicable disease. The incidence of leprosy is highest in the poverty belt of the globe. Therefore, environmental factors such as unhygienic living conditions, overpopulation, and malnutrition may also be contributing factors favoring the infection. The nine- banded armadillo is susceptible to this disease but it is still unclear if human infection is related to exposure to this animal.

In tuberculoid leprosy, a rash appears, consisting of one or a few flat, whitish areas. Areas affected by this rash are numb because the bacteria damage the underlying nerves.

In lepromatous leprosy, many small bumps or larger raised rashes of variable size and shape appear on the skin. There are more areas of numbness than in tuberculoid leprosy, and certain muscle groups may be weak.

Borderline leprosy shares features of both tuberculoid and lepromatous leprosy. If not treated, borderline leprosy may improve to resemble the tuberculoid form or worsen to become more like the lepromatous form.

The most severe symptoms of leprosy result from infection of the peripheral nerves, which causes a deterioration of a person’s sense of touch and a corresponding inability to feel pain and temperature. People with peripheral nerve damage may unknowingly burn, cut, or otherwise harm themselves. Repeated damage may eventually lead to loss of fingers and toes. Also, damage to peripheral nerves may cause muscle weakness, at times resulting in clawing of the fingers and a “drop foot” deformity. Skin infection can lead to areas of swelling and lumps, which can be particularly disfiguring on the face.

People with leprosy also may develop sores on the soles of the feet. Damage to the nasal passages can result in a chronically stuffy nose and, if untreated, complete erosion of the nose. Eye damage may lead to blindness. Men with lepromatous leprosy may experience erectile dysfunction (impotence) and become infertile, because the infection can reduce the amount of testosterone and sperm produced by the testes.

During the course of untreated or even treated leprosy, the body’s immune response may produce inflammatory reactions. These reactions can produce fever and inflammation of the skin, peripheral nerves, and less commonly the lymph nodes, joints, testes, kidneys, liver, and eyes.

Diagnosis

Diagnosis of leprosy is most commonly based on the clinical signs and symptoms. These are easy to observe and elicit by any health worker after a short period of training. In practice, most often persons with such complaints report on their own to the health centre. Only in rare instances is there a need to use laboratory and other investigations to confirm a diagnosis of leprosy. In an endemic country or area, an individual should be regarded as having leprosy if he or she shows ONE of the following cardinal signs.

Skin lesion: Skin lesions consistent with leprosy and with definite sensory loss, with or without thickened nerves The skin lesion can be single or multiple, usually less pigmented than the surrounding normal skin. Sometimes the lesion is reddish or copper- colored. A variety of skin lesions may be seen but macules (flat), papules (raised), or nodules are common. Sensory loss is a typical feature of leprosy. The skin lesion may show loss of sensation to pin pick and/or light touch. Thickened nerves, mainly peripheral nerve trunks constitute another feature of leprosy. A thickened nerve is often accompanied by other signs as a result of damage to the nerve. These may be loss of sensation in the skin and weakness of muscles supplied by the affected nerve. In the absence of these signs, nerve thickening by itself, without sensory loss and/or muscle weakness is often not a reliable sign of leprosy. The clinical system of classification for the purpose of treatment includes the use of number of skin lesions and nerves involved as the basis for grouping leprosy patients into multibacillary (MB) and paucibacillary (PB) leprosy.

Positive skin smears: In a small proportion of cases, rodshaped, red-stained leprosy bacilli, which are diagnostic of the disease, may be seen in the smears taken from the affected skin when examined under a microscope after appropriate staining. Leprosy can be classified on the basis of clinical manifestations and skin smear results. In the classification based on skin smears, patients showing negative smears at all sites are grouped as paucibacillary leprosy (PB), while those showing positive smears at any site are grouped as having multibacillary leprosy (MB).

A person presenting with skin lesions or with symptoms suggestive of nerve damage, in whom the cardinal signs are absent or doubtful should be called a “suspect case” in the absence of any immediately obvious alternate diagnosis. Such individuals should be told the basic facts of leprosy and advised to return to the centre, if signs persist for more than six months or if at any time, worsening is noticed.

The initial microscopic observations of human skin lesions by Hansen were soon followed by detailed histopathologic descriptions by Virchow and others, but the great variety of clinical and histologie findings prompted a variety of complex and confusing classification schemes during the first half of the 20th century. After several decades, the clinical, microbiological, histological, and immunological features of leprosy were formulated into a unified concept of an immunopathologic spectrum by Skinsnes in 1964. The host response to M. leprae was understood to be the basis of this diversity; specifically, that variations in cellular immunity (CMI) play a central role in the wide range of appearances in leprosy. A practical classification scheme developed by Ridley and Jopling based on this concept has enabled standardized comparisons of patients in different parts of the world.

This clinical and pathological classification system remains the diagnostic ‘gold standard’ in leprosy, with important implications for treatment and prognosis. \Although simplified classification systems have been promulgated by the World Health Organization and others, these are designed for use in countries where biopsies and histopathologic examination are too costly or not available. All patients in the United States have access to full diagnostic services for Hansen’s disease at no cost to them, through the National Hansen’s Disease Program. Under the Ridley-Jopling classification, at one extreme are patients with strong CMI to M. leprae, who therefore develop a granulomatous response to the organism and exhibit delayed hypersensitivity to it. They have one skin lesion with rare bacilli, and are termed ‘polar tuberculoid’ (TT). At the other extreme are patients with no effective CMI, who have numerous lesions and very large numbers of bacilli; these are termed ‘polar lepromatous’ (LL). Most patients fall into a broad ‘borderline’ category, with varying degrees of CMI inversely correlated with the number of bacilli in their lesions. These are classified as borderline tuberculoid (BT), mid-borderline (BB), or borderline lepromatous (BL). Representative histologie features of these classifications are presented in Figure 5. A full treatment of this subject is beyond the scope of this paper, and those interested are referred to several standard treatments on this subject

Immunologic and molecular studies of biopsies across this extraordinary spectrum of CMI responses to this relatively indolent pathogen have now produced an increasingly detailed description of the cellular and molecular events involved in CMI to M. leprae, identifying the participation of different populations of T lymphocytes and the contribution of different cytokines to the regulation of the response in different types of leprosy.

Although most patients have identifiable skin lesions by the time they seek medical attention, cutaneous nerves and their subcutaneous trunks are involved very early in the course of this infection. This nerve involvement produces the decrease or loss of sensation within skin lesions that is the telltale diagnostic sign differentiating HD from other skin lesions. Notably, the degree of early nerve injury is related to the patient’s immune response rather than to number of bacilli, i.e., neuropathy develops earlier and more severely in tuberculoid patients, who have very small numbers of bacilli and strong CMI, but severe neuropathy is usually delayed in lepromatous patients, who have abundant organisms but Ineffective CMI.

FIG. 5A. Higher magnification of portions of the same biopsies reveals the changing morphology of the macrophages across the spectrum. In TT lesions, macrophages have an epithelioid character with granular cytoplasm, and occasionally have coalesced into multinucleated giant cells (gc). In LL lesions macrophages characteristically have a vacuolated or ‘foamy’ appearance. BT, BB, and BL can be seen to have intermediate forms of these cells as well as combinations of these cell types.

FIG. 5B. This series of low-magnification images of biopsies across the spectrum demonstrates the decline in organization of the inflammatory infiltrate from the tuberculoid (TT) to the lepromatous (LL) poles.

At some periods, during the course of infection with M. leprae, prior to treatment, the bacilli may circulate in the bloodstream, and may infect deeper organs including the liver, spleen, lymph nodes, and bone marrow. Infection at these sites is usually self limited and not prolonged. This organism may also infect the iris and conjunctiva of the eye, possibly with serious consequences to vision. Discussion of details of these topics is also beyond the scope of this discussion and the sources noted above should be consulted.

Immunology of Leprosy

Although leprosy is a chronic infectious disease, it may to a great extent be considered as immunological disease. The causative organism, M. leprae, is virtually non-toxic and may occur in the tissues in large amounts almost without clinical symptoms. Most symptoms and important complications of the disease are due to immune reactions against antigenic constituents liberated from the bacilli. Most forms of nerve damage induced during reversal reactions are due to delayed type hypersensitivity reactions against bacillary antigens in the nerves, and erythematic nodosum leprosum in considered as a classical example of an immune complex disease in man.

Cellular immune reactions resulting in macrophage activation are considered to be responsible for inducing an increase in the ability to limit bacterial multiplication or for directly killing the intruding micro-organism and thus, essential for protective immunity and resistance against infection. However, the cellular immune response in also highly complex, involving the generation of various subsets of T lymphocytes with various functions.

The early events alter infection with M. leprae are incompletely known both with regard to the influence of port of entry and dose of infection and the behavior of the leprosy bacilli at this stage.

In M. leprae infection, after experimental inoculation, the bacilli are initially engulfed by neutrophilic granulocytes shortly thereafter, they are taken up by macrophages in which they continue to live and multiply until arrested in their growth when effective immunity develops, or they may continue to multiply and eventually kill the host if the resistance is inadequate.

In vivo, M. leprae is an obligate intracellular parasite residing mainly in macrophages and Schwann cells. Evidence of changed immunologie reactivity in individuals exposed to M. leprae but without clinical signs of the infection was first provided with the lymphocyte transformation test used to study individuals. Lymphocyte stimulation tests employing the purified antigenic preparation from M. leprae. The late lepromin reaction indicates the ability of the individual to develop cellular immunity against antigens of M. leprae.

In indeterminate leprosy, there is one or a few skin lesion, appearing as hypo pigmented macules in dark skinned people or faintly erythematous. The outer edges are without in duration and other vague, slight sensory loss in often seen, but the peripheral nerves are not thickened or tender.

Histologically, there is scattered infiltration of lymphocytes and histiocytes around skin appendages, peripheral nerves and vessels which is diagnosable as leprosy in cases exhibiting a cellular reaction within a dermal nerve, or having one or a few AFB in nerves, erector pili muscles or the sub-epidermal zone.

In immunoglobulin class specific solid phase radio immunoassay for anu-M. leprae antibodies, patients with strictly indeterminate leprosy did not behave differently from normal in the IgG anti-M. leprae assay whereas the IgM anti-M. leprae activity was higher in patients with indeterminate leprosy than in the control group of healthy individuals with known exposure to M. leprae, with virtually no overlap. Differential development of CD4 and CD8 cytotoxic T cells (CTL) in PBMC across the leprosy spectrum; IL-6 with IFN- gamma or IL-2 generate CTL in multibacillary patients.

The contribution of CD4 and CD8 T cells on the antigenspecific cytotoxic activity induced by whole Mycobacterium leprae in leprosy patients and normal controls (N) as well as the modulation of this activity by some cytokines has been evaluated. Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC) from N or from leprosy patients were stimulated with antigen in the presence or absence of cytokines for 7 days. M. leprae-stimulated PBMC were depleted of CD4 or CD8 antigen-bearing cells and employed as effector cells in a 4-hr [31Cr]-release assay against autologous M. leprae-pulsed macrophages. The results demonstrated that both CD4 and CD8 T cells contribute to M. leprae-induced cytotoxic activity, with differences observed in paucibacillary (PB) and multibacillary (MB) patients. CD8-mediated cytotoxic activity is higher than that of CD4 cells in PB patients, while in MB patients CD4 cytotoxicity is predominant. Our data also demonstrate that the generation of CD4 and CD8 cytotoxic T lymphocytes (CTL) can be modulated differentially by interleukin-4 (IL-4), IL-6, gamma interferon (IFN-gamma), or IL-2. Although MB patients developed the lowest CTL response, cytokines such as IL-6 plus IL-2 or IFN-gamma were able to generate both CD4 and CD8 cytotoxic T cells from MB patients. In PB patients, IL-6 plus IFN-gamma displayed the highest stimulation on CD8 effector cells. Thus, an important role may be assigned to IL-6, together with IL-2 or IFN-gamma, in the differentiation of M. leprae- specific CTL effector cells.

TREATMENTS

The major goals of the leprosy control program are early detection of patients; appropriate treatment; and adequate care for the prevention of disabilities and rehabilitation. Because leprosy is an infectious disease, antibiotic therapy plays a pivotal role in the management of newly diagnosed patients.

TABLE 1

Multi-drug Therapy for Multi-bacillary (MB) Leprosy

TABLE 3

Multi-drug Therapy for Single Lesion Pauci-bacillary (SLPB) Leprosy

There are several effective chemotherapeutic agents against M. leprae. Dapsone (Di-amino,diphenylsulfone, DDS), rifampicin (RFP), clofazimine (CLF, B663), ofloxacin (OFLX), and minocycline (MINO) constitute the backbone of the multidrug therapy (MDT) regimen recommended by WHO. Other chemotherapeutic agents, like Levofloxacin (LVFX), sparfloxacin (SPFX), and clarithromycin (CAM) are also effective against M. leprae. WHO has designed very practical kits containing medication for 28 days, dispensed in blister packs, for both PB and MB leprosy. The blister pack medication kit for Sinle lesion pauci-bacillary (SLPB) leprosy contains the exact dose for the one-time administration of the three components of the MDT regimen.

Following the classification according to the flowchart PB patients receive 600 mg RFP monthly, supervi\sed, and 100 mg dapsone daily, unsupervised, for 6 months. SLPB patients can be treated with a single therapeutic dose consisting of 600 mg RFP, 400 mg OFLX, and 100 mg MINO. MB cases are treated with 600 mg RFP and 300 mg clofazamine (CLF) monthly, supervised, and 100 mg dapsone and 50 mg CLF daily, for 12 months. Reduced doses of the above regimen are appropriately determined for children important to avoid drug resistance. An additional, 27 days of treatment with dapsone (and CLF) are mandatory and, health workers should ensure that regular and daily, uninterrupted drug intake is performed.

Multidrug Therapy (MDT)

MDT is a key element of the leprosy treatment and elimination strategy. Table 1 shows Multi-drug Therapy for Multi-bacillary (MB) Leprosy. For both PB and MB leprosy, RFP is central to the anti- leprosy drug regimen (Table 2). It has been proven that monotherapy in leprosy will result in the development of resistance to the drug used. Thus, monotherapy with dapsone or any other anti-leprosy drug should be considered unethical practice. Tables 3 and 4, respectively, show the pharmacological effects of each drug and the recommended laboratory monitoring.

TABLE 2

Multi-drug Therapy for Pauci-bacillary (PB) Leprosy

Rifampicin (RFP)

The drug is administered in a single monthly dose, a protocol for which no significant toxic effect has been reported. Exceptionally bactericidal against M. leprae, a single dose of 600 mg of RFP is capable of killing 99.9% or more of viable organisms. However, the rate of killing is not proportionately enhanced by subsequent doses. It has been suggested that RFP may exert a delayed antibiotic effect for several days, during which the organism’s multiplication is inhibited. The high bactericidal activity of RFP made feasible the application of the single monthly dose, which is cost-effective for leprosy-control programs. At the start of the treatment, the patient should be informed of the usual side effect of a slight reddish coloration of urine.

Diamino-Diphenylsulfone (DDS, Dapsone)

Until widespread resistant strains to the drug were reported, dapsone, which is bacteriostatic or weakly bactericidal against M. leprae, was for years the mainstay in the treatment regimen for leprosy. Subsequently, its use in combination with other drugs has become essential to slow or prevent the development of resistance. The drug has demonstrated an acceptable level of safety in the dosage used in MDT. Besides occasional cutaneous eruptions, side effects that necessitate discontinuation are rare. Patients known to be allergic to any of the sulpha drugs should be spared dapsone. Anemia, hemolysis, and methemoglobinemia may develop but are more significant in patient’s deficient for glucose-6- phosphodihydrogenase (G6PD).

TABLE 4

Pharmacological effect of drugs applied for Leprosy

Clofazimine (CLF)

CLF, which preferentially binds to mycobacterial DNA, both inhibits mycobacterial growth and exerts a slow bactericidal effect on M. leprae. Anti-inflammatory properties have been suggested, for the drug controls erythema nodosum leprosum reactions by mechanisms still poorly understood. Most active when administered daily, the dosage used for MDT is well tolerated and has not shown significant toxicity. Because CLF is a repository drug, stored in the body after administration and slowly excreted, it is given as a loading dose of 300 mg once a month to ensure that the optimal amount of CLF is maintained in the body tissue, even if patients occasionally miss their daily dose. Patients starting the MDT regimen for MB leprosy should be informed of side effects including brownish black discoloration and dryness of skin. These usually disappear within a few months of treatment suspension.

Recently three more drugs have shown bactericidal activity against M. leprae. These are ofloxacin (OFLX)-a fluoroquinolone, minocycline (MINO)-a tetracycline, and clarithromycin-a macrolide.

Ofloxacin (OFLX)

OFLX, a synthetic fluoroquinolone, acts as a specific inhibitor of bacterial DNA gyrase and has shown efficiency in the treatment of M. leprae. Chromosome resistance of negligible clinical relevance has been reported.

Minocycline

Minocycline (MINO) is a semi synthetic tetracycline. It achieves selective concentration in susceptible organisms and induces bacteriostasis by inhibiting protein synthesis. However, from the curative and cost-effectiveness points of view, the WHO- recommended, time-honored MDT remains to date the best combination regimen of the worldwide leprosy-control programs.

Treatment of PB Leprosy

In PB patients, it is assumed that 6 months of treatment with RFP alone can ensure a complete clearing of the bacteria. However, to prevent RFP resistance dapsone has been added. The attainment of clinical inactivity should not be the condition guiding the continuation of MDT in PB patients, because these patients are virtually always cleared of viable bacteria in 6 months with the WHO- MDT regimen. Hence, one should keep in mind that clinical activity in PB leprosy does not necessarily directly correlate with bacterial multiplication. In a substantial proportion of patients, clinical inactivity may not be achieved in 6 months even after a complete clearing of the organisms. Follow-up studies of PB patients in MDT’s field trials have shown that complete clearing of lesions takes 1-2 years after treatment discontinuation. The incidence of relapses in PB patients is very low, and, to date, the correlation between disease activity status at the time of treatment completion and subsequent relapse is not well documented. Nevertheless, the accuracy of the initial classification of patients in the PB category is a determining factor of long-term results.

Treatment of SLPB

In 1997, WHO initiated the supply of special ROM (R: rifampicin. O: Ofloxacin. M: minocycline) blister packs to India, Bangladesh, Nepal, and Brazil for the treatment of SLPB leprosy. The 7th WHO expert committee on leprosy recommended the use of a combination of RFP 600 mg, OFLX 400 mg and MINO 100 mg (ROM) for the treatment of two categories of leprosy patients. Patients presenting with SLPB leprosy could be treated with a single dose of ROM. Both experimental and clinical studies have shown the bactericidal effectiveness of these drugs, either alone or in combination. Therefore, for the treatment of SLPB leprosy, WHO advocates a flexible attitude to the decision of whether to use a single dose ROM or the standard WHO-MDT for 6 months.

Treatment of MB Leprosy

RFP remains the major component of the MDT regimens, clearing most RFP-susceptible strains of M. leprae with a few monthly doses. Recently, it has been shown that the daily combination of dapsone and CLF is highly bactericidal. The combination has been very effective on RFP-resistant mutants in an untreated MB leprosy patient within 3-6 months. For the treatment of MB leprosy, controlled and reliable clinical trials have demonstrated that MDT is generally effective within 24 months or less. Such observations led WHO to recommend 12 months as an acceptable duration for the MDT regimen in the efficient treatment of MB leprosy.

Some concerns arose regarding this 12-month regimen for the treatment of high bacteriological index patients. Observations have shown that a high bacteriological index in MB patients correlates with a high risk for the development of adverse reactions and nerve damage during the second year of treatment. Also, a high bacteriological index at the start of the treatment regimen has been correlated not only with a slow disappearance of skin lesions but also with a high index at the end of the 12-month regimen compared with patients starting with a lower bacteriological index. However, it was found that most of the high bacteriological index patients will continue to improve after the completion of the 12-month regimen. Nevertheless, an additional 12 months of MDT for MB leprosy is needed for patients showing evidence of deterioration.

Provided there is a strict adherence to the regimen by the patient, the shortening of the MDT for MB leprosy from 24 months to 12 months will not lead to a higher risk for the development of resistance to RFP. Several studies have demonstrated that a few doses of RFP are able to clear all the organisms susceptible to RFP. The naturally occurring RFP-resistant mutants are very sensitive to the CLF-dapsone combination, leaving very little chance for any bacteria to survive 12 doses of MDT.

The prevalence of MB patients with a high bacterial index is decreasing in most programs. WHO has estimated their proportion among newly detected cases to less than 15%. There is evidence that 3-6 months of administration of MDT clears all live organisms. Also, for reasons of non-availability or non-reliability of skin smear services, increasing numbers of leprosy control programs are classifying leprosy patients on clinical criteria alone. A factor of supreme importance in the surveillance of the treatment is the determination by the control program of patients with high bacteriological index and those with high risk of developing reaction and neuritis. This surveillance should be done by both clinical and bacteriological methods. Such selected patients may be kept on surveillance for 1-2 years in order to detect deterioration and adverse reactions as early as possible. Signs of deterioration are an indication of the necessity of an additional course of 12 months of MDT. In general, reactions are successfully managed by a standard course of prednisolone. A key element of the surveillance is the education of patients at the end of the treatment program. The benefit of the treatment program would be seriously undermined if the patients were to ignore the symptoms and signs of relapses, and not report them at their slightest manifestation. MB leprosy patients who do not accept CLF can be treated with the monthly administr\ation of 24 doses of ROM.

MDT and M. leprae

Persisting M. leprae are defined as viable organisms which are fully susceptible to the drugs but survive despite adequate treatment with anti-leprosy drugs, probably because they are in a low or dormant metabolic state. To the best of our knowledge, drugs that can clear these persisting organisms are as yet undetermined, although RFP is known for its capability to kill persisting organisms in another mycobacterial disease, tuberculosis. Evidence so far accumulated has shown that persisting organisms, even though present, do not play a key role in the occurrence of relapses in leprosy among patients treated with MDT.

In most patients, the presence of dead bacilli in the skin and other tissues seems to be pathogenically insignificant and the dead organisms are gradually cleared away by the body’s phagocytic system. The results of several large-scale, long-term field trials show that the rate of clearance of dead bacilli is about 0.6-1.0 logs per year and is not enhanced by MDT. However, in a very small proportion of patients, antigens from dead bacilli can provoke immunological reactions, such as the (late) reversal reaction, causing serious nerve damage and subsequent disabilities. Patients should be aware of this potential advent. These reactions are effectively managed by corticosteroids such as prednisolone.

Although the risk of possible endogenous reactivation is negligible when adequate chemotherapy has been completed, evidence exist for other mycobacterioses, like tuberculosis, that immunosuppressive drugs, like prednisolone, can accelerate the multiplication of organisms in a dormant state and cause a disseminated reactivation. Nothing of the like has been documented in leprosy. In case steroid therapy is expected to exceed 4 months, prophylactic measures should be considered. Daily administration of 50 mg of CLF has been used in these cases and should be continued throughout the course of steroid therapy. However, these patients should not be reentered into the case registry.

MOT and Drug-Resistance

Resistance of M. leprae to existing major anti-leprosy drugs has been world wide reported. It has become imperative to develop parades to overcome this problem, the magnitude of which was selective. Actually resistance to Dapsone was the most reported. Subsequently regimens of the MDT were designed on the principle that they would be effective against all the strains of M. leprae regardless of their susceptibility to dapsone.

Reports on RFP-resistant leprosy came second to those of Dapsone in term of frequency. Currently, the problem of RFP-resistant leprosy is trivial; however, selective non-compliance with dapsone and/or CLF by patients may facilitate the selection of RFP- resistant strains. This resistance to RFP is believed to develop as a result of its use in monotherapy or in combination with dapsone, to dapsone-resistant patients.

It has been estimated that an advanced, untreated MB patient harbors about 11 logs live organisms. Out of these, the proportion of naturally-occurring drug-resistant mutants is estimated to be 1 in 7 logs for RFP; 1 in 6 logs each for dapsone and CLF. The organisms resistant to one drug will be susceptible to the other drugs in MDT as their mechanisms of action are different. To date, reports of relapses after treatment with MDT have been rare. Their management with the same regimen has been equally effective.

All experimental and clinical facts indicate that there is no antagonism among the drugs comprising MDT. The experience with MDT so far has shown the combination to be the most effective one. Recently, genetic profiles of drug-resistant strains have been elucidated (Table 5). Table 6 shows Mycobacterium leprae-resistant genes.

There are three important activities characterizing the sensitivity of M. leprae to these drugs:

1. The exquisite sensitivity to dapsone as compared with an MIC of 30 g/mL for sulfamethoxy pyridazine, representative as one of several long acting sulfonamides.

2. The very high bactericidal activity of rifampin.

3. Only three of the other drugs (ethionamide/prothionamide/ thiomide analogs) have bactericidal activity, though significantly less than rifampin.

TABLE 5

Laboratory monitoring for drugs used to treat Leprosy

Leprosy Reaction and Its Treatment

Leprosy affects all aspects of patients’ life. Its reactions, known under the label “Leprosy reactions” include among their worst consequences, irreversible nerve damage and disabilities. Fortunately, these reactions have become gradually well documented and, if timely detected, they are eventually preventable. They occur in all PB and MB (B group and LL type) patients, most commonly during chemotherapy. PB and MB (B group) cases develop type 1 reaction (reverse reaction: RR), and type 2 reaction (erythema nodosum leprosum: ENL) occurs in MB (LL type) patients. Some data seem to indicate a trend toward a reduction in the frequency and severity of ENL in MB leprosy patients on MDT. These data may be attributable to the anti-inflammatory effect of CLF. On the other hand, a temporary increase in the reporting of reversal reactions (type 1) has been noted in MB leprosy patients in their first year of MDT. The exact meaning of this observation remains unclear. One of the most likely explanations is the improvement of early and specific detection capability. Usually these reactions respond satisfactorily to prednisolon

Dr. David Molony Is First American and Non-Asian to Earn World Federation of Chinese Medicine Societies Top Honor

LEHIGH VALLEY, Pa., May 8 /PRNewswire/ — Dr. David Molony, 54, a resident of Pennsylvania, was honored at People’s Hall, in Tiananmen Square, Beijing, for his accomplishments in advancing the science of Chinese medicine with legislative chambers and international medical non-government organizations. Also honored were professor Chen Keji of China, and Lin Tzi Chiang, of Australia. Each was awarded with the Renji Cup for international contributions to Chinese medicine.

(Photo: http://www.newscom.com/cgi-bin/prnh/20070508/CLTU070 )

Molony, the first American and non-Asian honored by the World Federation of Chinese Medicine Societies (WFCMS), has been a mighty champion advancing Chinese medicine in the western world.

In his career as Executive Director for the AAAOM for a decade, Molony wrote, promoted and helped enact state laws for the legalization of acupuncture and Chinese medicine in the United States.

“Chinese medicine is growing world wide and is increasingly accepted because it’s multi-millennial history as a preventative, therapeutic, and safe field of medicine. It promotes whole body healing,” says Molony, who has served numerous organizations throughout the United States and worldwide including, developing educational criteria for the World Health Organization (WHO).

“Acupuncture receives plenty of publicity, but it is only one finger on the hand of Chinese Medicine, which is a field of medicine in its own right. To understand acupuncture requires a complete education in the foundations of Chinese medical science,” said Molony. Molony and his wife Ming operate Lehigh Valley Oriental Medicine Centre, Catasauqua, PA.

Molony’s three-decade career includes significant positions with the World Federation of Chinese Medicine Societies, The American Association of Acupuncture and Oriental Medicine, the Association for Professional Acupuncture in Pennsylvania, plus dozens of national academic and international organizations.

Molony offered strategic recommendations to the Food and Drug Administration, the White House Commission of Complementary and Alternative Medicine, The National Center for Complementary and Alternative Medicine, the Institute of Medicine, and the United States Traditional Medicine Congress.

When he served at the National Conference of State Legislatures to educate legislator(s), Molony aided to help expand the number of states that legislatively accept acupuncture and herbal medicine to 43 from 26 states. In 1998, Molony penned the AAOM Complete Guide to Chinese Herbal Medicine (Berkeley Health Press).

Photo: NewsCom: http://www.newscom.com/cgi-bin/prnh/20070508/CLTU070AP Archive: http://photoarchive.ap.org/PRN Photo Desk, [email protected]

Dr. David Molony

CONTACT: Dr. David Molony, +1-610-264-2755, cell, +1-610-462-6434,[email protected]; or Press: Tina Bradford, +1-610-248-3460,[email protected], for Dr. David Molony

Principal Quits Over Tenure

By DEENA YELLIN, STAFF WRITER

WASHINGTON TOWNSHIP The Westwood Regional School District is searching for a replacement for Washington Elementary School Principal John Smatla, who recently announced his resignation.

“He didn’t give us a reason,” said Eileen Mosolino, the Board of Education president, about Smatla’s abrupt decision.

Smatla, who had been at the school for three years, said he opted to resign rather than suffer a blot on his employment record. According to Smatla, Superintendent Geoffrey Zoeller recently told him that he would not be recommended for tenure.

“He expressed that he did not know me well,” Smatla said Monday. “He [Zoeller] was not comfortable with me. I was just not his guy. I chose to resign rather than not be rehired.”

But district officials denied Smatla’s allegations about the tenure appointment.

“That was not even up for discussion yet,” Zoeller said. “We would not have gotten around to discussing contract renewals until later in May. The issue of tenure was not discussed.”

District parents and staff, who were distraught by the news, complained and wrote letters to school officials and local newspapers, praising Smatla for his devotion to the job and urging the district to keep him.

“We sincerely feel that a grave injustice has been made to our primary concern, the education of the children at Washington School,” reads a letter sent to school officials by several parents and staff.

But district leaders said the matter was out of their hands. “We hate to lose anyone but it’s his choice,” Mosolino said. She expressed confidence that the board would find a replacement by September to head the K-4 elementary school in Washington Township.

The district has lost several staff members in recent months, fueling grumblings in the district about low morale among employees. Officials chose not to renew the contract of a Spanish teacher after three years because some in the district were not satisfied with her performance, according to Zoeller.

A high school principal is retiring after 44 years on the job, in addition to the retirement of a kindergarten teacher. A junior high school teacher is leaving because she’s getting married to someone in another state, Zoeller said.

“We have had some retirements this year, but I attribute that to nothing other than typical retirements. We’re seeing the same number of retirements as usual,” he said.

“There’s been people upset about Smatla resigning,” Zoeller said. “He’s done some positive things at the school and we wish him well. If that’s how he wants to pursue his career, than that’s what he should do.”

But Smatla says he would have stayed had he been offered tenure. He is interviewing for other positions, but said he will remain devoted to the children of his school until the end of the year.

“I’m going to work hard until the end of June,” said Smatla, who said he often comes into work on Saturdays and vacations. “I’ll continue working as hard as I can.

“My students love me. They give me artwork to hang on my door. The staff, parents and teachers have been incredible. I’m floored by their support. They’ve all been asking me to stay.”

***

E-mail: [email protected]

(c) 2007 Record, The; Bergen County, N.J.. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Milliman Care Guidelines(R) 11th Edition Features New and Expanded Clinical Content

SEATTLE, May 8 /PRNewswire/ — More than a thousand leading payors, hospitals and providers are updating their clinical decision support resources with the 11th Edition of the evidence-based Milliman Care Guidelines(R).

The annually updated Care Guidelines, released in February, include new and expanded clinical content, new healthcare management tools for busy doctors and nurses, and new and improved software, including the interactive CareWebQI(SM) software for users without extensive in-house IT support. Healthcare professionals use Milliman’s clinical guidelines and interactive software to support the care of one in three Americans.

To prepare the 11th Edition, Milliman Care Guidelines clinical editorial staff reviewed more than 100,000 articles and research reports from medical journals and publications worldwide. Information from some 13,000 of these references is included in the current six-product Care Guidelines series, which includes: Ambulatory Care, Inpatient and Surgical Care, General Recovery Guidelines, Recovery Facility Care, Home Care and Chronic Care Guidelines.

Expanded Clinical Coverage

While every product has been updated, some changes will significantly increase the Care Guidelines impact on patient outcomes and usability in a clinical setting:

   -- To serve growing Spanish-speaking populations, patient educational      materials on each of the 24 chronic conditions covered in the Chronic      Care Guidelines product are available in Spanish for the 11th Edition.      Both English and Spanish patient education materials are written at a      fourth-grade level and designed to be given to the patient as part of      an intervention.   -- The Ambulatory Care product includes updated evidence summaries,      incorporating the latest research about emerging technologies.  For      example, the 11th Edition significantly expands information on Imaging      and Injectables.   -- The Chronic Care Guidelines product is expanded to provide clinical      tools to manage 24 chronic, complex, or multi-diagnosis conditions,      including new guidelines on Chemical Dependency, Parkinson Disease and      Solid Organ Transplantation.   -- The Recovery Facility Care product incorporates and flags 2007 Joint      Commission Long Term Care Goals, while the Home Care product now      includes flagged Joint Commission Home Care National Patient Safety      Goals.  The Home Care product also adds information designed to help      clinicians and care managers provide culturally and linguistically      appropriate healthcare.   -- The Inpatient and Surgical Care product adds new Patient Education and      Information content and Care Management Tools, and also expands      coverage of Common Complications and Conditions.   -- Recovery Facility Care now features problem-oriented guidelines that      can be used for patients without a specific diagnosis.  New guidelines      include Delirium Management, Pain Management, Wound and Skin      Management, Neurologic Rehabilitation, Orthopedic Rehabilitation, and      End-of-Life Care.    New Software, Improved Interactivity and Access  

For healthcare facilities without extensive IT support, the Care Guidelines products now are available in easy-to-use, web-based CareWebQI interactive workflow software. The new software documents users’ interactions with the Care Guidelines. It also reports on resulting real-time clinical data, including variances from evidence-based best practice; physician, facility and resource delays; national quality measures, and more. This hosted solution requires no installation or integration at the customer site, thus minimizing demand for in-house IT resources.

For clinicians using PDAs, key Ambulatory Care content now is available for easy reference in both Pocket PC and Palm OS software. This is in addition to the most widely used Inpatient and Surgical Care and General Recovery Guidelines content that was already available through Handheld software.

The powerful, customizable CareGuideQI(R) interactive workflow software also has been upgraded with the latest Care Guidelines content, several new content-access features, an enhanced reporting dashboard, new reports for the Ambulatory Care and Chronic Care Guidelines products, a configurable interface to meet specific user roles, and improved audit-trail abilities.

Behavioral Health Guidelines Coming Soon

Milliman Care Guidelines has scheduled a mid-year release for the Behavioral Health Guidelines product, using the same evidence-based approach as other Care Guidelines products. It will provide clinicians and care managers with well-documented, evidence-based healthcare criteria, care pathway tables, and annotated bibliographies addressing five levels of care for acute and chronic behavioral conditions.

Milliman Care Guidelines

Milliman Care Guidelines LLC, A Milliman Company, is headquartered in Seattle, Washington, and has produced evidence-based clinical guidelines since 1990. More than 1,000 healthcare organizations license the Care Guidelines. For more information, visit http://www.careguidelines.com/.

Milliman Care Guidelines is a wholly owned subsidiary of Milliman, which serves the full spectrum of business, financial, government, and union organizations. Founded in 1947 as Milliman & Robertson, the company has 47 offices in principal cities in the United States and worldwide. Milliman employs more than 2,000 people, including a professional staff of over 900 qualified consultants and actuaries. The firm has consulting practices in employee benefits, healthcare, life insurance/financial services, and property & casualty insurance. It is a founding member of Milliman Global, an international organization of consulting firms serving insurance, employee benefits and healthcare clients around the globe. For further information, visit http://www.milliman.com/.

Milliman Care Guidelines

CONTACT: Scott Harris, Senior Vice President of Sales and Marketing ofMilliman Care Guidelines, +1-206-381-8160, Cell, +1-480-203-7268,[email protected]

Web site: http://www.milliman.com/http://www.careguidelines.com/

MemberHealth Announces Agreement to Be Acquired By Universal American

MemberHealth, Inc. announced today that it has entered into a definitive agreement under which it would be acquired by Universal American Financial Corp. (“Universal American”) of Rye Brook, NY (NASDAQ: UHCO).

The purchase price will be approximately $630 million, consisting of 55 percent in cash and 45 percent in Universal American common stock valued at $20 per share, plus potential performance-based consideration. The transaction, which is expected to close late in the third quarter of 2007, is subject to customary closing conditions, including approval by the shareholders of Universal American and appropriate regulatory approvals. Universal American expects the transaction to be accretive to pro forma earnings immediately following the closing.

MemberHealth is sponsor of CCRx, a leading national Medicare Part D Prescription Drug Plan with more than 1.1 million beneficiaries. Universal American is a specialty health and life insurance holding company. Through its family of companies, Universal American offers a broad array of health insurance and managed care products primarily to the senior population, including Medicare Advantage and Medicare Supplement plans.

Charles E. Hallberg, president and CEO of MemberHealth, said the transaction is good for seniors because Universal American and MemberHealth will add more competition to the industry and will work together to form new plans that focus on prevention, wellness and taking medicines correctly to stay healthy.

“Both MemberHealth and Universal American share the philosophy of keeping seniors healthy and have programs to support such initiatives. That’s what made Universal American an attractive partner for us — they strongly believe in empowering physicians and pharmacists in healthcare decisions,” Hallberg said. “This is an exciting opportunity to combine both companies’ philosophies and create new health programs that can meet an expanded range of needs for Medicare beneficiaries.”

The transaction is expected to create significant strategic benefits, including the opportunity for Universal American to build upon MemberHealth’s successful pharmacy-driven business model through its ongoing alliance with the National Community Pharmacists Association (“NCPA”) and to introduce additional value-oriented health products and services into the market. The acquisition also is expected to result in enhanced distribution opportunities for Universal American’s extensive agent field force.

Richard A. Barasch, chairman and Chief Executive Officer of Universal American, said the transaction creates unique opportunities for not only the company, but pharmacists and seniors.

“We are excited about bringing MemberHealth into the Universal American family, as it will expand our Part D business while providing our customers with greater access to community pharmacists, many of whom are the main providers of health services in the rural areas we serve,” Barasch said. “With the addition of MemberHealth, we will manage Medicare Advantage, Part D, or other insurance coverage for more than 2.1 million Medicare beneficiaries and will administer prescription drug benefits for another 3.5 million consumers through the MemberHealth PBM.”

For people currently enrolled in MemberHealth’s CCRx Medicare Part D plans in 2007, their benefits, premiums, co-payments, network pharmacies, customer service numbers and ID cards will remain the same. For pharmacies currently in the MemberHealth network, claims submission procedures, customer service numbers and reimbursement rates will remain the same.

About MemberHealth: MemberHealth, Inc. (MHRx) is a leading national Medicare Part D sponsor, offering Medicare prescription drug plans in 50 states, District of Columbia, Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands. MemberHealth has more than 60,000 pharmacies in its pharmacy network and covers 98 percent of the top 100 medications taken by Medicare beneficiaries. MHRx established its reputation as a visionary provider of prescription drug benefits for insured and self-insured groups and discount prescription programs across the country, by focusing on strengthening the relationships between patients, their pharmacists and physicians, which ensures that patients can take medicines with confidence and save money. For more information on MHRx, please visit our Web sites at www.mhrx.com or www.communitycarerx.com.

About Universal American: Universal American Financial Corp. is a specialty health and life insurance holding company. Through our family of companies, we offer a broad array of health insurance and managed care products and services, primarily to the growing senior population. Universal American is included in the NASDAQ Financial-100 Index, the Russell 2000 Index and the Russell 3000 Index. For more information on Universal American, please visit our Web site at www.uafc.com.

Omahans Hear Story of Survival

By Qianna Bradley, Omaha World-Herald, Neb.

May 8–No food, no clothes, no water.

There was no life at 14,000 feet in the Andes for an Uruguayan rugby team, whose plane crashed in the mountains in October 1972.

The team was on its way to Chile for a match.

For Nando Parrado, one of 16 of the 45 people who survived the disaster, the memories are still vivid.

“Rescue didn’t come on the first day, second day or third day,” Parrado told a crowd of more than 1,200 Monday at the ninth annual D.J.’s Hero Awards Luncheon at the Qwest Center Omaha. “Day six, day seven, day eight — they never came.”

Help didn’t come for 72 days.

Parrado, who was 19 at the time, recalled the temperatures of 40 degrees below zero at night, huddling with his teammates for warmth.

“The cold burned like acid,” he said.

Parrado was knocked unconscious by the crash, suffering a fractured skull in four places.

When he awoke, he learned that his mother, who had come along on the trip, was killed in the crash and that his sister was near death. She died while he held her in his arms.

The survivors were finally rescued in December 1972.

Their story became the best-selling book “Alive,” and a movie starring Ethan Hawke as Parrado.

The real Parrado told his Omaha audience that the biggest key to survival is having love for your family.

“You never know what’s going to happen tomorrow,” he said.

The Salvation Army coordinates the event to pay tribute to six young Nebraskans who persevere to excel in school and in their communities.

The D.J.’s Hero awards are named in memory of D.J. Sokol, son of David and Peggy Sokol, who lost his battle with cancer at age 18.

The awards honor teenagers between the ages of 17 and 19. Recipients receive a $5,000 scholarship.

This year’s heroes are:

Zane Fried of Omaha: Fried, 18, was diagnosed with non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma in December 2005. His mission is to help others deal with cancer. When friends held a fundraiser for him, Fried donated the money to younger cancer patients at the Nebraska Medical Center so they could have toys and parties. His sense of humor has helped him write a book, which he is trying to get published, called “Awww, Crap: A Teenager’s Guide to Surviving Your First Year of Cancer.” With his cancer in remission, Fried has been accepted at the University of Southern California.

Nia Karmann of Grand Island: Karmann does not let spina bifida stop her from giving to others. She conducts classes for senior citizens at nursing homes and teaches children crafts and photography. The 18-year-old, who uses crutches and a wheelchair to get around, teaches children to clog dance and ride horses. She also volunteers in her church’s nursery, collects food for pantries and helps with the Toys for Tots program.

Micheal Kimberly of Holdrege: The 18-year-old volunteers as a mentor to elementary school pupils and wants to become a history teacher and teach near his hometown. Kimberly intends to become the first in his family to graduate from college. When he was 6 months old, his father was severely injured in a fall from a tree. Kimberly has willingly become one of his caretakers. He also volunteers unloading trucks and carrying groceries for senior citizens.

Chelsea LeGrow of Omaha: LeGrow reaches out to others and keeps a positive attitude, as she gives her time making and delivering blankets to children with cancer. The 18-year-old also has given love and care to 50 foster children that her parents have taken into their home. She befriends and helps special-needs children at her school, is involved in numerous community groups and is a youth leader at her church.

Katherine Schueths of Lincoln: The 18-year-old holds the highest honor that a Girl Scout can receive, the Gold Award. She trained a therapy dog named Casey and visits patients at Madonna Rehabilitation Hospital. Schueths is also a Junior Achievement award winner and volunteers with Alzheimer’s patients. She has dealt with her own health problems, suffering strokes at age 11. She developed a program for people with stroke-related disabilities, called Two Size Shoe Exchange, for people who wear different sized shoes.

Sara Watson of Alliance: Watson has participated in 22 volunteer activities in high school. The 17-year-old senior volunteers for the Meals on Wheels program, Adopt a Grandparent and a community food drive, among others. She has shown perseverance through her mother’s diagnosis of breast cancer and her father’s death. She is president of her student council and was class president for three years.

The Salvation Army also honors an adult hero each year.

This year it’s Louie Warren, president and CEO of Greater Omaha YMCA. Warren has spent 31 years with the organization, helping young people find a better future.

—–

Copyright (c) 2007, Omaha World-Herald, Neb.

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

Nick Colucci Named President and CEO of Publicis Healthcare Communications Group

NEW YORK, May 7 /PRNewswire-FirstCall/ — Nick Colucci has been appointed President and CEO of Publicis Healthcare Communications Group , replacing Ed Rady, his mentor and colleague for the past 11 years. Mr. Rady, who has been named Chairman, will remain in that position through the end of the year.

The move, in the works for three years, marks one of the smoothest transitions in advertising history. Mr. Colucci, 47, was named Mr. Rady’s successor in 2004, when he was promoted to the position of COO. Since then, he has gradually assumed all the responsibilities that go with the CEO’s job, beginning with North American operations for Advertising and Medical Education. Last year, his portfolio was expanded to include International Operations.

As CEO, Mr. Colucci will be responsible for all the companies of Publicis Healthcare Communications Group, including Medical and Scientific Affairs, the Contract Sales Organization (Publicis Selling Solutions) and various digital businesses. He reports to John Farrell, President and CEO of Specialized Agencies & Marketing Services (SAMS), Publicis Groupe Worldwide.

“Publicis Groupe has built a powerhouse in healthcare communications,” said John Farrell, who pointed out that the agency is the only global communications group that houses nearly all of its healthcare companies under a single umbrella.

“The integration of these agencies into a single organization allows for greater collaboration,” he explained. “And collaboration means greater strength, creativity and market share. Together, Ed and Nick have propelled the group toward tremendous growth. Now Nick, with his boundless energy and passion, will accelerate that growth as we move ahead.”

The healthcare division has been on a growth trajectory ever since its inception in 2003. Revenues have increased by more than 50 percent. Saatchi & Saatchi Healthcare and Medicus Group are among the leading brands in the division.

Mr. Colucci, who joined Medicus in 1997, became its president in 2000. When Mr. Rady became the first CEO of Publicis Healthcare, Mr. Colucci was named COO. And when Mr. Rady set a timetable for stepping down, Mr. Colucci was his designated heir.

“Nick is an outstanding manager,” Mr. Rady said, adding that the two have had an excellent relationship throughout the transition period. The former CEO, who is 58, looks forward to ending a 10-year commute to the New York office from his home in Scottsdale, Arizona. He will remain as an advisor to the management team throughout 2007.

“Strategies may change. But core principles-such as integrity, collaboration, communication and learning-never do,” said Mr. Colucci, who began his career at Hoffmann-LaRoche, Inc. as a sales representative, and gradually worked his way up to Marketing Director.

A graduate of the University of Rochester, where he earned a BS in neuroscience, Mr. Colucci also has an MBA from Loyola College of Maryland. He lives in Westfield, NJ with his wife, Ellie, and their three children.

About Publicis Healthcare Communications Group

The Healthcare Group is a fully-integrated division of Publicis Groupe SA. As one of the largest healthcare communications groups in the world, Publicis Healthcare has more than 2,700 employees in 10 countries. Worldwide services include advertising, medical education, sales and marketing, and medical and scientific affairs. Publicis Healthcare offers its clients a strategic partnership, a strong focus on ensuring value for their marketing spend, and exceptional performance on their assignments. Web site: http://www.publicishealthcare.com/

About Publicis Groupe

Publicis Groupe (Euronext Paris: FR0000130577 and NYSE: PUB) is the world’s fourth largest communications group, as well as world’s second largest media counsel and buying group. With activities spanning 104 countries on five continents, the Groupe employs approximately 42,000 professionals.

The Groupe’s communication activities cover advertising, through three autonomous global advertising networks: Leo Burnett, Publicis, Saatchi & Saatchi, as well as through its two multi-hub networks Fallon Worldwide and 49%-owned Bartle Bogle Hegarty; media consultancy and buying through two worldwide networks ZenithOptimedia and Starcom MediaVest Group; interactive and digital marketing, marketing services and specialized communications including direct marketing, public relations, corporate and financial communications, event communications, multicultural and with a worldwide leadership in healthcare communications.

   CONTACT: (212) 286-2424            Julie Laitin                      Bridget Calafell            Email: [email protected]    Email: [email protected]  

Publicis Groupe

CONTACT: Julie Laitin, [email protected], or Bridget Calafell,[email protected], both for Publicis Groupe, +1-212-286-2424

Sewickley Valley Hospital Launches ‘A Picture is Worth a Hundred Years’ Baby Photo Contest for 100th Anniversary

SEWICKLEY, Pa., May 7 /PRNewswire/ — Sewickley Valley Hospital, part of Heritage Valley Health System, is launching a call for entries for its “A Picture is Worth A Hundred Years” baby photo contest to commemorate the hospital’s 100th anniversary. Sewickley Valley Hospital is seeking submissions of baby photos from anyone born there in the last 100 years to mark “A History of Good Health.”

The hospital will select one photo from each of the 100 years that the hospital has served the community. Photos will be included in a commemorative advertising campaign and other promotional materials, such as limited edition posters, banners, and newspaper ads, along with a group baby photo on the Heritage Valley Web site.

The culmination of the contest will take place Saturday, June 23, at Sewickley Valley Hospital from 10 a.m. to 4 p.m. at the Centennial Celebration. At the free event, which is open to the public, contest winners will be announced and a group baby photo will be taken.

Anyone born at Sewickley Valley Hospital in the last 100 years, or parents of those born at the hospital, can e-mail baby photos to [email protected], or mail them to:

   Sewickley Valley Hospital Foundation   720 Blackburn Road   Sewickley, PA 15143   

All photos must include name, contact information, and date of birth of the photographed person. The deadline for entries is June 8. All photos will be returned.

The Centennial Celebration, which will take place at the Fitch Circle entrance on Blackburn Road, will feature health screenings (including osteoporosis heel screening, blood pressure checks, diabetes information and many more), entertainment, and refreshments. To be a part of this celebration on June 23 without submitting a photo, call 412-749-7050, or visit http://www.heritagevalley.org/.

About Heritage Valley Health System

Heritage Valley Health System provides comprehensive health care for residents of Allegheny, Beaver, Butler and Lawrence counties, in Pennsylvania; eastern Ohio; and the panhandle of West Virginia. In partnership with more than 500 physicians, Heritage Valley offers a broad range of medical, surgical and diagnostic services at its two hospitals, Heritage Valley Sewickley and Heritage Valley Beaver; in physician offices; and community satellite facilities. For more information about Heritage Valley Health System, please visit http://www.heritagevalley.org/.

Heritage Valley Health System

CONTACT: Scott Monit of Heritage Valley Health System, +1-724-773-2046

Web site: http://www.heritagevalley.org/

Pond Life…The Good, the Bad and the Ugly

By CHARLIE DIMMOCK

WHEN I worked in a water garden centre, customers were forever asking me: ‘I’ve got this creature in my pond what is it?’ Well, lots of things live in ponds, I had to tell them.

I’ve found many weird and wonderful creatures in ponds over the years, including believe it or not an eel. They can travel quite a long way over land between one stretch of water and another.

In one customer’s pond, I came across a couple of stone loaches, which are river fish, so how they got there I’ve no idea. These days I’m more often asked about all the creepy-crawlies not just what they are but what they do.

Snails tend to be the things people notice most. They think they are necessary because they eat decomposing vegetation which they do but they also eat live water plants.

So, if you make a new pond, don’t buy snails straightaway.

Get your water plants established and, after a year or two, when everything has settled down, then you can introduce some snails.

Go for the ramshorn varieties, which have flat, coiled shells they are the least voracious.

Should surplus snails be removed?

Usually not. If you’ve got fish, they’ll eat a lot of the snail eggs and the smaller snails while they are still softish-shelled.

However, if your plants look eaten to bits and aren’t establishing well, then, yes, by all means pare down the snail population. You’ll often find them clustering on one plant to which they are partial usually the water hawthorn.

Freshwater shrimps are something else pond owners worry about. They look like woodlice with long shrimptype feelers at the front and can grow up to an inch long. They are quite good for the pond since they scavenge on the bottom and filter the water. They’ll also attract birds, which eat them.

There are several kinds of beetle you might see on the water on fine summery days. Water boatmen are slim and have one long, thin leg sticking out each side of the body, like oars, which they use for scooting themselves over the surface.

They feed on dead and dying insects that drop on to the surface of the water. You can attract them by taking a blade of grass and just touching the surface of the water it makes a tiny ripple and the water boatmen come towards it to see if there’s something to eat.

The diving beetle is another one you might see. They are dark and ovalish with beige legs and hang out mostly in waterweeds but you’ll sometimes see them come to the surface then dive down again.

They get a bad Press because they are said to eat fish but it’s only the fry and tadpoles they go for, and if something didn’t keep the numbers down, your pond would be heaving.

Then there are all your different dragonflies and damselflies. The adults are the spectacular stage but, like butterflies, they don’t live long. The larvae are big and ugly with bug eyes like underwater aliens and they eat all sorts of small pond creatures including tadpoles.

Some of them take three years to reach maturity and you don’t usually see them because they stay hidden in the waterweeds. Often all you’ll notice are the empty cases left on iris stems when they’ve hatched out.

But one water insect that’s very welcome is the daphnia, or water flea.

These sometimes turn up all on their own in summer they look like clouds of tiny, translucent dots moving in short, quick jerks in clear, shallow water near oxygenating waterweeds.

You get them only if the pond is mature and the natural balance is just right. So, if you see them, you know you’ve got a healthy pond.

You can buy live daphnia at fish centres, where they are sold partly as fish food and to clear the water, which they do by filtering it.

Water bugs won’t bite but some people are squeamish about them.

We had a few customers like that at the water garden centre, who called me in to get rid of them. My boss used to love that because all the big old plants we’d remove in the process made free propagating material for our sales area.

The clearout’s due now unless you want a swamp

SPLIT up overgrown marginal plants in spring if you let them get too big, they’ll swamp the pond and you’ll have to clear everything out and start from scratch. Most can be lifted out and divided in late April or early May but do the water irises a few weeks after they’ve finished flowering, in late June, so you don’t miss out on this year’s blooms.

Do it just like dividing herbaceous border plants split them up with a spade, save the strongest-looking crowns to replant back into your planting basket and discard the weaker ones. Use pond compost or garden soil free from any chemicals or fertiliser and put an inch of gravel over the surface to stop the soil washing out when you lower the basket back into the pond.

Don’t divide waterlilies until they desperately need it and then do it around mid-May. If you buy a small variety in the first place, you’ll hardly ever have to divide it. Don’t divide waterlilies up too small, thinking: If I just put a tiny bit back, I won’t have to do it again for a long time. It’s better to put three good bits back in one basket so you quickly have a proper covering of leaves again, which is better for the biological balance of your pond.

And when you replant your new crowns, take off all the bashed or broken ones because they’ll just rot and foul the water.

(c) 2007 Mail on Sunday; London (UK). Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

We Are Eating Ourselves Ill

By Cole Moreton

Coke,ritain is fat. We know that. Chefs B and doctors, footballers and even pop stars tell us over and over again, in campaigns against the obesity epidemic. But now, as The Independent on Sunday reveals, new data show that an alarming number of Britons actually suffer from malnutrition.

Doctors estimate that more than three million people are malnourished. Most do not re-alise it, although diagnosis rates in hospitals have soared by 44 per cent over the past five years. The most extreme cases echo symptoms found among famine victims in the developing world. Wasted limbs and pot bellies are being seen in British hospitals, where 40 per cent of patients are thought to be malnourished. Marasmus, the protein deficiency most often seen in Africa, has been found among anorexic women here.

But the majority of cases are people who lack the vitamins and nutrients vital for the body to function properly. Malnourishment has recently been recognised as a major problem for the sick, elderly and frail, but new statistics gathered for the Department of Health show it affects pregnant women and newborn babies, schoolchildren and adults who believe themselves to be healthy.

One woman who vomited frequently during pregnancy developed a vitamin deficiency that went undiagnosed. She suffered brain damage. The calcium shortage found in 8 per cent of young people can lead to crumbling or brittle bones.

“If you are young and well, you can still end up malnourished,” said Dr Alistair McKinlay, consultant gastro-enterolo-gist at Aberdeen Royal Infirmary and one of the country’s leading authorities on the condition. “In 75 per cent of people, the problem is not identified.”

Malnutrition costs the NHS [pound]7.3bn a year according to the British Association for Parenteral and Enteral Nutrition, the experts in the field. That figure is more than double the estimated cost of obesity.

Alcohol and drugs can disturb the balance of our bodies – but the main cause, doctors believe, is a poor diet. So how can this be? When there is so much food about, from low-fat diet meals to high- fat takeaways, how can so many people be short of the nutrients essential for a healthy life? What has gone wrong between the British and our food?

Gordon Ramsay, one of the best chefs in the world, blames habits learned in the home. “If we are going to be a healthy nation then you’ve got to discipline the parents,” he told the IoS in a rare interview. “The only way to implement severe standards now is if their kids become obesely overweight and out of control. Then I would seriously fine [the parents] and threaten them with a court appearance, because they often don’t realise what they’re doing.” Children need to be given a strong lead, he said. “Children eat with their eyes. They’re lazy. If you don’t tell them about what they’re eating, trust me, they will eat as much crap as they can when they get home. They get connected to junk food in a way that becomes obsessive.”

The Michelin-star winning father of four gave his children tripe the other week, in a stew with red peppers, tomato and garlic. He didn’t tell them what it was. “It was absolutely delicious. They said, ‘What was that?’ I showed them a picture of a cow, and took out the stomach bag, and their faces dropped. But they asked for it again.”

Ramsay was full of praise for the efforts of Jamie Oliver to improve school dinners. “He helped to make every parent feel guilty, for the first time, about what their children were eating at school. He woke everyone up.”

Oliver said: “I think many parents are unaware of how much junk their kids are eating and drinking.” He added: “As well as the frightening rise in obesity there’s a growing number of kids, of whatever shape and size, that simply aren’t getting fed enough nutrients like iron, calcium and vitamins. It’s having a huge effect on their brainpower, behaviour and ability to concentrate and learn at school.”

Adults may not realise they have serious problems. The national diet and nutrition surveys carried out by the Department of Health show two-thirds of women are short of vitamin B2, riboflavin, which can cause a range of illnesses (so are nearly a quarter of pre- school infants). Young men and women alike have high levels of the amino acid homocysteine, which indicates their vitamin levels are disturbed. Doctors believe our drinking culture must take part of the blame.

People are eating less home-cooked food and more junk, said Dr Colin Waine, chairman of the National Obesity Forum formed to tackle the epidemic. Fast food can not only make you fat, it can also leave you malnourished. “I would definitely question the vitamin and mineral trace of some fast food outlets.”

Hospital food also came under severe attack last year when the Government admitted that many elderly people were not getting enough vitamins, nutrients and fatty acids. The trouble is that most doctors were trained during a time when malnutrition appeared to have died out, said Dr Waine. “The best diet we had was during the First World War when we had a good rationing system – people had the right nutrients in the right amounts.”

Bianca Incocciati’s GP did not realise her patient’s skin problems were a result of micronutrient malnutrition. “You think it happens to starving children in the third world,” said Ms Incocciati. “You don’t expect it to happen to you. It’s scary.”

The doctor she went to for a second opinion asked what she had been eating. Ms Incocciati was studying English at Warwick University and waitressing at a French restaurant in the evenings, scoffing late at night and unable to face breakfast. After closing, the restaurant’s chefs sometimes whipped up a rich dinner, heavy on cheese and creamy sauces, for the staff. At other times she would snack at home on pasta or toast. She was also a self-confessed crisp addict.

“I felt I had no energy at all,” she said. “I was always tired and constantly had a cold. I had spots all the time too.” Ms Incocciati was shocked to be told she had very low levels of vitamin A, vitamin B12 and iron. “Eating late, you’re not digesting food properly. Getting up late, having a coffee, you’re running on empty.”

After two weeks of increasing her fruit and vegetable intake and eating more regularly Ms Incocciati had more energy and felt more “with it”. After four months she had lost weight. Eighteen months since she was diagnosed, she is a reformed character. “Where I’d been going wrong was that I wasn’t cooking food at home, wasn’t making sure I was having vegetables and fruit.” Her parents had given her an example Gordon Ramsay would approve of. “They were always really good about having dinner together and having cooked meals.” But despite their best efforts she grew into bad habits. “Once you leave home, it’s easy to buy rubbish.”

Ms Incocciati was not alone. Despite all the campaigns to educate people about healthy eating, as our reports today show, for three million malnourished people the message still has-n’t got through.

What is malnutrition?

Malnutrition is caused by a deficiency, excess or imbalance of energy, protein and other nutrients. The condition may result from an inadequate or unbalanced diet, digestive difficulties, absorption problems or other medical conditions. It is a chronic condition, which can injure the spleen and stomach. Malnutrition can occur because of a chronic lack of one key vitamin or because the body isn’t getting enough food. Starvation is an extreme form of malnutrition and can occur even in people who are clinically obese.

The symptoms of malnutrition include acute weight loss, losing hair, muscle wastage, a swollen abdomen, a dull yellow complexion and dry, crinkled skin. Sufferers also have dull eyes, listlessness, tiredness, cravings and brown stained teeth. In extreme cases it can be fatal and lead to anaemia, beriberi, goitre, scurvy and rickets.

How your diet should have got healthier

1977

Breakfast: Quaker Porridge Oats with full-fat milk, a boiled egg and toast

Lunch: canned ham and pickle sandwiches, and an apple

Dinner: homemade meatloaf with boiled potatoes and boiled cabbage, followed by a bowl of homemade rice pudding.

1987

Breakfast: toast and jam, eggs, bacon and fried tomato, orange juice

Lunch: hamburger and fries, Mars Bar, Coke, an orange

Dinner: macaroni cheese/frozen breadcrumbed turkey burgers (microwaved), Wall’s ice cream, apple.

1997

Breakfast: banana, breakfast bar, toast and Marmite, sugarcoated cereal/bacon sandwich, orange juice

Lunch: bacon, lettuce and tomato roll/ Coronation chicken sandwich, crisps, nectarine

Dinner: lasagne, green salad, rhubarb crumble.

2007

Breakfast: fruit salad, muesli, yoghurt, smoothie, coffee

Lunch: chicken Caesar salad/chorizo and roast pepper sandwich/ lentil pasta salad, passion fruit juice, mango

Dinner: Stir-fried noodles with organic chicken and crispy vegetables, with a tomato and onion salad on the side.

Many Scientists are Convinced that Man Can See the Future

By DR DANNY PENMAN

PROFESSOR Dick Bierman sits hunched over his computer in a darkened room. The gentle whirring of machinery can be heard faintly in the background. He smiles and presses a grubby-looking red button. In the next room, a patient slips slowly inside a hospital brain scanner. If it wasn’t for the strange smiles and grimaces that flicker across the woman’s face, you could be forgiven for thinking this was just a normal health check.

But this scanner is engaged in one of the most profound paranormal experiments of all time, one that may well prove whether or not it is possible to predict the future.

For the results – released exclusively to the Daily Mail – suggest that ordinary people really do have a sixth sense that can help them ‘see’ the future.

Such amazing studies – if verified – might help explain the predictive powers of mediums and a range of other psychic phenomena such Extra Sensory Perception, dEj vu and clairvoyance. On a more mundane level, it may account for ‘gut feelings’ and instinct.

The man behind the experiments is certainly convinced. ‘We’re satisfied that people can sense the future before it happens,’ says Professor Bierman, a psychologist at the University of Amsterdam. ‘We’d now like to move on and see what kind of person is particularly good at it.’ And Bierman is not alone: his findings mirror the data gathered by other scientists and paranormal researchers both here and abroad.

Professor Brian Josephson, a Nobel Prize-winning physicist from Cambridge University, says: ‘So far, the evidence seems compelling. What seems to be happening is that information is coming from the future.

‘In fact, it’s not clear in physics why you can’t see the future. In physics, you certainly cannot completely rule out this effect.’ Virtually all the great scientific formulae which explain how the world works allow information to flow backwards and forwards through time – they can work either way, regardless.

SHORTLY after 9/11, strange stories began circulating about the lucky few who had escaped the outrage. It transpired that many of the survivors had changed their plans at the last minute after vague feelings of unease.

It was a subtle, gnawing feeling that ‘something’ was not right. Nobody vocalised it but shortly before the attacks, people started altering their plans out of an unspoken instinct.

One woman suffered crippling stomach pain while queuing for one of the ill-fated planes which flew into the World Trade Center. She made her way to the lavatory only to recover spontaneously. She missed her flight but survived the day. Amid the collective outpouring of grief and horror it was easy to overlook such stories or write them off as coincidences. But in fact, these kind of stories point to an interesting and deeper truth for those willing to look.

If, for example, fewer people decided to fly on aircraft that subsequently crashed, then that would suggest a subconscious ability to divine the future.

Well, strange as it seems, that’s just what happens.

THE aircraft which flew into the Twin Towers on 9/11 were unusually empty.

All the hijacked planes were carrying only half the usual number of passengers. Perhaps one unusually empty plane could be explained away, but all four?

And it wasn’t just on 9/11 that people subconsciously seemed to avoid disaster. The scientist Ed Cox found that trains ‘destined’ to crash carried far fewer people than they did normally.

Dr Jessica Utts, a statistician at the University of California, found exactly the same bizarre effect.

If it was possible to divine the future, you might expect those at the sharp end, such as pilots, to have the most finely tuned instincts of all. And again, that’s just what you see.

When the Air France Concorde crashed in 2000, it wasn’t long before the colleagues of those killed in the crash spoke about a sense of foreboding that had gripped the crew and flight engineers before the accident.

Speaking anonymously to the French newspaper Le Parisien, one spoke of a ‘morbid expectation of an accident’.

‘I had this sense that we were going to bump into the scenery,’ he said.

‘The atmosphere on the Concorde team for the last few months, if one has the guts to admit it, had been one of morbid expectation of an accident.

It was as if I was waiting for something to happen.’ All of these stories suggest that we can pick up premonitions of events that are yet to be.

Although these premonitions are not in glorious Technicolor, they are often emotionally powerful enough for us to act upon them.

In technical parlance it is known as ‘presentiment’ because emotional feelings are being received from the future, not hard facts or information.

The military has long been fascinated by such phenomena. For many years the U.S. military (and latterly the CIA) funded a secretive programme known as Stargate, which set out to investigate premonitions and the ability of mediums to predict the future.

Dr Dean Radin worked on the Stargate programme and became fascinated by the ability of ‘lucky’ soldiers to forecast the future.

These are the ones who survived battles against seemingly impossible odds.

Radin became convinced that thoughts and feelings – and occasionally-actual glimpses of the future – could flow backwards in time to guide soldiers. It helped them make lifesaving decisions, often on the basis of a hunch.

He devised an experiment to test these ideas. He hooked up volunteers to a modified lie detector, which measured an electrical current across the surface of the skin.

This current changes when a person reacts to an event such as seeing an extremely violent picture or video. It’s the electrical equivalent of a wince. Radin showed sexually explicit, violent or soothing images to volunteers in a random sequence determined by computer.

And he soon discovered that people began reacting to the pictures before they saw them. It was unmistakable.

They began to ‘wince’ a few seconds before they actually saw the image.

And it happened time and time again, way beyond what chance alone would allow.

So impressive were Radin’s results that Dr Kary Mullis, a Nobel Prizewinning chemist, took an interest.

He was hooked up to Radin’s machine and shown the emotionally charged images.

‘It’s spooky,’ he says ‘I could see about three seconds into the future.

You shouldn’t be able to do that.’ OTHER researchers from around the world, from Edinburgh University to Cornell in the U.S., rushed to duplicate Radin’s experiment and improve on it. And they got similar results.

It was soon discovered that gamblers began reacting subconsciously shortly before they won or lost. The same effect was seen in those terrified of animals, moments before they were shown the creatures. The odds against all of these trials being wrong are literally millions to one against.

Professor Dick Bierman decided to take this work even further. He is a psychologist who has become convinced that time as we understand it is an illusion. He could see no reason why people could not see into the future just as easily as we dip into memories of our past.

He’s in good company. Einstein described the distinction between the past, present and future as ‘a stubbornly persistent illusion’.

To prove Einstein’s point, Bierman looked inside the brains of volunteers using a hospital MRI scanner while he repeated Dr Radin’s experiments. These scanners show which parts of the brain are active when we do certain tasks or experience specific emotions.

Although extremely complex, and with each analysis taking weeks of computing time, he has run the experiments twice involving more than 20 volunteers.

And the results suggest quite clearly that seemingly ordinary people are capable of sensing the future on a fairly consistent basis.

Bierman emphasises that people are receiving feelings from the future rather than specific ‘visions’.

It’s clear, though, that if ordinary people can receive feelings from the future then perhaps the especially gifted may receive visions of things yet to be.

It’s also clear that many paranormal phenomena such as ESP and clairvoyance could have their roots in presentiment.

After all, if you can see a few seconds into the future, why not a few days or even years? And surely if you could look through time, why not across great distances?It’s a concept that ties the mind in knots, unless you’re a physicist.

‘I believe that we can “sense” the future,’ says the Nobel Prizewinning physicist Brian Josephson.

‘We just haven’t yet established the mechanism allowing it to happen.

‘People have had so called ” paranormal” or “transcendental” experiences along these lines. Bierman’s work is another piece of the jigsaw.

The fact that we don’t understand something does not mean that it doesn’t happen.’ If we are all regularly sensing the future or occasionally receiving glimpses of it, as some mediums claim to do, then doesn’t that mean we can change the future and render the ‘prediction’ obsolete?

Or perhaps we were meant to receive the premonition and act upon it? Such paradoxes could go on for ever, providing a rich seam of material for films such as Minority Report – based on a short story of the same name – in which a special police department is able to foresee and prevent crimes before they have even taken place.

COULD such science fiction have a grain of truth in it after all? The emerging view, Bierman explains, is that ‘the future has implications for the past’.

‘This phenomena allows you to make a decision on the basis of what will happen in the future.

Does that restrain our free will?

That’s up to the philosophers. I’m far too shallow a person to worry about that.’ The problem with presentiment is that it appears so nebulous that you can’t rely on it to make reliable decisions. That may be the case, but there are plenty of instances where people wished they had listened to their premonitions or feelings of presentiment.

One of the saddest involves the Aberfan disaster. This occurred in 1966 when a coal tip collapsed and swept through a Welsh school killing 144 people, including 116 children. It turned out that 24 people had received premonitions of the tragedy.

One involved a little girl who was killed. She told her mother shortly before she was taken to school: ‘I dreamed I went to school and there was no school there. Something black had come down all over it.’ So should we listen to our instincts, hunches and dreams?

Some experts believe we may already be using them in our everyday lives to a surprising degree.

Dr Jessica Utts at the University of California, who has worked for the U.S.

military and CIA as an independent auditor of its paranormal research, believes we are constantly sampling the future and using the knowledge to help us make better decisions.

‘I think we’re doing it all the time,’ she says. ‘We’ve looked at the data and it does seem to happen.’ So perhaps the Queen in Through The Looking Glass was right: ‘It’s a poor sort of memory that only works backwards.’

How Clinical Diagnosis Might Exacerbate the Stigma of Mental Illness

By Corrigan, Patrick W

Stigma can greatly exacerbate the experience of mental illness. Diagnostic classification frequently used by clinical social workers may intensify this stigma by enhancing the public’s sense of “groupness” and “differentness” when perceiving people with mental illness. The homogeneity assumed by stereotypes may lead mental health professionals and the public to view individuals in terms of their diagnostic labels. The stability of stereotypes may exacerbate notions that people with mental illness do not recover. Several strategies may diminish the unintended effects of diagnosis. Dimensional approaches to diagnosis may not augment stigma in the same manner as classification. Moreover, regular interaction with people with mental illness and focusing on recovery may diminish the stigmatizing effects of diagnosis.

KEY WORDS: diagnosis; DSM; empathy; stigma

Autistic children never play normally with other children. They often do not respond normally to their mothers’ affections or to any tenderness. (Freedman, Kaplan, & Sadock, 1976, p. 449)

The sociopath persistently violates the rights of others, shows indifference to commitments, and encounters conflict with the law. (Rathus, 1984, p. 451)

These quotes are two examples of how the use of diagnostic terms can sometimes worsen the stigma of mental illness. Stigma can significantly undermine the quality of life of people with mental illness. The social opprobrium that results from stigma can rob people labeled mentally ill of a variety of work, housing, and other life opportunities commonly enjoyed by adults in the United States. It can also prevent some people who might otherwise benefit from clinical services from pursuing treatment in an effort to avoid the label. One important part of the system of care-clinical diagnosis- may strengthen the stereotypes that lead to stigma. Diagnosis may intensify both the “groupness” and the “differentness” aspects governing public perceptions of people with mental illness.

THE PROBLEM OF THE STIGMA OF MENTAL ILLNESS

Stigma harms people with mental illness in three ways: label avoidance, blocked life goals, and self-stigma.

Label Avoidance

Epidemiological research has consistently shown that the majority of people who might benefit from mental health care either opt not to pursue it or do not fully adhere to treatment regimens once begun. As an example, consider people with schizophrenia, the group that might be construed as being most in need of services. Results from the Epidemiologic Catchment Area Study showed that only 60 percent of people with schizophrenia participated in treatment (Regier, Narrow, Rae, & Manderscheid, 1993). Taking into account symptom severity, Narrow and colleagues (2000) found that people with serious mental illness were no more likely to participate in treatment than those with relatively minor disorders. The National Comorbidity Survey showed similar results (Kessler et al., 2001); fewer than 40 percent of respondents with a serious mental illness such as schizophrenia had received medical treatment in the past year.

Research has suggested that many people choose not to pursue mental health services because they do not want to be labeled a”mental patient” or suffer the prejudice and discrimination that the label entails. Results from the Yale arm of the Epidemiological Catchment Area data showed negative attitudes about mental health inhibit service use in those at risk of a psychiatric disorder (Leaf, Bruce.Tischler, & Holzer, 1987). Findings from the National Comorbidity Survey identified stigmatizing beliefs that might sway people from treatment (Kessler et al., 2001).These included concerns about what others might think and the desire to solve one’s own problems. Sirey and colleagues (2001) found a direct relationship between stigmatizing attitudes and treatment adherence. Endorsing stigma was associated with whether 134 adults were compliant with their antidepressant medication regimen three months later. Hence, people may opt not to pursue treatment where labels are conferred to avoid the egregious effects of stigma.

Blocked Opportunities

A primary goal of mental health and rehabilitative services is to assist people in accomplishing their work, independent living, and relationship goals. In part, difficulties achieving goals occur because of the disabilities that result from serious mental illness (Corrigan, 2001). Some people with serious mental illness lack the social and coping skills to meet the demands of the competitive workforce and independent housing. Nevertheless, the problems of many people with psychiatric disability are further hampered by labels and stigma. People with mental illness are frequently unable to obtain good jobs or find suitable housing because of the prejudice of employers and landlords. Several studies have documented a consensus about the public’s widespread endorsement of stigmatizing attitudes (Bhugra, 1989; Brockington, Hall, Levings, & Murphy, 1993; Hamre, Dahl, & Malt, 1994; Link, 1987).These attitudes have a deleterious impact on people’s ability to obtain and keep good jobs (Farina & Felner, 1973; Farina, Felner, & Boudreau, 1973; Link, 1982,1987;Wahl, 1999) and lease safe housing (Farina, Thaw, Lovern, & Mangone, 1974; Hogan, 1985a, 1985b; Page, 1977,1983,1995;Wahl). Similar research has shown that stigma may undermine the general medical care received by people with mental illness (Druss, Bradford, Rosenheck, Radford, & Krumholz,2000).

Self-Stigma

People with mental illness who live in a society that widely endorses stigmatizing ideas may internalize these ideas and believe that they are less valued because of their psychiatric disorder (Link, 1987; Link & Phelan, 2001 ; Ritsher, Otilingam, & Grajales, 2003). Like public stigma, self-stigma includes “buying into” a set of stereotypes: “That’s right; I am weak and unable to care for myself!” Self-stigma leads to automatic thoughts and negative emotional reactions; prominent among these are shame, low self- esteem, and diminished self-efficacy. Self-stigma may also have a behavioral effect. Low self-efficacy and demoralization have been shown to be associated with people’s failing to pursue work or independent living opportunities at which they might otherwise succeed (Link, 1982,1987). Fueled by shame, their consequent behavior is to escape and avoid future similar situations.

A SOCIAL COGNITIVE DEFINITION OF STIGMA

Researchers working at the interface of social work and psychology have framed the stigma process in terms of four cognitive structures: cues, stereotypes, prejudice, and discrimination. This model (Figure 1) parallels a cognitive behavior model of action by specifying signal, cognitive mediator, and behavioral result (Corrigan, 2000). The process begins with stigmas, which are the cues that signal subsequent prejudice and discrimination.

Goffinan (1963) adopted the term stigma from the Greeks who defined it as a mark meant to publicly and prominently represent immoral status. Stigmas are typically the marks that, when observed by a majority group member.may lead to prejudice. Goffman noted that some stigmas are readily apparent and based on a physical sign such as skin color (a cue for ethnicity) or body size (a cue for obesity). Other stigmas are relatively hidden; for example, the public cannot generally tell who among a group of people falls into such stigmatized groups as gay men, Catholics, undereducated people, and people with mental illness. Instead of an unequivocal physical cue, hidden stigma is signaled by label or association (Link, Cullen, Frank, & Wozniak, 1987; Penn & Martin, 1998). Labels may be self-promoted (“I am a gay male”) or given by others (“That person is mentally ill”). Hidden stigma can also be ascertained based on association; for example, observation of someone leaving a psychiatric clinic might lead to the assumption that the person is mentally ill.

Theorists in this area of study view stereotypes as knowledge structures that are learned by most members of a cued social group (Augoustinos, Ahrens,& Innes, 1994; Judd & Park, 1993; Krueger, 1996). Stereotypes are especially efficient means of categorizing information about social groups. Just because most people have knowledge of a set of stereotypes does not imply that they agree with them (Devine, 1989; Jussim, Nelson, Manis, & Soffin, 1995). For example, many people can recall stereotypes about different racial groups but do not agree that the stereotypes are valid. People who are prejudiced, on the other hand, endorse these negative stereotypes (“That’s right; all people with mental illness are violent”) and generate negative emotional reactions as a result (“They all scare me”) (Devine, 1995;Krueger). In contrast to stereotypes, which are beliefs, prejudicial attitudes involve an evaluative (generally negative) component (Eagly & Chaiken, 1993).

Figure 1: Cognitive and Behavioral Structures that Comprise the Experience of Public Stigma against an Out-Group

Prejudice, which is fundamentally a cognitive and affective response, leads to discrimination, the behavioral reaction (Crocker, Major, & Steele, 1998). Discriminatory behavior manifests itself as negative action against the ou\t-group. Out-group discrimination includes outright violence (for example, lynching experienced by African Americans and assaults directed at gay men) and coercion (for example, laws that restrict the full rights of people in an ethnic or religious minority group, such as the Jim Crow laws of the late 180Os through the early 1960s). Out-group discrimination may also appear as avoidance, not associating with people from the out- group.This can be especially troublesome when employers decide not to hire and landlords decide not to rent to people from an ethnic or religious minority group to avoid them.

DIAGNOSIS AS STEREOTYPE

Stereotypes are one way in which a nave public identifies and describes a stigmatized group, in this case people with mental illness. Mental health professionals use diagnosis and nosology to describe this group. As outlined in systems such as the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (4th ed., or DSM-IV) (American Psychiatric Association [APA], 1994) and the International Statistical Classification of Diseases and Related Health Problems (10th ed.) (World Health Organization, 1992),diagnosis is fundamentally a classification enterprise. (Classification is not the only approach to diagnosis; continuous dimensions, which are discussed more fully later in this article, provide an alternative paradigm that is less prone to the stigma associated with categorization.) Thus, diagnosis assumes that all members of a group are homogeneous and that all groups are distinguished by definable boundaries (APA, 2000). Diagnostic classification serves several goals. It neatly corresponds with a dominant cognitive efficiency used by humans to understand a large amount of information (First, Frances, & Pincus, 1997; Rosch & Mueller, 1978). It provides clinicians with an efficient means for describing their patients that includes not only presentation of symptoms, but also expected course and prognosis. Diagnostic categorization may also suggest the causes of a syndrome as well as specific interventions that may ameliorate the disorder.

Despite these benefits, mental health professionals also recognize pitfalls to diagnosis and categorization (APA, 2000); one of these pitfalls is their impact on stigma. (The role of diagnosis in the stigma process is outlined in the bottom half of Figure 1.) First, the label provided by a diagnosis may act as a cue that signals stereotypes. second, the criteria that define a diagnosis may augment the stereotypes that describe mental illness. Three processes-groupness, homogeneity, and stability-that influence the cognitive structures of stigma (that is, cues, stereotypes, prejudice, and discrimination) illustrate how diagnosis may exacerbate stigma.They are used here to further illustrate how diagnosis may exacerbate stigma.

Perceived Groupness

Groupness, or entitativity, is the degree to which a collection of people is perceived as a unified or meaningful entity (Campbell, 1958; Hamilton & Sherman, 1996). Groups have a sense of differentness from the population, based on a salient and socially important characteristic. Eye color and foot size are generally not qualities that lead to meaningful groups, whereas skin color and bizarre behavior are. Diagnosis adds to the salience of groupness for the collection of people with mental illness (Link & Phelan, 2001). It distinguishes people who are somehow different in terms of their psychiatric status from the general population. Note that the collection of people with mental illness still has a sense of groupness even without diagnostic systems. Research has shown a nonspecific prejudice against people who are mentally ill compared with people with other health conditions (Corrigan et al., 2000; Weiner, Perry, & Magnusson, 1988). However, diagnostic labels such as schizophrenia and psychosis seem to worsen the level of prejudice (Phelan, Link, Stueve, & Pescosolido, 2000).

Groupness and stereotypes have a bidirectional causal relationship (Crawford, Sherman, & Hamilton, 2002;Yzerbyt, Leyens, & Schadron, 1997;Yzerbyt, Rocher, & Schadron, 1997; Yzerbyt, Schadron, & Leyens, 1997). Stereotypes only make sense in terms of a meaningful group of people; the public fails to regularly recall stereotypes for amorphous classes. Hence, diagnoses that increase the sense of groupness will strengthen the stereotypes associated with mental illness. Conversely, stereotypes are the negative attributes that provide description to the group (Link & Phelan, 2001). Perceptions of groupness do not endure when not associated with attributes that describe them.

Is It the Label or the Bizarre Behavior? Does diagnosis make the stereotypes worse or does it merely highlight meaningful differences from the population that in fact occur because of abnormal psychiatric symptoms? Put another way, is aberrant behavior and not labels per se the source of stigma from the public (Gove, 1982; Clausen & Huffine, 1979)? According to Gove (1975), the label does not elicit negative stigmatizing reactions; rather, negative reactions result from the bizarre behaviors displayed by people with mental illness.

In an effort to resolve differences between labeling theory and actual symptoms, Link (1987) conducted a study in which label and aberrant behavior were independently manipulated in a series of vignettes. Results indicated that members of the general public were likely to stigmatize a person labeled mentally ill even in the absence of any aberrant behavior. Subsequent studies have replicated this finding (Link et al., 1987; Link, Phelan, Bresnahan, Stueve, & Pescosolido, 1999). Link and colleagues (1987, 1999) posed a modified labeling theory to make sense of the diverse literature, concluding that psychiatric labels are associated with negative societal reactions that exacerbate the course of the person’s disorder. Although the debate over the mechanics of labeling remains unresolved, it seems clear that stigmatization has a negative impact on the lives of people with mental illness (Link & Cullen, 1983; Mechanic, McAlpine, Rosenfield, & Davis, 1994).

Homogeneity of Group Membership

Members of stereotyped out-groups are seen as more homogeneous than in-groups (Ashton & Esses, 1999; Rothbart, Davis-Stitt, & Hill, 1997; Tajfel, 1978). This leads to an overgeneralization error; namely, that all members of a group are expected to manifest the characteristics attributed to that group. All people diagnosed with schizophrenia are expected to hallucinate and all people with depression are assumed to be suicidal. Diagnosticians have noted this concern when advising clinicians in the text revision of the DSM-IV (APA, 2000) to use clinical judgment and flexibility to ensure that the description of individual cases is not solely voiced in terms of the diagnostic criteria:”There is no assumption that all individuals described as having the same mental disorders are alike in all important ways” (p. xxxi).

Despite this concern, clinical writings are replete with examples in which people with specific disorders are reduced to caricatures based on their diagnoses. In his classic text on neurotic styles, Shapiro (1965) described diagnoses thusly:

Hysterical people, we know, are inclined to a Prince-Charming- will-come-and-everything-will-turn-out-all-right view of life. (p. 118)

In the paranoid person, even more sharply and severely than in the case of the obsessivecompulsive, every aspect and component of normal autonomous functioning appears in rigid, distorted, and in general hypertrophied form. (p. 80)

More recently, Millon (1981) described people with personality disorders in terms of the group with which they are classified:

Narcissists feel justified in their claim for special status, and they have little conception that their behaviors may be objectionable, even irrational, (p. 167)

Most borderlines exhibit a single, dominant outlook or frame of mind, such as a self-ingratiating depressive tone, which gives way periodically, however, to anxious agitation or impulsive outbursts of inappropriate temper or anger, (p. 349)

These examples are more than 20 years old, and there is evidence that diagnosticians are writing in a less stigmatizing tone now. The Institute of Medicine (2001) provided a comprehensive summary on the international state of neurological, psychiatric, and developmental disorders. This text is remarkable in the ways in which people with specific disorders were portrayed: not in terms of specific characteristics that automatically represent them because of diagnosis but instead as a range of dimensional probabilities. The Institute of Medicine text did a marvelous job of describing diagnoses while respecting the heterogeneity of individuals with that diagnosis. Nevertheless, there continue to be contemporary examples of professional texts that equate diagnosis with person. For example, a book by Fischler and Booth (1999) attempted to explain vocational disabilities in terms of psychiatric diagnoses.

People in the “dramatic” cluster are rarely capable of empathy. They are often self-centered and prone to temper tantrums.They tend to be irresponsible, impulsive, and remarkably free of remorse. Deceit, superficiality, and arrogance cloud all of their relationships, (from chapter 5, p. 175)

Perhaps most troubling about these kinds of messages are the poor prognoses and limited implications for treatment that often accompany them. In writing further about people with diagnoses in the “dramatic” cluster, Fischler and Booth (1999) said, “They have great power to create confusion, disruption, and violence in the workplace; their presence there is a stick of dynamite waiting for a match” (p. 222).This clearly undermines any attempt to place an individual with this diagnostic label in a work setting. Tying diagnosis to vocational rehabilitation plan in this fashion is especially disconcerting given that research has lar\gely suggested that diagnosis is not predictive of a person s success in working with rehabilitation providers in obtaining employment (Bond et al., 2001).

Stability of Group Descriptors

Stereotypic descriptions about stigmatized groups often include a component of stability; namely, the traits that describe a group are believed to remain relatively static and unchanging (Anderson, 1991; Kashima, 2000). This quality of stereotypes can be especially problematic for health conditions because it suggests that people with specific disorders do not recover from those disorders. This can lead to unnecessarily pessimistic attitudes about prognosis and the treatment efficacy.

Research has suggested that stability attributions can be especially troublesome for people with psychiatric diagnoses. Studies have shown that people with psychiatric disorders are viewed by the public as less likely to overcome their disorders than those with physical illnesses (Corrigan et al., 2000;Weiner et al., 1988).This coincides with an especially egregious myth about people with mental illness, especially those with serious psychiatric disorders; namely, that people with mental illness do not recover (Harding & Zahniser, 1994). This kind of myth leads to a general pessimism that can undermine people’s sense of self-esteem and selfefficacy, which, in turn, prevents many people with psychiatric disorders from pursuing their life goals (Corrigan, in press).

SOLUTIONS TO THE STIGMA PROBLEM

Thus far, I have provided evidence that suggests that an unintended consequence of diagnosis is the exacerbation of the stigma of mental illness. In part, I hope that highlighting this link may diminish ways in which social workers and other professionals write about, and otherwise describe, individuals with psychiatric disorders using stigmatizing language. In addition, there are three ways in which the stigma that results from diagnosis may be reduced.

Understand Diagnosis as a Continuum

As suggested earlier, an alternate way to understand diagnosis is dimensionally rather than categorically (Widiger, 2001). Rather than assign someone to a class of people with similar symptoms, course, and disabilities, dimensional diagnosis seeks to describe a person’s profile of symptoms on a continuum.This changes the question of diagnosis from “yes or no, the person is mental illness ‘X'” to “the person is having the following sets of problems compared with a standard.” This also changes die notion of treatment from moving the person out of the diagnostic class to decreasing his or her problems as indexed by the symptom and disability continua.

Experimental psychopathologists have convincingly argued that diagnoses may be better described in terms of dimensions, which vary continuously on symptom and other deficit indicators, rather than as independent classes or taxa, which are described by discrete syndromes (Widiger & Clark, 2000). In part, support of a dimensional view is based on the inability to support taxometric models with empirical research (Widiger, 2001). Support of dimensional models also rests on the descriptive and prognostic benefits sowed by multidimensional, continuous models of disorder (Widiger, 1983). In terms of diagnosis as an instrument of stigma, a dimensional model diminishes the groupness of psychiatric disorders. Instead of people with mental illness being qualitatively distinct from the “normal” population, mental illness falls on a continuum that includes normalcy. Interestingly, although the DSM-IV already recognizes the utility of a dimensional approach, it has not yet adapted this view because dimensions are less familiar to clinicians and less descriptive than categorical labels (APA, 2000). Perhaps future iterations of the DSM will move toward a dimensional approach that will decrease the stigmatizing effects of diagnosis.

Have Contact with the Individual

One problem with diagnosis as classification is replacing idiographic perceptions of the individual with normative statements about the group. One way to overcome this problem is to stress the individual over the group. Research on stigma change shows that contact between the public and people with mental illness leads to significant change in stereotypes about mental illness (Corrigan, 2001; Corrigan et al., 2002). Contact counters the stigma by highlighting people as individuals with complex lives that exceed the narrow descriptions of diagnosis.

There are nevertheless significant limitations to contact. Mental health providers, for example, have frequent contact with people labeled mentally ill but unfortunately tend to endorse the stigma (Chaplin, 2000; Lyons & Ziviani, 1995; Mirabi, Weinman, Magnetti, & Keppler, 1985). In part, this may reflect their focus on diagnosis and psychopathology, largely seeing people in terms of diagnostic groups rather than as individuals.This may also be a consequence of the type of contact that professionals have with people with mental illness; namely, professionals tend to interact with people when they are most in need of services, when they are acutely ill. Professionals are much less likely to interact with their clientele when they have recovered and when they are living a life that challenges the stigma. Stigma might be better challenged if professionals round out their picture of individuals with mental illness by purposefully interacting with those who have recovered (Corrigan & Lundin, 2001). Student training, for example, may include encounters with people in recovery so trainees can learn early that psychopathology is only one side of the illness coin; recovery is the other.

Replace Assumptions of Poor Prognosis with Models of Recovery

The stability of stereotypes has led to the notion that many people with mental illness fail to respond to treatment and recover. This phenomenon is reflected in classic writings about the prognoses of people with serious mental illness. Kraepelin (1913), for example, said that people with schizophrenia and other serious mental illnesses will inevitably experience a progressive downhill course, ending up demented and incompetent. The impact this has had on treatment is insidious; why try valiant interventions if the person is going to eventually end up on a back ward of a psychiatric hospital? Longitudinal research, however, has failed to support Kraepelin’s assertion. For example, researchers in Vermont and Switzerland followed several hundred adults with severe mental illness for 30 years or more to find out how mental illness affected the long-term course of the disorder (Harding, 1988). If Kraepelin was right, the majority of these people should have ended up on the back wards of state hospitals. Instead, researchers discovered that between half to almost two-thirds of the sample no longer required hospitalization, were able to work in some capacity, and lived comfortably with family or friends; they recovered. Although Kraepelin’s work is almost 100 years old, it is still reflected in modern psychopathology tests and even in the third revised edition of the DSM (APA, 1987). Professionals need to broaden their perspectives to include notions of recovery.

CONCLUSIONS

Sociologists have developed models of stigma that are helpful for understanding the impact of diagnosis. They defined structural stigma as institutional efforts that unintentionally lead to discrimination of a group (Hill, 1988;Wilson, 1990). For example, many universities and colleges use the SAT or ACT to limit admission to students who have earned high scores, believing this to be an unbiased way to select students. However, given that African American and Hispanic students typically score lower than white students on these tests, universities that rely on the SAT and ACT are likely to prevent a disproportionate number of black and Hispanic students from receiving an education with them (Pincus, 1999). In this case, structural stigma unintentionally leads to race discrimination. Diagnosis is an example of structural stigma as applied to mental illness. Although diagnostic systems are developed by social work and other mental health professionals to better understand mental illness, they unintentionally exacerbate the stigma of mental illness. Diagnostic classifications augment public perceptions of the groupness and differentness of people with mental illness.These classifications are perceived as homogeneous, and composite traits are seen as stable. As a result, individual members of a diagnostic class tend to be seen in terms of their diagnosis instead of the idiosyncratic nature of their problems. One way to change this kind of stigma is to challenge the very foundation on which it rests. Changing to a dimensional perspective of diagnosis undermines the sense of difference perpetuated by diagnosis and replaces psychiatric classification with a continuum that includes normal life. Stressing the evidence that supports recovery will diminish the stigma related to diagnosis. Facilitating interactions between professionals and people in recovery will also challenge the stigma.

The diagnostic enterprise has much value for clinical care. I do not mean to suggest that it be discarded. Instead, my effort here is to alert the reader to the insidious effects of diagnosis on stigma. Following the recommendations in this article may ensure that diagnosis does not add to the prejudice and discrimination experienced by many people with mental illness.

Rather than assign someone to a class of people with similar symptoms, course, and disabilities, dimensional diagnosis seeks to describe a persons profile of symptoms on a continuum.

REFERENCES

American Psychiatrie Association. (1987). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (3rd ed., rev.). Washington, DC: Author.

American Psychiatric Association. (1994). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed.).Washington, DC: Author.

\American Psychiatric Association. (2000). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed., text rev.). Washington, DC: Author.

Anderson, N. H. (1991). Stereotype theory. In N. H. Anderson (Ed.), Contributions to information integration theory (Vol. 2, pp. 183-240). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Ashton, M. C, & Esses.V. M. (1999). Stereotype accuracy: Estimating the academic performance of ethnic groups. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin, 25, 225-236.

Augoustinos, M.,Ahrens, C., & Innes.J. (1994). Stereotypes and prejudice:The Australian experience. British Journal of Social Psychology, 33(1), 125-141.

Bhugra, D. (1989).Attitudes towards mental illness:A review of the literature. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica, 80,1-12.

Bond, G. R., Becker, D. R., Drake, R. E., Rapp, C. A., Meisler, N., Lehman,A. E, BeU, M. D., & Blyler, C. R. (2001). Implementing supported employment as an evidence-based practice. Psychiatric Services, 52, 313-322.

Brockington, I. E, Hall, P., Levings.J., & Murphy, C. (1993). The community’s tolerance of the mentally ill. British Journal of Psychiatry, 162,93-99.

Campbell, D.T. (1958). Common fate, similarity and other indices of the status of aggregates of persons as social entities. Behavioral Science, 3,14-25.

Chaplin, R. (2000). Psychiatrists can cause stigma too. British Journal of Psychiatry, 177, 467.

Clausen.J.A., & Huffme, L. (1979).The impact of parental mental illness on children. Research into Community and Mental Health, 1,183-214.

Corrigan, P.W. (2000). Mental health stigma as social attribution: Implications for research methods and attitude change. Clinical Psychology: Science & Practice, 7,48-67.

Corrigan, RW. (2001). Place-then-train: An alternative service paradigm for persons with psychiatric disabilities. Clinical Psychology: Science & Practice, 8,334-349.

Corrigan, P.W. (in press).The impact of consumer-operated services on theempowerment and recovery of people with psychiatric disabilities. Psychiatric Services.

Corrigan, P.W., & Lundin, R. (2001). Don’t call me nuts! Coping with the stigma of mental illness. Tinley Park, IL: Recovery Press.

Corrigan, P.W., River, L. P., Lundin, R. K., Penn, D. L., Uphoff- Wasowski, K., Campion.J., Mathisen.J., Gagnon, C., Bergman, M., Goldstein, H., & Kubiak, M. A. (2001).Three strategies for changing attributions about severe mental illness. Schizophrenia Bulletin, 27,187-195.

Corrigan, P.W., River, L. P., Lundin, R. K., Uphoff Wasowski, K., Campion.J., Mathisen.J., Goldstein, H., Bergman, M., Gagnon, C., & Kubiak, M. A. (2000). Stigmatizing attributions about mental illness. Journal of Community Psychology, 28,91-102.

Corrigan, P.W., Rowan, D., Green, A., Lundin, R., River, P., Uphoff-Wasowski, K.,White, K., & Kubiak, M. A. (2002). Challenging two mental illness stigmas: Personal responsibility and dangerousness. Schizophrenia Bulletin, 28,293-309.

Crawford, M.T., Sherman, S. J., & Hamilton, D. L. (2002). Perceived entitativity, stereotype formation, and the interchangeability of group members. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 83,1076-1094.

Cracker, J., Major, B., & Steele, C. (1998). Social stigma. In D.T. Gilbert, S. Fiske, & G. Lindzey (Eds.), The handbook of social psychology (4th ed.,Vol. 2, pp. 504-553). New York: McGraw-Hill.

Devine, P. G. (1989). Stereotypes and prejudice:Their automatic and controlled components. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 56,5-18.

Devine, P. G. (1995). Prejudice and out-group perception. In A.Tesser (Ed.), Advanced social psychology (pp. 467-524). New York: McGraw-Hill.

Druss, B. G., Bradford, D. W., Rosenheck, R. A., Radford, M.J., & Krumholz, H. M. (2000). Mental disorders and use of cardiovascular procedures after myocardial infarction JAMA, 283,506-511.

Eagly.A., & Chaiken, S. (1993). The social psychology of attitudes. Ft.Worth,TX: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.

Farina.A., & Felner, R. D. (1973). Employment interviewer reactions to former mental patiente. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 82,268-272.

Farina,A., Felner, R. D, & Boudreau, L. A. (1973). Reactions of workers to male and female mental patient job applicants. Jowrnai of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 41,363-372.

Farina,A.,Thaw,J., Lovern.J. D., & Mangone, D. (1974). People’s reactions to a former mental patient moving to their neighborhood. Journal of Community Psychology, 2,108-112.

First, M. B., Frances, A., & Pincus, H. A. (1997). DSM-IV-TR handbook of differential diagnosis. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association.

Fischler, G. L., & Booth, N. (1999). Vocational impact of psychiatric disorders: A guide for rehabilitation professionals. Gaithersburg, MD: Aspen Publishers.

Freedman, A. M., Kaplan, H. I., & Sadock, B. J. (1976). Modern synopsis of comprehensive handbook of psychiatry (2nd ed.). Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.

Goffinan, E. (1963). Stigma: Notes on the management of spoiled identity. Englewood Clifls, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Gove.W. R. (1975). The labelling of deviance: Evaluating a perspective. New York: Sage Publications.

Gove.W. R. (1982). Labelling theory’s explanation of mental illness: An update of recent evidence. Deviant Behavior, 3,307-327.

Hamilton, D. L., & Sherman, S. J. (1996). Perceiving persons and groups. Psychological Review, 103, 336-355.

Hamre, P., Dahl, A. A., & Malt, U F. (1994). Public attitudes to the quality of psychiatric treatment, psychiatric patients, and prevalence of mental disorders. Nordic Journal of Psychiatry, 48(4), 275-281.

Harding, C. M. (1988). Course types in schizophrenia. Schizophrenia Bulletin, 14,633-644.

Harding, C. M., & Zahniser.J. H. (1994). Empirical correction of seven myths about schizophrenia with implications for treatment. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica, 90(Suppl. 384), 140-146.

Hill, R. B. (1988). Structural discrimination:The unintended consequences of institutional processes. In H. J. O’Gorman (Ed.), Surveying social life: Papers in honor of Herbert H. Hyman (pp. 353- 375). Middletown, CT: Wesleyan University Press.

Hogan, R. (1985a). Gaining community support for group homes. Unpublished manuscript, Purdue University, Lafayette, IN.

Hogan, R. (1985b). Not in my town: Local government in opposition to group homes. Unpublished manuscript, State of Ohio, Department of Mental Health.

Institute of Medicine. (2001). Neurological, psychiatric, and developmental disorders: Meeting the challenges in the developing world. Washington, DC: National Academy of Sciences.

Judd, C. M., & Park, B. (1993). Definition and assessment of accuracy in social stereotypes. Psychological Review, 100, 109-128.

Jussim, L., Nelson.T. E., Manis, M., & Soffin, S. (1995). Prejudice, stereotypes, and labeling effects: Sources of bias in person perception. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 68,228-246.

Kashima.Y. (2000). Maintaining cultural stereotypes in the serial reproduction of narratives. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin, 26,594-604.

Kessler, R. C., Berglund, P. A., Bruce, M. L., Koch, J. R., Laska, E. M., Leaf, P. J., Manderscheid, R. W., Rosenheck, R. A.,Walters, E. E., & Wang, P. S. (2001).The prevalence and correlates of untreated serious mental illness. Health Services Research, 36,987-1007.

Kraepelin, E. (1913). General paresis (Nervous and Mental Disease Monograph 14). New York: Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease Publishing.

Krueger.J. (1996). Personal beliefs and cultural stereotypes about racial characteristics. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 71,536-548.

Leaf, P.J., Bruce, M. L.,Tischler, G. L., & Holzer, C. E. (1987).The relationship between demographic factors and attitudes toward mental health services. Journal of Community Psychology, 15,275-284.

Link, B. G. (1982). Mental patient status, work and income: An examination of the effects of a psychiatric label. American Sociological Review, 47,202-215.

Link, B. G. (1987). Understanding labeling effects in the area of mental disorders: An assessment of the effects of expectations of rejection. American Sociological Review, 52,96-112.

Link, B. G., & Cullen, ET. (1983). Reconsidering the social rejection of ex-mental patients: Levels of attitudinal response. American Journal of Community Psychology, 11,261-273.

Link, B. G., Cullen, ET, Frank,J., & Wozniak.J. F. (1987). The social rejection of former mental patients: Understanding why labels matter. American Journal of Sociology, 92,1461-1500.

Link, B. G., & Phelan,J. C. (2001). Conceptualizing stigma. Annual Review of Sociology, 27,363-385.

Link, B. G., Phelan.J. C, Bresnahan, M., Stueve, A., & Pescosolido, B. A. (1999). Public conceptions of mental illness: Labels, causes, dangerousness, and social distance. American Journal of Public Health, 89, 1328-1333.

Lyons, M., & Ziviani.J. (1995). Stereotypes, stigma, and mental illness: Learning from fieldwork experiences. American Journal of Occupational Tlierapy, 49, 1002-1008.

Mechanic, D., McAlpine, D., Rosenfield, S., & Davis, D. (1994). Effects of illness attribution and depression on the quality of life among persons with serious mental illness. Social Science & Medicine, 39,155-164.

Millon, T. (1981). Disorders of personality: DSM-III, Axis II. New York: Wiley-Interscience.

Mirabi, M.,Weinman, M. L., Magnetti, S. M., & Keppler, K. N. (1985). Professional attitudes toward the chronic mentally ill. Hospital & Community Psychiatry, 36,404-405.

Narrow, W., Regier, D., Norquist, G., Rae, D., Kennedy, C., & Aarons, B. (2000). Mental health service use by Americans with severe mental illnesses. Social Psychiatry and Psychiatric Epidemiology, 35,147-155.

Page, S. (1977). Effects of the mental illness label in attempts to obtain accommodation. Canadian Journal of Behavioural Science, 9(2), 85-90.

Page, S. (1983). Psychiatric stigma: Two studies of behaviour when the chips are down. Canadian Journal of Community Mental Health, 2(1), 13-19.

Page, S. (1995). Effects of the mental illness label in 1993: Acceptance and rejection \in the community.Journal of Health and Social Policy, 7,61-68.

Penn, D. L., & Martin.J. (1998).The stigma of severe mental illness: Some potential solutions for a recalcitrant problem. Psychiatric Quarterly, 69,235-247.

Phelan.J. C., Link, B. G., Stueve, A., & Pescosolido, B. A. (2000). Public conceptions of mental illness in 1950 and 1996: What is mental illness and is it to be feared? Journal of Health and Social Behavior, 41, 188-207.

Pincus, F. L. (1999).The case for affirmative action. In E L. Pincus & H. J. Ehrlich (Eds.), Race and ethnic conflicts: Contending views on prejudice, discrimination, and ethnoviolence (pp. 205- 222). Boulder, CO:Westview Press.

Rathus, S.A. (1984). Psychology (2nd ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.

Regier, D. A., Narrow,W. E., Rae, D. S., & Manderscheid, R.W. (1993).The de facto US mental and addictive disorders service system: Epidemiologic catchment area prospective 1 -year prevalence rates of disorders and services. Archives of General Psychiatry, 50, 85-94.

Ritsher.J. B., Otilingam, P. G., & Grajales, M. (2003). Internalized stigma of mental illness: Psychometric properties of a new measure. Psychiatry Research, 121, 31-49.

Rosch, E., & Mueller, S. (1978). Classification judgements: Restrictive conditions for the explanation of stereotypes. Zeitschriftfur Sozialpsychologie, 9(3), 246-256.

Rothbart, M., Davis-Stitt, C., & HiIl1J. (1997). Effects of arbitrarily placed category boundaries on similarity judgments. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 33, 122-145.

Shapiro, D. (1965). Neurotic styles. New York: Basic Books.

SireyJ. A., Bruce, M. L., Alexopoulos, G. S., Perlick, D. A., Raue, P., Friedman, S. J., & Meyers, B. S. (2001). Perceived stigma as a predictor of treatment discontinuation in young and older outpatients with depression. American Journal of Psychiatry, 158,479- 481.

Tajfel, H. (Ed.). (1978). Differentiation between social groups: Studies in the social psychology ofintergroup relations. New York: Academic Press.

Wahl, O. F. (1999). Mental health consumers’ experience of stigma. Schizophrenia Bulletin, 25, 467-478.

Weiner, B., Perry, R. P., & MagnussonJ. (1988). An attributional analysis of reactions to stigmas. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 55,738-748.

Widiger.T.A. (1983).The DSM-III-R categorical personality disorder diagnoses: A critique and an alternative. Psychological Inquiry, 4(2), 75-90.

Widiger.T.A. (2001).What can be learned from taxometric analyses? Clinical Psychology: Science & Practice, 8, 528-533.

Widiger.T.A., & Clark, L.A. (2000).Toward DSM-V and the classification of psychopathology. Psychological Bulletin, 126,946- 963.

Wilson,W.J. (1990). The truly disadvantaged:The inner city, the underclass, and public policy. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

World Health Organization. (1992). International statistical cIassification of diseases and related health problems (10th rev.). Geneva: Author.

Yzerbyt.V.Y, Leyens,J.-P., & Schadron, G. (1997). Social judgeability and the dilution of stereotypes: The impact of the nature and sequence of information. Personality & Social Psychology Bulletin, 23,1312-1322.

Yzerbyt.V, Rocher, S., & Schadron, G. (1997). Stereotypes as explanations: A subjective essentialistic view of group perception. In R. Spears, P. Oakes, N. Ellemers, & A. Haslam (Eds.), The psychology of stereotyping and group life (pp. 20-50). Oxford, England: Basil Blackwell.

Yzerbyt,V.Y., Schadron, G., & Leyens,J.-P. (1997). Social judgeability concerns and the dilution of stereotypes. Swiss Journal of Psychology, 56(2), 95-105.

Patrick W.Corrigan, PsyD, is professor of psychology, Institute of Psychology, Illinois Institute of Technology, 3424 South State Street, Chicago, IL 60616; e-mail: [email protected].

Original manuscript received June 8, 2004

Final revision received July 10, 2005

Accepted October 25, 2005

Copyright National Association of Social Workers, Incorporated Jan 2007

(c) 2007 Social Work. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Pseudotumor Cerebri From Sinus Venous Thrombosis, Associated With Polycystic Ovary Syndrome and Hereditary Hypercoagulability

By Finsterer, Josef; Kuntscher, Dagmar; Brunner, Simon; Krugluger, Walter

Abstract

Objective. The association of pseudotumor cerebri, visual impairment, hypothyroidism, polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), and a hypercoagulable state due to a factor V and a prothrombin mutation has not been reported previously.

Case report. A 20-year-old obese woman developed menstrual cycle irregularities since age 14 years, initially bitemporal and latter diffuse headache since age 14 years, and bilateral visual impairment, described as sparkling black points. Ophthalmologically there was a recurrent papilledema. Clinical neurologic investigations revealed sore neck muscles and hirsutism. Magnetic resonance imaging of the brain, orbita and cervical spine, and investigations of cerebrospinal fluid were non-informative. Visually evoked potentials revealed demyelination of the optic nerves. Gynecologic investigations revealed PCOS and endocrinologic investigations hypothyroidism and hyperandrogenism. Tests for thrombophilia disclosed a heterozygote state for the G1.697A factor V Leiden and the G20.210A prothrombin mutation. A possible relationship between pseudotumor cerebri and the ophthalmologic, gynecologic, endocrinologic and coagulation abnormalities is discussed.

Conclusions. For the first time we describe the association of pseudotumor cerebri, optic nerve demyelination, PCOS, other endocrinologic abnormalities, and thrombophilia due to a factor V and prothrombin mutation. A causal relationship between these abnormalities remains elusive.

Keywords: Endocrine system, headache, optic nerve, polycystic ovary, hypothyroidism, idiopathic intracranial hypertension

Introduction

There are reports which describe the association of pseudotumor cerebri (PC), also known as idiopathic or benign intracranial hypertension, and polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), also known as Stein-Leventhal syndrome [1]. It also has been described that PC and PCOS may be associated with coagulation disorders [1]. However, the combination of PC, hypothyroidism with acanthocytosis, PCOS with elevated testosterone levels, obesity and hirsutism, and a heterozygote factor V and a prothrombin mutation has not been reported previously.

Case report

The patient, a 20-year-old, Caucasian, HFV-negative woman with height 169 cm and weight 90 kg, had initially bitemporal and later diffuse headache since age 14 years and bilateral visual impairment (described as sparkling: many moving black points) since September 2004 that was associated with visual loss for a few seconds, four or five times so far at presentation. Ophthalmologic investigations in October 2004 revealed a papilledema for the first time. Ultrasonography of the extracerebral arteries was normal. Clinical neurologic investigation at that time was normal and since the cerebral magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) scan was also noninformative, a PC was suspected. A lumbar puncture was normal and promptly relieved headache and visual impairment. Under acetazolamide (500 mg/ day) for 4 weeks, given after the lumbar puncture, headache disappeared completely. Additionally, the patient had a previous history of allergic bronchial asthma since age 9 years, for which she took steroids, resulting in weight gain and menstrual cycle irregularities since menarche at age 14 years. The family history was positive for glaucoma (father), deep venous thrombosis (father), cardiac rhythm abnormalities (mother), short stature (mother), and an undetermined ophthalmologic disease (grandmother from her father’s side).

In March 2005 visual impairment recurred and she complained about easy fatigability and tiredness, but did not report headache. Ophthalmologic investigation in July 2005 revealed a prominent papilla nasally. Otolaryngologic investigation in July 2005 was normal. Clinical neurologic examination disclosed sore neck muscles and hirsutism exclusively. MRI scans of the cerebrum, orbita and the cervical spine were normal. There was no indication for an empty sella or dilation of the optic nerve sheaths. Investigations of cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) were nonconclusive (14/3 leukocytes). Blood sedimentation rate was normal. Antibodies against various viruses, Borrelia burgdorferi and Cryptococcus neoformans were negative in serum and CSF. Search for B. burgdorferi DNA was non- informative. Anti-nuclear antibodies, anti-neutrophil cytoplasmic antibodies, circulating immune complexes and complement factor C3 were normal; complement factor 4 was elevated slightly. This time acetazolamide (1000 mg/day) was without effect and the patient withdrew the medication by herself after 7 days. An ex juvantibus therapy with prednisolone (1000 mg/day) for 5 days in August 2005 was clinically ineffective, although the following ophthalmologic investigation was normal. Endocrine investigations in August 2005 revealed struma diffusa and hypothyroidism. Levothyroxine 0.05 mg/ day was prescribed.

In September 2005 slight headache recurred. MRI scan of the cerebrum was normal. Visually evoked potentials showed demyelination of the optic nerves bilaterally. From October 2005 she noted recurrent nausea and in November 2005 she experienced permanent emesis for 1 week. Fatigue and sleep desire increased despite levothyroxine. Endocrinological work-up in November 2005 revealed elevated serum testosterone. Gynecologic examinations suspected PCOS. Ophthalmologic investigations in November 2005 revealed a prominent optic disk for the third time and acteazolamide (1000 mg/ day) was given for 2 weeks but was discontinued by the patient because of increase in headache and dizziness. The papilledema resolved in December 2005, but visual impairment subjectively worsened and she noted difficulties in focusing objects. Erythrocyte morphology showed acanthocytosis in 0.05% of the cells. Investigations for thrombophilia disclosed a heterozygote state of the G1.697A factor V Leiden mutation and a heterozygote state of the G20.210A prothrombin mutation. She was advised to inject low- molecular-weight heparin subcutaneously during immobilization. There was no indication for malignancy. Since March 2006 the patient received topiramate, which resulted in complete resolution of headache but did not affect visual impairment.

Discussion

According to the modified Dandy criteria presented in 1985, PC is defined as idiopathic intracranial hypertension, characterized by elevated CSF pressure of > 20 mmHg, normal CSF composition, papillary edema, headache, and exclusion of an underlying structural or systemic cause [2-5]. Visual loss is a serious complication and requires careful monitoring and management. Therapy of PC comprises dietary measures to achieve weight loss, discontinuation of contributing medication, provision of diuretics, and surgical techniques such as lumbo-peritoneal shunting, ventriculo-peritoneal shunting, optic nerve sheath fenestration and venous sinus stenting [6,7]. The main goal of PC therapy is to prevent or arrest progressive visual loss [6]. Manifestations attributable to PC in the described patient were headache, papillary edema, and nausea and emesis in October 2005. This is supported by the prompt relief of headache and visual impairment after the lumbar puncture in October 2004.

The exact cause and pathogenesis of PC are unknown, but principally it may derive from increased CSF production or decreased CSF absorption (absorptive block), either from increased pressure in the durai venous sinuses or lesions of the arachnoidal villi [8]. Cerebral edema or increased cerebral blood volume may play an additional pathogenetic role. Once the intracranial pressure raises above a certain level, pressure in the superior sagittal sinus increases due to collapse of the transverse sinuses [4,9]. According to this hypothesis, high pressures measured in the sinuses might therefore be rather the consequence of raised intracranial pressure than its cause [4]. A further pathogenetic theory outlines high pressures in the venous sinuses as causative, occasionally secondary to systemic venous hypertension, but more often apparently the result of stenotic lesions of the venous sinuses, particularly bilateral lateral venous sinus lesions, causing partial obstruction to cranial outflow [4,10]. Since PC occurs more frequently in women than men and is predominantly associated with obesity [11], intake of oral contraceptives, pregnancy, menstrual cycle irregularities, galactorrhea, hypothyroidism, recent weight gain and short stature, endocrine factors are suspected to play an additional role [11,12]. However, PC has also been reported after administration of tetracyclines, isotretinoin and trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole [5,12,13]. Risk factors for the development of PC, in addition to PCOS, are oral contraceptives, adrenocortical insufficiency [14], cystinosis [15], vitamin A intake [16] or a septal defect [17].

Demyelination of the optic nerve neurons in the described patient may be a direct consequence of the increased intracranial pressure, may represent a second trouble, or may be just part of a multi- system disease. An argument for one of the latter explanations is the fact that visually evoked potential latencies are not prolonged in patients with PC [18,19]. An argument for a causal relationship between PC and demyelination of the optic nerve is the improvement of v\ision after the lumbar puncture in October 2004. Differential diagnoses of optic nerve demyelination are listed in Table I. All of these conditions were excluded in the present patient.

PCOS is the commonest endocrine disorder in women [20]. PCOS is not only a frequent cause of anovulatory infertility, menstrual cycle disturbances and hirsutism, but also a major risk factor in the development of overweight, insulin resistance, diabetes mellitus, cardiovascular disease (increased intima media thickness, impaired vascular elasticity) and gynecological cancer later in life [20-23]. PCOS is characterized by multiple ovarian cysts, hyperandrogenism with hirsutism and obesity [24]. PCOS may be also associated with hypothyroidism, steatosis hepatis and insulin resistance, independent of total or fat-free body mass [25-27]. Hyperandrogenism in PCOS may be a consequence of hyperinsulinism due to peripheral insulin resistance [28]. Following these observations, metformin and insulin sensitizers (thiazolidinediones) may be a potential therapeutic tool for PCOS [25,28]. The close relationship between PCOS, hypothyroidism and insulin resistance is supported by the finding that treatment of one of these conditions also improves the two others [27]. The etiology of PCOS is uncertain but there is increasing evidence for a genetic basis [20]. There may be a genetic predisposition of the fetal ovary to hypersecrete androgen [20]. Stress and sympathetic innervation may be additional triggers [29]. That the present patient’s endocrine problems derived from a hypophysial problem is rather unlikely given her normal levels of thyroid-stimulating hormone, luteinizing hormone, follicle- stimulating hormone and prolactin.

Table I. Differential diagnoses of prolonged visually evoked potentials.

The term acanthocytosis describes a crenated shape of erythrocytes. Acanthocytosis is associated with at least three neurologic disorders: chorea acanthocytosis, abetalipoproteinemia and McLeod syndrome, which are summarized under the term neuroacanthocytosis. None of these entities was present in the described patient. Neuroacanthocytosis was also excluded because of only the mild prevalence of acanthocytes: in neuroacanthocytosis the frequency of acanthocytes is usually much higher. Although 90% of the patients with acanthocytosis suffer from hypothyroidism [30], it is rather unlikely that hypothyroidism in the described patient resulted from the low number of acanthocytes. Most likely the minimal acanthocytosis was attributable to hypothyroidism and not the other way round.

The factor V Leiden mutation and the prothrombin mutation were detected during diagnostic workup of a questionable hypercoagulability in PCOS, as has been previously reported [1,31]. In these studies PC was associated with PCOS and thrombophilia due to increased factor VIII. No mutations in the factor V or prothrombin genes were detected. The mutations of the present patient were regarded not to be connected to her endocrinologie problems, although it cannot be definitively excluded that genes encoding for endocrine pathway products neighboring the factor V and the prothrombin genes were also affected by these mutations, or together affected by a more widespread deletion or translocation. However, cytogenetic studies did not provide any evidence for this assumption.

In conclusion, this case shows for the first time that PC, endocrinologic abnormalities including PCOS, and a hereditary hypercoagulable state due to a factor V and prothrombin mutation may occur in a single patient. A causal relationship between these abnormalities remains elusive.

References

1. Glueck CJ, Aregawi D, Goldenberg N, Golnik KC, Sieve L, Wang P. Idiopathic intracranial hypertension, polycystic ovary syndrome, and thrombophilia. J Lab Clin Med 2005; 145:72-82.

2. Distelmaier F, Sengler U, Messing-Juenger M, Assmann B, Mayatepek E, Rosenbaum T. Pseudotumor cerebri as an important differential diagnosis of papilledema in children. Brain Dev 2006;28:190-195.

3. Friedman DI, Jacobson DM. Diagnostic criteria for idiopathic intracranial hypertension. Neurology 2002;59:1492-1495.

4. Higgins JN, Cousins C, Owler BK, Sarkies N, Pickard JD. Idiopathic intracranial hypertension: 12 cases treated by venous sinus stenting. J Neurol Neurosurg Psychiatry 2003; 74:1662-1666.

5. Ireland B, Corbett JJ, Wallace RB. The search for causes of idiopathic intracranial hypertension. A preliminary case-control study. Arch Neurol 1990;47:315-320.

6. Binder DK, Horton JC, Lawton MT, McDermott MW. Idiopathic intracranial hypertension. Neurosurgery 2004;54: 538-551.

7. Brazis PW. Pseudotumor cerebri. Curr Neurol Neurosci Rep 2004;4:111-116.

8. Danze F, Rosa A, Mizon JP. Benign intracranial hypertension (pseudotumor cerebri). 12 cases. Rev Neurol (Paris) 1984; 140: 37- 44.

9. Johnston I, Paterson A. Benign intracranial hypertension. I. Diagnosis and prognosis. Brain 1974;97:289-300.

10. Rajpal S, Niemann DB, Turk AS. Transverse venous sinus stent placement as treatment for benign intracranial hypertension in a young male: case report and review of the literature. J Neurosurg 2005;102(Suppl 3):342-346.

11. Hannerz J, Greitz D, Ericson K. Is there a relationship between obesity and intracranial hypertension? Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 1995;19:240-244.

12. Giuseffi V, Wall M, Siegel PZ, Rojas PB. Symptoms and disease associations in idiopathic intracranial hypertension (pseudotumor cerebri): a case-control study. Neurology 1991;41:239-244.

13. Deev AS, Karpikov AV, Pchelintseva ZI. The causes and clinical course of benign intracranial hypertension. Lik Sprava 1995;3-4:101-103.

14. Rickels MR, Nichols CW. Pseudotumor cerebri in patients with Cushing’s disease. Endocr Pract 2004; 10:492-496.

15. Dogulu CF, Tsilou E, Rubin B, Fitzgibbon EJ, Kaiser-Kupper MI, Rennert OM, Gahl WA. Idiopathic intracranial hypertension in cystinosis. J Pediatr 2004;145:673-678.

16. Digre K, Warner J. Is vitamin A implicated in the pathophysiology of increased intracranial pressure? Neurology 2005; 64:1827.

17. Jicha GA, Suarez GA. Pseudotumor cerebri reversed by cardiac septal defect repair. Neurology 2003;60:2016-2107.

18. Sureda B, Alberca R, Boza F. Visual evoked potentials in benign intracranial hypertension. Neurologia 1991;6:242-246.

19. Sorensen PS, Trojaborg W, Gjerris F, Krogsaa B. Visual evoked potentials in pseudotumor cerebri. Arch Neurol 1985;42:150-153.

20. Franks S, McCarthy MI, Hardy K. Development of polycystic ovary syndrome: involvement of genetic and environmental factors. Int J Androl 2006;29;278-285.

21. Ekerhovd E. Polycystic ovary syndrome. Tidsskr Nor Laegeforen 2005; 125:2351-2354.

22. Lakhani K, Prelevic GM, Seifalian AM, Atiomo WU, Hardiman P. Polycystic ovary syndrome, diabetes and cardiovascular disease: risks and risk factors. J Obstet Gynaecol 2004;24:613-621.

23. Marsh K, Brand-Miller J. The optimal diet for women with polycystic ovary syndrome? Br J Nutr 2005;94:154-165.

24. Davis S. Syndromes of hyperandrogenism in women. Aust Fam Physician 1999;28:447-451.

25. Bhatia V. Insulin resistance in polycystic ovarian disease. South Med J 2005;98:903-910.

26. Brown AJ, Tendler DA, McMurray RG, Setji TL. Polycystic ovary syndrome and severe nonalcoholic steatohepatitis: beneficial effect of modest weight loss and exercise on liver biopsy findings. Endocr Pract 2005;11:319-324.

27. Pallotti S, Gasbarrone A, Franzese IT. Relationship between insulin secretion, and thyroid and ovary function in patients suffering from polycystic ovary. Minerva Endocrinol 2005;30: 193- 197.

28. Garnies HM, Tambascia MA, Zantut-Wittmann DE. Endocrine- metabolic effects of the treatment with pioglitazone in obese patients with polycystic ovary syndrome. Gynecol Endocrinol 2005;21:317-323.

29. Greiner M, Paredes A, Araya V, Lara HE. Role of stress and sympathetic innervation in the development of polycystic ovary syndrome. Endocrine 2005;28:319-324.

30. Antonijevic N, Nesovic M, Trbojevic B, Milosevic R. Anemia in hypothyroidism. Med Pregl 1999;52:136-140.

31. Glueck C, Iyengar S, Goldenberg N, Smith JS, Wang P. Idiopathic intracranial hypertension: association with coagulation disorders and polycystic ovary syndrome. J Lab Clin Med 2003;42:35- 45.

JOSEF FINSTERER1, DAGMAR KUNTSCHER2, SIMON BRUNNER3, & WALTER KRUGLUGER2

1 Krankenanstalt Rudolfstiftung, Vienna, Austria, 2 Central Laboratory, Krankenanstalt Rudolfstiftung, Vienna Austria, and 3 Department of Ophthalmology, Krankenanstalt Rudolfstiftung, Vienna, Austria

(Received 13 July 2006; revised 19 January 2007; accepted 23 January 2007)

Correspondence: J. Finsterer, Postfach 20, 1180 Vienna, Austria. Tel: 43 1 71165 92085. Fax: 43 1 4781711. E-mail: [email protected]

Copyright Taylor & Francis Ltd. Mar 2007

(c) 2007 Gynecological Endocrinology. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Metformin Administration is More Effective When Non-Obese Patients With Polycystic Ovary Syndrome Show Both Hyperandrogenism and Hyperinsulinemia

By Genazzani, Alessandro D; Lanzoni, Chiara; Ricchieri, Federica; Baraldi, Enrica; Et al

Abstract

Background. Polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS) is a common endocrine disease that is frequently observed to be related to increased insulin resistance independent of body weight. The use of insulin-sensitizer compounds, such as metformin, permits great improvement of such metabolic abnormality, restoring ovarian function and gonadal steroid synthesis and reducing insulin resistance.

Aim. On this basis we aimed to evaluate a group of non-obese amenorrheic PCOS patients before and after 6 months of metformin administration (500 mg orally twice daily) to better understand upon which basis of clinical and endocrine parameters metformin administration might be chosen as a putative therapeutic tool.

Method. A group of non-obese PCOS patients (n = 42) was enrolled after informed consent. They underwent an oral glucose tolerance test for insulin, glucose and C-peptide levels and provided blood samples for determination of plasma levels of luteinizing hormone (LH), follicle-stimulating hormone, prolactin, estradiol, androstenedione, 17-hydroxyprogesterone, insulin, cortisol and testosterone levels on two occasions: before and on day 7 of the first menstrual cycle occurring after the 5th month of treatment.

Results. Plasma LH, estradiol, insulin and C-peptide were decreased significantly by metformin treatment in the entire group of PCOS patients. When subdividing PCOS patients according to insulin sensitivity (i.e. hyper- and normoinsulinemic subjects), a greater rate of positive endocrine changes was observed in hyperinsulinemic patients and the highest rate was observed in hyperinsulinemic hyperandrogenic subjects. Menstrual cyclicity was recovered in all patients under treatment.

Conclusions. Our data show that metformin modulates ovarian function and greatly affects LH secretion through reduction of the hyperandrogenic condition. The highest rate of endocrine changes was observed in the hyperinsulinemic hyperandrogenic non-obese PCOS patients. Our study demonstrates that metformin administration is more appropriate in hyperinsulinemic hyperandrogenic non-obese PCOS patients.

Keywords: Polycystic ovary syndrome, hyperandrogenism, hyperinsulinemia, metformin cloridate, menstrual cyclicity, insulin sensitivity

Introduction

Hyperandrogenism, anovulation and metabolic disturbances are typical findings in obese but also in non-obese patients with polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS) [1-4]. Indeed, recently insulin resistance/ hyperinsulinemia was indicated as one of the relevant causal factors in inducing the endocrine disorders that are associated with PCOS [5-7], independent of body weight [4]. In vitro, insulin stimulates androgen synthesis in theca cells [8] and decreases secretion of sex hormone-binding globulin from the liver [9], increasing the availability of free androgens.

In addition to other therapeutic strategies (i.e. oral contraceptives, antiandrogen compounds), such findings have induced the use of specific treatments intended to reduce the hyperinsulinemic condition and, when present, the excess of weight. It is well known that weight loss is effective in restoring menstrual cyclicity and/or ovulation in overweight PCOS patients thanks to the reduction in fat mass and mainly the increase in tissue insulin sensitivity [10]. It is of great relevance to point out that insulin resistance is recognized as a major risk factor for type 2 diabetes [10,11].

Many studies have demonstrated the efficacy of insulin- sensitizing compounds, such as metformin, in reducing PCOS- associated hyperinsulinemia and in correcting most of the endocrine and metabolic abnormalities found in women with PCOS [1,2,10,12]. Among the available compounds, metformin, a water-soluble oral biguanide, enhances insulin sensitivity in liver, where it inhibits hepatic glucose production, and in muscle tissue, where it improves glucose uptake and utilization [8,12], with minimal side-effects such hypoglycemia [13] and with no direct effect on insulin secretion by the pancreatic β-cells [14]. The metformin- induced decrease in hyperinsulinemia underlies the significant modifications in ovarian response to gonadotropin stimulation [3,4,7,12,15-18], but, to date, the unsolved question is what kind of PCOS patients would certainly benefit from metformin administration. Obesity is a key factor in inducing hyperinsulinemia in PCOS patients and these patients improve greatly following administration of insulin-sensitizing compounds; however, a great many (though not all) normal-weight PCOS patients have also been demonstrated to benefit from such administration even in the absence of weight excess [19].

To try to elucidate which parameters might be proposed as the basis for administering an insulin-sensitizing compound such as metformin or not, a group of non-obese PCOS patients were studied before and after 6 months of metformin cloridrate treatment.

Material and methods

Subjects and study protocol

Forty-two women aged 18-28 years with PCOS were recruited for this study. These patients were selected among a population attending the Gynecological Endocrinology Center at the University of Modena and Reggio Emilia, Italy, according to the following criteria: (1) presence of micropolycystic ovaries at ultrasound; (2) hirsutism and/or acne, from grade mild to severe; (3) oligomenorrhea or amenorrhea; (4) absence of enzymatic adrenal deficiency and/or other endocrine disease; (5) normal prolactin level (range 5-25 ng/ ml); (6) no hormonal treatment for at least 6 months before the study; (7) body mass index (BMI)

All patients were from 5 to 15% above their ideal body weight and the mean BMI was 22.7+1.2 kg/m^sup 2^ ( standard error of the mean, SEM). The ratio of glucose to insulin was computed at baseline, to estimate the sensitivity to insulin [19,20]. Such ratio was >4.5, within the normal range in all subjects. Thirty-two patients were amenorrheic and ten oligomenorrheic (menstrual cycle every 50 days or more).

Patients were treated with metformin (Metforal; Guidotti, Pisa, Italy) 500 mg orally twice daily, 20 min before lunch and dinner, for 6 months.

Endocrine parameters were determined before and after treatment. At baseline, amenorrheic patients were studied on a random cycle day while oligomenorrheic patients were studied on day 7 of the menstrual cycle. The post-treatment endocrine parameters were determined on day 7 of the first menstrual cycle occurring after the 5th month of treatment.

On these occasions, all patients underwent an oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT) for insulin, glucose and C-peptide determinations, sampling 15 min before and 30, 60, 90, 120 and 240 min after the oral consumption of 100 g glucose. Time +90 min was considered indicative of the maximal response to the oral glucose load. Insulin sensitivity was computed was computed as glucose/ insulin ratio, since this has been shown to be a good index of insulin sensitivity in women with PCOS [19-21].

At the same time plasma levels of luteinizing hormone (LH), follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH), prolactin, estradiol, androstenedione, 17-hydroxyprogesterone (17OHP), insulin, cortisol and testosterone were determined. All collected samples were immediately centrifuged and plasma was stored at -20C until assayed.

Vaginal ultrasound was performed and the Ferriman-Gallway score determined before and after 6 months of treatment. Each patient kept a diary of their menstrual cyclicity, reporting the date of menstrual occurrence.

The study protocol was approved by the Human Investigation Committee of the University of Modena and Reggio Emilia, Italy.

Assays

All samples from each subject were assayed in duplicate in the same assay. Plasma LH and FSH concentrations were determined using a previously described immunofluorimetric assay [22,23]. The sensitivity of the assay, expressed as the minimal detectable dose, was 0.1 IU/ml. The cross-reactivities with free α- and β- subunits of LH, FSH and thyroid-stimulating hormone were less than 2% [22]. Intra-assay and inter-assay coefficients of variation were 4.9 and 7.4%, respectively.

Plasma estradiol, 17OHP, androstenedione, cortisol and testosterone were determined by radioimmunoassay (Radim; Pomezia, Rome, Italy) as described previously [24]. Based on two quality control samples the average within- and between-assay coefficients of variation were 4.0 and 9.7%, respectively.

Plasma insulin was determined using an immunoradiometric assay (Biosource Europa SA, Nivelles, Belgium). Based on two quality control samples the average within- and between-assay coefficients of variation were respectively 4.5 and 11.7%.

Plasma C-peptide concentrations were determined using a chemiluminescence assay (Immulite One; Diagnostic Products Corporation, Los Angeles, CA, USA). The average within- and between- assay coefficients of variation were 4.5 and 8.2%, respectively, based on two quality control samples.

Statistical analysis

We tested the data for significant differences between groups, after one-way analysis of variance, using Student’s t test for paired or unpaired data, as appropriate. Data are expressed as mean SEM.

Results

Table I shows the endocrine pattern of all subjects before and during the 6th mont\h of metformin administration. These data show that metformin administration in non-obese PCOS subjects significantly modified plasma LH, testosterone and insulin levels, as well as LH/FSH ratio, while no changes were observed for androstenedione and 17OHP levels in plasma. Interestingly, the glucose/insulin ratio was perfectly normal (above the cut-off of 4.5) both before and under metformin administration. Considering results of the OGTT, the mean insulin response after 90 min was significantly reduced under metformin administration (Figure 1).

Table I. Endocrine parameters of all PCOS patients (n = 42) before and under metformin administration.

To gain a better understanding of these results, all patients were divided into two groups according to their insulin response in the OGTT: hyperinsulinemic (n = 27) and non-hyperinsulinemic (n = 15) PCOS patients. According to our laboratory, a hyperinsulinemic response to a glucose load occurs when insulin level is reported to be > 45 U/ml in at least two consecutive blood samples during the OGTT. When patients were considered according to the insulin response to the OGTT a completely different setting was outlined (Table II): hyperinsulinemic PCOS subjects showed a greater response to metformin administration than non-hyperinsulinemic (i.e. normoinsulinemic) PCOS subjects. The former had significant reductions in plasma LH, estradiol, testosterone, C-peptide and insulin levels as well as LH/FSH ratio after metformin administration. Conversely, normoinsulinemic subjects showed just the reduction of plasma LH level and LH/FSH ratio, with no change of any other endocrine parameter evaluated (Table II). Insulin response to the OGTT was also markedly different during metformin administration, being reduced only in hyperinsulinemic subjects (Figure 2). However, it must be pointed out that hyperinsulinemic patients remained far from being similar to normoinsulinemic subjects in terms of insulin response to glucose load, also under metformin administration.

With the purpose of obtaining insight into the hyperinsulinemic patients, they were subdivided according to their plasma androstenedione levels at baseline. Our laboratory considers hyperandrogenism as present when plasma androstenedione level is >3 ng/100 ml [23]. The endocrine parameters of the hyperandrogenic (n = 15) and normoandrogenic (n = 12) hyperinsulinemic patients are reported in Table III. According to such subdivision, metformin administration induced significant changes in endocrine parameters in the hyperinsulinemic hyperandrogenic PCOS patients. As expected, there was a significant reduction of LH, insulin, C-peptide and LH/ FSH ratio, and also of plasma testosterone, androstenedione and 17OHP levels. Non-hyperandrogenic hyperinsulinemic PCOS patients showed only the reduction of insulin, C-peptide and estradiol levels in plasma. It is interesting to notice that these hyperandrogenic subjects showed also higher plasma LH and insulin levels than normoandrogenic subjects. These latter patients showed normal LH/ FSH ratio and no change in plasma levels of LH under metformin administration (Table III).

Figure 1. Insulin response to oral glucose tolerance test at time 0 and +90 min in patients with polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS): [white square], all PCOS patients at baseline; [black square], all PCOS patients under metformin. Data means with standard error of the mean represented by vertical bars. After 6 months of metformin administration, mean insulin response to oral glucose load was significantly reduced over the whole group of PCOS patients: *p

Table II. Endocrine parameters of PCOS subjects divided according to insulin response during the OGTT.

When patients were considered according to their menstrual cyclicity, it was found that all amenorrheic subjects recovered the occurrence of menstrual cycles (Table IV), with normal cycles in 81% of the subjects. If patients were considered according to the presence of hyperinsulinism or its association with hyperandrogenism, it was revealed that all amenorrheic subjects recovered menstrual cyclicity (eumenorrhea or oligomenorrhea); however, no great differences were observed among the groups (Table V) although menstrual cycles occurred more frequently in hyperinsulinemic than in normoinsulinemic PCOS subjects.

None of the 42 patients studied reported a significant change in BMI during the study period. The Ferriman-Gallway score was significantly reduced in all patients (before: 23.1 1.4, under metformin: 13.80.9, p

Figure 2. Insulin response to oral glucose tolerance test at time 0 and +90 in hyper- and normoinsulimenic patients with polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS): [white square], hyperinsulinemic PCOS patients at baseline; [black square], hyperinsulinemic PCOS patients under metformin; [black square], normoinsulinemic PCOS patients at baseline; [black square], normoinsulinemic PCOS patients under metformin. Data means with standard error of the mean represented by vertical bars. After 6 months of metformin administration, mean insulin response to oral glucose load was significantly reduced only in hyperinsulinemic subjects: *p

Table III. Endocrine parameters of hyperinsulinemic and non- hyperinsulinemic PCOS patients before and under metformin administration.

Table IV. Change in menstrual cycle frequency of PCOS women (n; = 42) during metformin administration.

Discussion

The present study demonstrated that metformin induces significant positive endocrine changes in non-obese PCOS patients, restoring menstrual cyclicity in a great percentage of cases, and that the concomitant presence of hyperinsulinism and hyperandrogenism can be considered a clinical index to select patients to treat using metformin.

There is a great abundance of data demonstrating that metformin can be used to treat several disturbances typical of PCOS, including menstrual dysfunctions, hyperandrogenism, hyperinsulinism, insulin resistance, and infertility related to anovulation. It is well known that such positive effects are mediated through the reduction of insulin resistance and plasma insulin levels, which determines the reduction of circulating androgens [19,25-27]. Although to date metformin administration has been demonstrated to be effective both in obese and non-obese PCOS patients [9,10,19,25,28,29], obese PCOS patients have been demonstrated to be those in whom metformin has the greater chance to be effective since the treatment deeply affects body weight through the great improvement of metabolic pathways. Indeed, metformin-induced weight loss or weight loss due to dieting has been demonstrated to decrease insulin resistance, improve all symptoms of PCOS, and restore menstrual cyclicity and ovulation [30], thus supporting that excess of body fat is one of the main effectors of hyperinsulinemia and insulin resistance, as well as of all the endocrine abnormalities linked to them.

Despite the lack of excess of weight, non-obese PCOS patients have been reported as achieving optimal improvement of endocrine and menstrual disturbances when undergoing metformin administration [19,25]. Our data confirm previous reports, i.e. that metformin administration reduces LH, insulin and LH/FSH ratio with little or no apparent effect on plasma androgen levels [31], although other authors demonstrated a great efficacy [16,19,21,25]. Such discrepancy can be easily explained by the fact that most of these studies probably enrolled a mixture of PCOS patients with different (low or normal) insulin sensitivities or used quite different metformin dosages. For this reason in our study we tested the insulin response to oral glucose load (i.e. OGTT) of our patients and then analyzed them subdivided into groups on the basis of their insulin response.

Using such criteria we distinguished normo- and hyperinsulinemic PCOS patients. Although the two groups were not different before treatment, after metformin administration LH and LH/FSH ratio decreased in both groups but only the hyperinsulinemic patients showed significant reductions in plasma C-peptide, insulin and testosterone levels. These data are in agreement with previous reports showing that in-non obese PCOS patients the presence of normoinsulinemia might hide an exaggerated response to glucose load (i.e. hyperinsulinism) [19] and only the documentation of such abnormal response seems to indicate the higher level of eligibility to metformin administration. In addition, it is of interest to notice that the reduction of C-peptide is typical only in hyperinsulinemic subjects, thus confirming that metformin administration induces reduced synthesis of proinsulin and its cleavage to insulin.

Table V. Change in menstrual cycle frequency of PCOS women (n = 42) during metformin administration according to endocrine parameters.

Since hyperandrogenism is one of the endocrine characteristics of PCOS patients [24], to elucidate the issue further we divided the hyperinsulinemic subjects according to their plasma androstenedione levels at baseline. Such subdivision permitted us to outline that 15 out of 27 (55%) hyperinsulinemic PCOS patients were hyperandrogenic (i.e. plasma androstenedione > 3 ng/ml) and that among hyperinsulinemic PCOS subjects only those with the hyperandrogenic state showed elevated LH plasma levels and LH/FSH ratio > 2.5. Interestingly, only these patients were shown to benefit fully from the metformin administration since our data demonstrated the reduction of insulin, C-peptide, testosterone and androstenedione levels in plasma as well as LH and LH/FSH ratio. Conversely, non- hyperandrogenic hyperinsulinemic subjects showed only the reduction of plasma estradiol, C-peptide and insulin levels.

These observation\s confirm previous, extensively reported results [29] : that the increase of plasma LH levels frequently observed in PCOS patients is not related to the presence of hyperinsulinemia but to the presence of high androgen plasma levels. However, our data confirm the hypothesis that not every woman with insulin resistance and hyperinsulinemia develops hyperandrogenism and thus support the hypothesis that there are two subpopulations of PCOS patients, one with absence of ovarian hypersensitivity to insulin and one with a greater ovarian hypersensitivity to insulin, as recently proposed [32].

Menstrual cyclicity was severely compromised in our PCOS patients since there was a high rate of oligomenorrhea and a small percentage of amenorrhea. Nevertheless menstrual cyclicity was restored in all subjects under study. Indeed, all amenorrheic subjects recovered the occurrence of menses, although three out of ten became oligomenorrheic. Conversely, 26 out of 32 oligomenorrheic patients become eumenorrheic and only six did not show any change in their oligomenorrhea. When considering all patients according to the presence of hyperinsulinsm and/or hyperandrogenism, we observed that there was a trend to a higher rate of normalization of menstrual cyclicity in hyperinsulinemic subjects. However, our data support the fact that metformin administration induced the restoration of menstrual cyclicity by acting on all endocrine abnormalities (i.e. hyperinsulinsm, reduced insulin sensitivity, hyperandrogenism, high LH) independendy of the prevalence of each. Such results are in agreement with previous reports that metformin restores menstrual cyclicity in most PCOS patients [19,33], although our data show a higher success rate in terms of menstrual cyclicity since 70% of amenorrheic and 81% of oligomenorrheic patients under study became eumenorrheic after 6 months of metformin administration, taking in account that all amenorrheic subjects recovered menstrual cyclicity.

In conclusion, our study demonstrated that metformin can be proposed as a therapeutic strategy in non-obese PCOS patients since it is effective in restoring an appropriate endocrine balance that induces the occurrence of ovarian activity and menstrual bleeding. Moreover, our data clearly show that at the same time metformin decreases abnormal LH, LH/FSH ratio, testosterone and androstenedione levels only when such abnormalities are coupled to hyperinsulinemia. This observation permits us to infer that some but probably not all nonobese PCOS patients have a greater responsiveness to insulin-stimulated androgen synthesis from ovary and these PCOS patients are those who might achieve greater improvement than others from metformin administration. From a practical point of view our data suggest that hyperandrogenic hyperinsulinemic non-obese PCOS patients might gain more benefit from metformin than others.

References

1. Ibanez L, Valls C, Ferrer A, Ong K, Dunger DB, De Zengher F. Additive effects of insulin-sensitizing and anti-androgen treatment in young, non obese women with hyperinsulinism, hyperandrogenism, dyslipidemia and anovulation. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2002;87:2870- 2874.

2. Ibanez L, Vails C, Ferrer A, Marcos MV, Rodriguez Hierro F, De Zengher F. Sensitization to insulin induces ovulation in nonobese adolescents with anovulatory hyperandrogenism. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2001;86:3595-3598.

3. Taylor AE. Polycystic ovary syndrome. Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am 1998;27:877-902.

4. Dunaif A. Insulin resistance and the polycystic ovary syndrome: mechanism and implications for pathogenesis. Endocr Rev 1997;18:774-800.

5. Lanzone A, Fulghesu AM, Fortini A, Cutillo G, Cucinelli F, Di Simone N, Caruso A, Mancuso S. Long-term naltrexone treatment reduces the exaggerated insulin secretion in patients with polycystic ovary disease. Obstet Gynecol 1993;82:191-196.

6. Frank S. Polycystic ovary syndrome. N Engl J Med 1995;333:853- 861.

7. Nestler JE, Strauss JF. Insulin as an effector of human ovarian and adrenal steroid metabolism. Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am 1991;20:807-823.

8. Barbieri RL, Makris A, Randall RW, Daniels G, Kistner RW, Ryan KJ. Insulin stimulates androgen accumulation in incubations of ovarian stroma obtained from women with hyperandrogenism. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1986;62:904-910.

9. Nestler JE, Powers LP, Matt DW. A direct effect of hyperinsulinemia on serum sex hormone binding globulin levels in obese women with polycystic ovary syndrome. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1991;72:83-89.

10. De Leo V, La Marca A, Ditto A, Morgante G, Cianci A. Effects of metformin on gonadotropin-induced ovulation in women with polycystic ovary syndrome. Fertil Steril 1999;72:282-285.

11. Lillioja S, Mott D, Spraul M. Insulin resistance and insulin secretory dysfunction as precursors of non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus. N Engl J Med 1993;329:1988-1992.

12. Nardo LG, Rai R. Metformin therapy in the management of polycystic ovary syndrome: endocrine, metabolic and reproductive effects. Gynecol Endocrinol 2001;15:373-380.

13. Heaney D, Majid A, Junor B. Bicarbonate haemodialysis as a treatment of metformin overdose. Nephrol Dial Transplant 1997;12:1046-1047.

14. DeFronzo RA, Goodman AM. Efficacy of metformin in patients with non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus. The Multicenter Metformin Study Group. N Engl J Med 1995;333:541-549.

15. Dunn CJ, Peters DH. Metformin. A review of its pharmacological properties and therapeutic uses in non-insulin- dependent diabetes mellitus. Drugs 1997;49:721-749.

16. La Marca A, Egbe TO, Morgante G, Paglia T, Ciani A, De Leo V. Metformin treatment reduces ovarian cytochrome P-450c17α response to human chorionic gonadotrophin in women with insulin resistance-related polycystic ovary syndrome. Hum Reprod 2000;15:21- 23.

17. Vendermolen DT, Ratts VS, Evans WS, Stovall DW, Kauma SW, Nestler JE. Metformin increases the ovulatory rate and pregnancy rate from clomiphene citrate in patients with polycystic ovary syndrome who are resistant to clomiphene citrate alone. Fertil Steril 2001;75:310-315.

18. Velazquez EM, Mendoza S, Hamer T, Sosa F, Glueck CJ. Metformin therapy in polycystic ovary syndrome reduces hyperinsulinemia, insulin resistance, hyperandrogenism and systolic blood pressure, while facilitating normal menses and pregnancy. Metabolism 1994;43:647-654.

19. Genazzani AD, Battaglia C, Malavasi B, Strucchi C, Tortolani F, Gamba O. Metformin administration modulates and restores luteinizing hormone spontaneous episodic secretion and ovarian function in nonobese patients with polycystic ovary syndrome. Fertil Steril 2004;81:114-119.

20. Legro RS, Finegood D, Dunaif A. Fasting glucose to insulin ratio is a useful measure of insulin sensitivity in women with polycystic ovary syndrome. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1998;83:2694- 2698.

21. Kolodziejczyk B, Duleba AJ, Spaczynski RZ, Pawelczyk L. Metformin therapy decreases hyperandrogenism and hyperinsulinemia in women with polycystic ovary syndrome. Fertil Steril 2000;73:1149- 1154.

22. Genazzani AD, Petraglia F, Fabbri G, Monzani A, Montanini V, Genazzani AR. Evidence of luteinizing hormone secretion in hypothalamic amenorrhea associated with weight loss. Fertil Steril 1990;54:222-226.

23. Genazzani AD, Petraglia F, Benatti R, Montanini V, Algeri I, Volpe A, Genazzani AR. Luteinizing hormone (LH) secretory burst duration is independent from LH, prolactin or gonadal steroid plasma levels in amenorrheic women. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1991;72:1220- 1225.

24. Genazzani AD, Petraglia F, Pianazzi F, Volpogni C, Genazzani AR. The concomitant release of androstenedione with cortisol and luteinizing hormone pulsatile releases distinguishes adrenal from ovarian hyperandrogenism. Gynecol Endocrinol 1993;7:33-41.

25. Maciel GAR, Scares JM, Da Motta ELA, Haidar M, De Lima GR, Baracat EC. Nonobese women with PCOS syndrome respond better than obese women to treatment with metformin. Fertil Steril 2004;81:355- 360.

26. Nestler JE, Jakubowicz DJ. Decreases in ovarian cytochrome P450c17α activity and serum free testosterone after reduction of insulin secretion in polycystic ovary syndrome. N Engl J Med 1996;335:617-623.

27. Nestler JE, Stovall D, Akhter N, Iuorno MJ, Jakubowicz DJ. Strategies for the use of insulin-sensitizing drugs to treat infertility in women with polycystic ovary syndrome. Fertil Steril 2002;77:209-215.

28. De Leo V, La Marca A, Orvieto R, Morgante G. Effect of metformin on insulin-like growth factor (IGF) I and IGF-binding protein I in polycystic ovary syndrome. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2000;85:1598-1600.

29. De Leo V, La Marca A, Petraglia F. Insulin-lowering agents in the management of polycystic ovary syndrome. Endocr Rev 2003;24:633- 667.

30. Nestler JE, Jakubowicz DJ, Evans WS, Pasquali R. Effects of metformin on spontaneous and clomiphene-induced ovulation in the polycystic ovary syndrome. N Engl J Med 1998;338:1876-1880.

31. Unluhizarci K, Kelestimur F, Bayram F, Sahin Y, Tutus A. The effects of metformin on insulin resistance and ovarian steroidogenesis in women with polycystic ovary syndrome. Clin Endocrinol (Oxf) 1999;51:231-236.

32. Baillargeon JP, Nestler JE. Polycystic ovary syndrome: a syndrome of ovarian hypersensitivity to insulin? J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2006;91:22-24.

33. Morin-Papunen LC, Koivunen RM, Ruokonen A, Martikainen HN. Metformin therapy improves the menstrual pattern with minimal endocrine metabolic effects in women with polycystic ovary syndrome. Fertil Steril 1998;69:691-696.

ALESSANDRO D. GENAZZANI1, CHIARA LANZONI1, FEDERICA RICCHIERI1, ENRICA BARALDI2, ELENA CASAROSA3, & VALERIO M. JASONNI1

1 Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, University of Modena and Reggio Emilia, Modena, Italy, 2 Laboratory of Endocrinology, Azienda Policlinico, Modena, Italy, and 3 Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, University of Pisa, Pisa, Italy

(Received 28 December 2006; revised 8 January 2007; accepted 10 January 2007)

Corresponden\ce: A. D. Genazzani, Gynecological Endocrinology Unit, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, University of Modena and Reggio Emilia, Via del Pozzo 71, 41100 Modena, Italy. Tel: +39 59 4222278. Fax: +39 59 4224394. E-mail: [email protected]

Copyright Taylor & Francis Ltd. Mar 2007

(c) 2007 Gynecological Endocrinology. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

eGene’s HDA-GT12 Genetic Analyzer Demonstrates the Rapid H5N1 Avian Influenza Virus Detection

eGene Inc. (OTCBB:EGEI), developer of a revolutionary high-performance genetic analysis technology, announced today that its HDA-GT12(TM) demonstrates rapid detection of the H5N1 avian influenza virus. The technical article appears in American Biotechnology Laboratory April, 2007 (Vol. 25, No. 5) issue, in the story: “Rapid H5N1 Subtype Avian Influenza Virus Detection.” http://www.americanbiotechnologylaboratory.com/articles/index.php?3- all-abl/b0407lee.pdf

(Due to its length, this URL may need to be copied/pasted into your Internet browser’s address field. Remove the extra space if one exists.)

eGene and the Genome Institute of Singapore (GIS) have worked together to develop a rapid, highly sensitive, and cost-effective screening approach for H5N1 avian influenza virus detection. The HDA system, in combination with the GIS’s single-step RT­PCR, is a simple and sensitive assay for H5N1 avian influenza detection that can detect as few as 10 copies of the viral RNA.

“Our system platform provides an efficient way for pathogen detection in molecular diagnostic markets. After the recent merger announcement with Qiagen, we believe the combined companies can accelerate the availability of our technologies into the market and into the hands of more customers and to benefit mankind,” said Ming S. Liu, Ph.D., Chief Executive Officer of eGene.

About eGene Inc.

eGene developed the HDA-GT12(TM) (high performance DNA analyzer for genotyping on 12 channels). The system analyzes the genetic fingerprints of living organisms. It performs fast DNA sample screening and high-resolution DNA fragment analysis (2-5bp). The system also analyzes the quality and quantity of RNA in gene expression market. The company sells cartridges that are specific to the type of analysis to be performed. All data is then received in digital form for appropriate transmission and storage.

eGene Inc. (www.egeneinc.com) focuses its core technologies of capillary electrophoresis, liquid handling and automation to develop and manufacture low-cost microfluidic, miniaturized digital analyzers systems, software and consumables for biological materials testing applications. These products detect, quantify, identify and characterize biomolecules including DNA and RNA at high rates of specificity and sensitivity while automating routine and non-routine laboratory and industrial procedures critical to product safety, development quality and productivity.

This release contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of the “safe harbor” provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Such statements are made based on management’s current expectations and beliefs. Actual results may vary from those currently anticipated based upon a number of factors. The company undertakes no obligation to publicly release any revision, which may be made to reflect events or circumstances after the date hereof.

Copaxone, Antibiotic Combination Could Help MS Sufferers

Teva Pharmaceuticals said a combination of Copaxone and antibiotic minocycline reduced brain lesions in patients with relapsing-remitting multiple sclerosis, compared to receiving Copaxone alone.

New data from a randomized, double-blind study showed that a combination of Copaxone with the oral antibiotic minocycline reduced T1 Gadolinium enhancing lesions of the brain by 63% and reduced the number of new T2 lesions in patients by 65%. These results trended toward but did not reach statistical significance.

Luanne Metz, professor at the Department of Clinical Neuroscience of the University of Calgary, and principal investigator, said: “The results of this study indicated that further exploration of this combination is warranted, as the established effect of Copaxone on disease activity may be boosted when used in combination with minocycline for the treatment of active relapsing-remitting patients.”

Many Dogwood Types Can Thrive in Our Area

By Roberta Stewart The Planter’s Palette

If you’ve driven south through Illinois, Indiana, or Missouri in March, the wonder of spring flowering trees surely has refreshed your winter soul. Especially resplendent is Flowering dogwood (Cornus florida), which abounds in Zone 6, one zone south. It grows here, too, but with neither the vigor nor abundance seen in a warmer climate.

Dogwood trees can be a part of your northern Illinois landscape with the right selection, placement and care.

Flowering dogwood

Cornus florida is a “standard bearer,” against which all other dogwood trees are compared. It is beloved for many reasons – bloom, fall color, fruit and bark, as well as its strong horizontal and low- branching habit.

In northern Illinois, flowering dogwood requires protection from extremes of sun, drought, and cold. Diseases such as anthracnose can be thwarted with moist, well-drained soil amended with acid. A layer of mulch keeps roots cool and evenly moist. This is good for all dogwoods, but essential for flowering dogwood.

Leaves of flowering dogwood layer upon horizontal branches, lending deep shade when sited in sunnier locations. It prefers to be planted in shade, where it will have an airier appearance.

In late April, before leaves open, it bursts into bloom. Small flower clusters cradle within four heart-shaped bracts, forming a 3- to 4-inch bloom. The creamy-white bracts are eye-catching. Fruit develops from the blossoms, ripening to a glistening red in September or October.

As fall progresses, leaves turn red-purple, then drop to expose a coarse-textured bark that hangs like nuggets on the trunk. This bark adds to the horizontal winter appeal – a mature tree spreads broadly beyond its 25-foot height. This species is worth the extra care in siting that it requires in zone 5.

Chinese dogwood

Chinese or Kousa dogwood thrives better in our area. Cornus kousa has some features in common with flowering dogwood, including four showy bracts that surround the flower.

Bracts of Kousa are pointed and, unlike the C. florida, don’t appear until after leaves have unfurled, usually in early June. This can be an advantage when it comes to occasional late frosts. The 2- to 4-inch blooms sit decoratively on top of the leaves, with bracts accenting the horizontal branches from base to tip-of-tree for up to six weeks.

The profuse blooms develop into 1-inch raspberry-red fruit ripening from August to October. Fruit is edible and is attractive to birds. Fall leaf color is a beautiful deep red.

Advantages of Kousa dogwood include its tolerance of more sun and its resistance to anthracnose. This allows broader siting choices, though cultural requirements mentioned for flowering dogwood must still be adhered to for it to truly thrive. Because it can tolerate full sun, it can create shade for outdoor living areas.

Kousa dogwood is more upright, stiffly when young. With age it becomes rounded and spreading. Mosaic bark on older trunks – rich brown, tan, and gray – adds character, especially when wet or in winter. Similar to flowering dogwood, it grows 20 to 30 feet tall, though usually not broader.

A weeping Kousa cultivar, C. kousa Elizabeth Lustgarten, adds interest as a specimen planting. Its beautiful flower bracts line branches that arch out and downward. Given this habit, it generally stays smaller, growing only to 15 feet.

Dogwood hybrids

The greatest development comes from Rutgers University, where six hybrids were developed from flowering dogwood and Kousa dogwood. They combine the best features of each – flowering dogwood’s stronger horizontal branching habit and the disease resistance of Kousa dogwood. Like their parents, these hybrids will mature to 20 feet or slightly taller.

Rutger’s trees bloom earlier than the Kousa, midway between the bloom times for the parents. Because of hybridization, the flower is sterile and trees will not set fruit. This can be viewed as either desirable or a drawback. If you prefer not to attract birds, then the hybrids are for you.

Each hybrid offers variations on its parents’ blooms, some with pointed bracts, others with more rounded bracts. One outstanding variation comes with hybrid Stellar Pink (Cornus x Rutgan). It has Kousa’s pointed bracts, but with a distinctive soft pink color. Another, Constellation (Cornus x Rutcan), has beautifully full, rounded bracts similar to the flowering dogwood, in a soft white.

The formal names of these Rutgers Hybrids are similar and can get confused in the trade-as Rutgan and Rutcan mentioned above. Shop for trees when bracts are showing, if possible, to confirm that your tree blooms pink or white, as you wish.

Last but not least

There are two more 20-foot tree forms to consider. Their blooms lack showy bracts, but these trees abound with large clusters of flowers.

One is Cornus mas, or Corneliancherry dogwood. Of all Cornus species, it is the most durable and longest-lived for Midwest use. It tolerates heavier clay soils, withstands sun or part shade, and has cold hardiness to Wisconsin’s zone 4.

It is an early-spring standout. More upright in habit, its multiple trunks extend into fine stems that bear myriad yellow flower clusters in March. The fruit ripen to a bright cherry-red in July. This fruit not only provides a snack for birds, it can be made into preserves or syrup-if you get there first. The cultivar, C. mas Golden Glory, is especially suited to the Chicago area.

Would I forget the Pagoda dogwood? Not a chance! Cornus alternifolia is renowned for its strong horizontal branching with white flower clusters sitting atop glossy leaves in June.

Don’t think of dogwood strictly as a shrub or a southern tree. Many types of dogwood trees will thrive in our area. Just give them some tender loving care and enjoy their beauty – without the drive south.

– Roberta Stewart is a horticulturist and woody plant specialist at The Planter’s Palette, 28W571 Roosevelt Road, Winfield, IL 60190. Call (630) 293-1040.

(c) 2007 Daily Herald; Arlington Heights, Ill.. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Debbie Walsh Named CEO at USC University Hospital and USC Norris Cancer Hospital

Tenet California announced today that Debbie Walsh has been named chief executive officer of USC University Hospital, a 265-bed academic medical center, and USC Norris Cancer Hospital, a 60-bed hospital that specializes in cancer treatment, effective immediately. Walsh, 51, has served as the hospitals’ interim chief executive officer since June 2006 and has been the chief operating officer since 2003. She is a Registered Nurse with a master’s degree in nursing, and also has served as the chief nursing officer for two years.

“Debbie is an accomplished health care executive with nearly 30 years of management and clinical experience,” said Jeffrey Flocken, senior vice president for Tenet’s California Region. “She has successfully led USC University Hospital and USC Norris to many accomplishments in the past year, most notably the completion of the new $150 million Norris Inpatient Tower in January. Debbie is respected by the physicians and nurses at both hospitals, and is well-deserving of this promotion.”

“For the past 12 years, I’ve been very fortunate to work in many leadership positions at these two hospitals and watch them grow,” said Walsh. “I look forward to continuing to develop our services and work with our employees, physicians, the Keck School of Medicine and the University of Southern California to provide quality care to our patients.”

In addition to shepherding the completion of the new Norris Inpatient Tower, Walsh has achieved several significant accomplishments during her tenure as interim CEO. In 2006, USC University Hospital was the top-rated hospital on Tenet’s internal balanced score card, which measures performance indicators such as quality and financial performance. She also led the implementation of new information technology systems at USC Norris and an update of those at USC University Hospital. USC University Hospital also received national recognition in U.S. News and World Report’s most recent issue of “America’s Best Hospitals” for making the list in multiple specialties, including one ranking in the top 10 for ophthalmology. Her leadership has been instrumental in helping the academic medical center improve the clinical performance measures of USC University Hospital’s abdominal transplant program.

Walsh has worked in multiple departments during her tenure at USCUH and USC Norris, including as associate administrator of interventional and diagnostic services, director of surgical services and director of the outpatient surgery center. She began her career as a nurse and spent eight years in clinical practice.

Walsh has a bachelor’s degree in nursing from California State University, Los Angeles and a master’s degree in nursing from Azusa Pacific University in Azusa, Calif.

Tenet California, a region of Tenet Healthcare Corporation (NYSE: THC), comprises 17 acute care hospitals in California and one in Nebraska with approximately 3,424 beds and numerous related health care services. The region includes USC University Hospital in Los Angeles and Creighton University Medical Center in Omaha, Neb. — two renowned academic medical centers — as well as major urban and community hospitals that serve large and diverse populations in Southern, Northern and Central California.

Tenet California’s hospitals are Community Hospital of Los Gatos, Desert Regional Medical Center, Doctors Hospital of Manteca, Doctors Medical Center of Modesto, Fountain Valley Regional Hospital and Medical Center, Garden Grove Hospital and Medical Center, Irvine Regional Hospital and

Medical Center, John F. Kennedy Memorial Hospital, Lakewood Regional Medical Center, Los Alamitos Medical Center, Placentia-Linda Hospital, San Dimas Community Hospital, San Ramon Medical Center, Sierra Vista Regional Medical Center, Twin Cities Community Hospital and USC University Hospital. The region’s sole Nebraska hospital is Creighton University Medical Center in Omaha. Tenet California also includes USC Norris Cancer Hospital, a specialty hospital. Tenet’s hospitals aim to provide the best possible care to every patient who comes through their doors, with a clear focus on quality and service. Tenet can be found on the World Wide Web at www.tenethealth.com.

[NOTE TO EDITORS: A digital photograph of Debbie Walsh is available by email on request. Please call Valeria Wilkes in Tenet’s Corporate Communications department at (469) 893-6114.]